BALANCE OF PLANT AGREEMENT - force.com

CCOONNTTEENNTTSS

THE INTERCONNECTION PROCESS ...........................................................................................1 Interconnection Application .....................................................................................................1 Interconnection Study ...............................................................................................................2 Interconnection and Operating Agreement.............................................................................2 Project Design and Construction .............................................................................................2 Ongoing Operations ..................................................................................................................2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................3

Major Component Design Requirements ....................................................................................3 Data ..............................................................................................................................................3 Isolating Transformer(s) ...............................................................................................................3 Isolation Device ............................................................................................................................4 Interconnection Lines ...................................................................................................................4 Termination Structure ...................................................................................................................4

Relaying Design Requirements ....................................................................................................4 Protective Relaying General Considerations................................................................................5 Momentary Paralleling..................................................................................................................5 Instrument Transformer Requirements ........................................................................................5 Direct Transfer Trip (DTT) ............................................................................................................5 Reverse Power Relaying for Non-Flow-back ...............................................................................6 Automatic Reclosing.....................................................................................................................6 Single-Phase Sectionalizing.........................................................................................................6 Synchronous Projects...................................................................................................................7 Induction Projects .........................................................................................................................8 Inverter-Type Projects ..................................................................................................................9 Relay Setting Criteria..................................................................................................................10 Maintenance and Testing ...........................................................................................................11 Installation and Design Approval................................................................................................11

Telemetry and Disturbance Monitoring Requirements ............................................................12

Miscellaneous Operational Requirements ................................................................................14 Operating in Parallel ...................................................................................................................14 Reactive Power Control..............................................................................................................15 Standby Power ...........................................................................................................................15 System Stability and Site Limitations .........................................................................................15

Revenue Metering Requirements ...............................................................................................16

Communication Circuits..............................................................................................................17

CCOONNTTEENNTTSS

APPENDIX A INTERCONNECTION APPLICATION APPENDIX B SYNCHRONOUS AND INDUCTION GENERATORS - REQUIRED DATA APPENDIX C INVERTER-TYPE GENERATORS - REQUIRED DATA APPENDIX D INTERCONNECTION STUDY AGREEMENT APPENDIX E INTERCONNECTION AND OPERATING AGREEMENT APPENDIX F CONTACT LIST

IINNTTEERRCCOONNNNEECCTTIIOONN PPRROOCCEESSSS

1

The Interconnection Process This section outlines the process for interconnecting 2 MW or more of generation to the Utility electric system. This includes both new Projects and modifications to existing Projects. The general process is shown in Figure 1. The Utility is required to complete all of its obligations for interconnection of the Project to the Utility system within 18 weeks from the time a complete Interconnection Application is received by the Utility. A completed Interconnection Application consists of an application, data (Appendix B or C), and filing fee.

Delays that are the responsibility of Project Developer or attributable to the time lapse while the Utility diligently seeks to secure necessary rights-of-way, governmental permitting, zoning requirements, etc, will not be counted in the time to meet the 18 week deadline. The Utility shall have no responsibility to pursue court action to obtain these items. Interconnection Application The Project Developer must first submit an Interconnection Application to the Utility. A separate application is required for each Project or Project site. A blank Interconnection Application can be found in Appendix A. A list of the required interconnection data, depending on the capacity rating and type of generation, can be found in Appendices B and C. A complete submittal of required interconnection data and filing fee of $500 must accompany the Interconnection Application. The Utility will notify the Project Developer within three business days of receipt of an Interconnection Application. If any portion of the Interconnection Application, data submittal, or filing fee is incomplete and/or missing, the unapproved Interconnection Application will be sent back to the Project Developer with the deficiencies clearly identified. Once the Utility has accepted an Interconnection Application, the Project is assigned a position in the Project queue maintained by the Utility. The Project position in the Project queue is determined by the date the Utility received the accepted Interconnection Application. The Utility will provide the Project Developer up to two hours of consultation related to the Project’s interconnection to the Utility system and will include a good faith estimate of the Utility’s charges to complete the interconnection, including

Figure 1: The Interconnection Process

Utility Receives Interconnection

Application + Data + $500 Filing Fee

No

No Interconnection

Application Complete?

Unapproved Application Returned to Project Developer

with Explanation

2 Hour Consultation and

Provide I&OA

Executed Study Agreement?

Queue Priority Lost

Utility Performs Interconnection Study

Executed Interconnection and

Operating Agreement?

Project Design and Construction

No Queue Priority Lost

Yes

Yes

Yes

Utility Acknowledges

Receipt within 3 Business Days

IINNTTEERRCCOONNNNEECCTTIIOONN PPRROOCCEESSSS

2

the estimated study fees, based on the information available to the Utility at that time. Interconnection Study The Utility will perform an Interconnection Study to determine the impact of the project on the Utility’s system, and the Utility’s system modifications required for safe and reliable interconnection of the Project to the Utility’s system. The Project Developer is required to sign the Interconnection Study Agreement found in Appendix D and is encouraged to return the signed Interconnection Study Agreement to the Utility with the completed Interconnection Application to avoid delays in the interconnection process. Any delay in execution of the Interconnection Study Agreement will not toll the interconnection deadlines. The Utility will charge the Project Developer for the costs associated with completion of the Interconnection Study. The costs will not exceed the lesser of either of the following:

(1) Five percent of the estimated total cost of the Project, or

(2) $10,000 Interconnection Study fees are not required if the Interconnection Study determines that the Project’s aggregate export capacity is less than 15% of the line section peak load and the project does not contribute more than 25% of the maximum short circuit current at the Point of Common Coupling (PCC) as defined by IEEE 1547. Interconnection and Operating Agreement The Utility will submit an Interconnection and Operating Agreement (I&OA) to the Project Developer, as soon as practical, after the two hour consultation described earlier. A sample Interconnection and Operating Agreement can be found in Appendix E. The Interconnection and Operating Agreement will cover matters customarily addressed in such agreements in accordance with Good Utility Practice, including, without limitation, construction of facilities, system operation, interconnection cost and billing, defaults and remedies, insurance, and liability. All Utility costs associated with making modifications to its distribution system will be paid by the Project Developer. Any delay in execution of the Interconnection and Operating Agreement will not count toward the interconnection deadlines. Project Design and Construction After the Interconnection and Operating Agreement is executed, the Utility will proceed to acquire necessary rights-of-way, procure required equipment, and design and construct the Interconnection Facilities. Ongoing Operations The Project Developer and Utility will exchange contact information and update this information from time to time. A sample Contact List can be found in Appendix F.

TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS

3

Technical Requirements The following discussion details the technical requirements for interconnection of 2 MW or more of generation. Many of these requirements will vary based on the capacity rating of the Project, type of generation being used, and mode of operation (Flow-back or Non-Flow-back). A few of the requirements will vary based on location of the interconnection (isolated load and available fault current). Certain major component, relaying, telemetry, and operational requirements must be met to provide compatibility between the Project equipment and the Utility electric system, and to assure that the safety and reliability of the electric system is not degraded by the interconnection. Upgraded revenue metering may be required for the Project. Major Component Design Requirements The data requested in Appendix B or C, data for all major equipment and relaying proposed by the Project Developer, must be submitted as part of the initial application for review and approval by the Utility. The Utility may request additional data be submitted as necessary during the study phase to clarify the operation of the Project facilities. Once installed, the interconnection equipment must be reviewed and approved by the Utility prior to being connected to the Utility electric system and before parallel operation is allowed. Data The data that the Utility requires to evaluate the proposed interconnection is documented on “fill in the blank” checklists by generator type in Appendices B and C. A site plan, one-line diagrams, and interconnection protection system details of the Project are required as part of the application data. The generator manufacturer data package should also be supplied. Isolating Transformer(s) If an isolating transformer is required, the transformer must comply with the current ANSI Standard C57.12. The transformer must have voltage taps on the high and/or low voltage windings sufficient to assure satisfactory generator operation over the range of voltage variation expected on the Utility electric system. The Project Developer also needs to assure sufficient voltage regulation at its facility to maintain an acceptable voltage level for its equipment during such periods when its Project is off-line. This may involve the provision of voltage regulation or a separate transformer between the Utility and the Project station power bus. The type of generation and electrical location of the interconnection will determine the isolating transformer connections. Allowable connections are detailed under the specific Project type. Note: Some Utilities do not allow an isolation transformer to be connected to a grounded Utility system with an ungrounded secondary (Utility side) winding configuration, regardless of the Project type. Therefore, the Project Developer is encouraged to consult with the Utility prior to submitting an application. The proper selection and specification of transformer impedance is important relative to enabling the proposed Project to meet the Utility’s reactive power requirements (see “Reactive Power Control”).


4

Isolation Device An isolation device is required and should be placed at the Point of Common Coupling (PCC). It can be a circuit breaker, circuit switcher, pole top switch, load-break disconnect, etc., depending on the electrical system configuration. The following are required of the isolation device:

�� Must be approved for use on the Utility system. �� Must comply with current relevant ANSI and/or IEEE Standards.

�� Must have load break capability, unless used in series with a three-phase interrupting device.

�� Must be rated for the application.

�� If used as part of a protective relaying scheme, it must have adequate interrupting capability. The

Utility will provide maximum short circuit currents and X/R ratios available at the PCC upon request.

�� Must be operable and accessible by the Utility at all times (24 hours a day, 7 days a week).

�� The Utility will determine if the isolation device will be used as a protective tagging point. If the

determination is so made, the device must have visible open break provisions for padlocking in the open position, and it must be gang operated. If the device has automatic operation, the controls must be located remote from the device.

Interconnection Lines The physically closest available system voltage, as well as equipment and operational constraints influence the chosen point of interconnection. The Utility has the ultimate authority to determine the acceptability of a particular PCC. Any new line construction to connect the Project to the Utility’s electric system will be undertaken by the Utility at the Project Developer’s expense. Interconnection line(s) will terminate on a termination structure provided by the Project Developer. Termination Structure The Project Developer is responsible for ensuring that structural material strengths are adequate for all requirements, incorporating appropriate safety factors. Upon written request, the Utility will provide line tension information for maximum dead-end tensions under heavy icing conditions. The structure must be designed for this maximum line tension along with an adequate margin of safety. Electrical clearances shall comply with requirements of the National Electrical Safety Code and Michigan Public Service Commission Standard 16-79. The installation of disconnect switches, bus support insulators, and other equipment shall comply with accepted industry practices. Surge arresters shall be selected to coordinate with the BIL rating of major equipment components and shall comply with recommendations set forth in the current ANSI Standard C62.2. Relaying Design Requirements The interconnection relaying design requirements are intended to assure protection of the Utility electric system. Any additional relaying which may be necessary to protect equipment at the Project is solely the responsibility of the Project Developer to determine, design, and apply.


5

The relaying requirements will vary with the capacity rating of the Project, the type of generation being used, and the mode of operation (Flow-back or Non-Flow-back). All relaying proposed by the Project Developer to satisfy these requirements must be submitted for review and approved by the Utility. Protective Relaying General Considerations Utility grade relays are required. See “Approved Relay Types” in the Generator Interconnection Supplement. All relays must be equipped with targets or other visible indicators to indicate that the relay has operated. If the protective system uses AC power as the control voltage, it must be designed to disconnect the generation from the Utility electric system if the AC control power is lost. The relay system must be designed such that the Project Developer is prevented from energizing the Utility electric system if that system is de-energized. Momentary Paralleling For situations where the Project will only be operated in parallel with the Utility electric system for a short duration (100 milliseconds or less), as in a make-before-break automatic transfer scheme, no additional relaying is required. Such momentary paralleling requires a modern integrated Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) system, which is incapable of paralleling the Project with the Utility electric system. The ATS must be tested and verified for proper operation at least every 2 years. The Utility may be present during this testing. Instrument Transformer Requirements All relaying must be connected into instrument transformers. All current connections shall be connected into current transformers (CTs). All CTs shall be rated to provide no more than 5 amperes secondary current for all normal load conditions, and must be designed for relaying use, with an “accuracy class” of at least C50. Current transformers with an accuracy class designation such as T50 are NOT acceptable. For three-phase systems, all three phases must be equipped with CTs. All potential connections must be connected into voltage transformers (VTs). For single-phase connections, the VTs shall be provided such that the secondary voltage does not exceed 120 volts for normal operations. For three-phase connections, the VTs shall be provided such that the line-to-line voltage does not exceed 120 volts for normal operation, and both the primary and secondary of the VTs shall be connected for grounded-wye connections. Direct Transfer Trip (DTT) Direct Transfer Trip is generally not required for Induction or Inverter-Type Projects. Direct Transfer Trip is generally not required for Synchronous Projects that will operate in the Non-Flow-back Mode since a more economic reverse power relay scheme can usually meet the requirements. For Synchronous Flow-back Projects, the need for DTT is determined based on the location of the PCC. The Utility requires DTT when the total generation within a protective zone is greater than 33% of the minimum Utility load that could be isolated along with the generation. This prevents sustained isolated operation of the generation for conditions where Project protective relaying may not otherwise operate (see “Isolated Operation” in the Generator Interconnection Supplement). Direct transfer trip adds to the cost and complexity of an interconnection. A DTT transmitter is required for each Utility protective device whose operation could result in sustained isolated operation of the Project. An associated DTT receiver at the Project is required for each DTT transmitter. A phone Data


6

Circuit is required between each transmitter and receiver. Telemetry is required to monitor status of the DTT communication, even if telemetry would not otherwise have been required. At the Project Developer’s expense, the Utility will provide the receiver(s) that the Project Developer must install, and the Utility will install the transmitter(s) at the appropriate Utility protective devices. Reverse Power Relaying for Non-Flow-back If metering for “Flow-back” Mode is not present, reverse power protection must be provided. The reverse power relaying will detect power flow from the Project into the Utility system, and operation of the reverse power relaying will separate the Project from the Utility system. Automatic Reclosing The Utility employs automatic multiple-shot reclosing on most of the Utility’s circuit breakers and circuit reclosers to increase the reliability of service to its customers. Automatic single-phase overhead reclosers are regularly installed on distribution circuits to isolate faulted segments of these circuits. The Project Developer is advised to consider the effects of Automatic Reclosing (both single-phase and three-phase) to assure that the Project’s internal equipment will not be damaged. In addition to the risk of damage to the Project, an out-of-phase reclosing operation may also present a hazard to the Utility’s electric system equipment since this equipment may not be rated or built to withstand this type of reclosing. To prevent out-of-phase reclosing, circuit breakers can be modified with voltage check relays. These relays block reclosing until the parallel generation is separated and the line is "de-energized." Hydraulic single-phase overhead reclosers cannot be modified with voltage check relays; therefore, these devices will have to be either replaced with three-phase overhead reclosers, which can be voltage controlled, or relocated beyond the Project location - depending upon the sectionalizing and protection requirements of the distribution circuit. If the Project can be connected to more than one circuit, these revisions may be required on the alternate circuit(s) as well. The Utility will determine relaying and control equipment that needs to be installed to protect its own equipment from out-of-phase reclosing. Installation of this protection will be undertaken by the Utility at the Project Developer's expense. Single-Phase Sectionalizing The Utility also installs single-phase fuses and/or reclosers on its distribution circuits to increase the reliability of service to its customers. Three-phase generator installations may require replacement of fuses and/or single-phase reclosers with three-phase circuit breakers or circuit reclosers at the Project Developer’s expense.


7

Synchronous Projects Under/overfrequency relaying and under/overvoltage relaying are required. Each Project must also be equipped with voltage-controlled overcurrent relays to detect faults on the Utility system. The under/overvoltage relaying must be either a three-phase relay or three single-phase relays, and three-phase voltage controlled overcurrent relaying must be provided. In order to minimize damage to both Project equipment and to Utility system equipment for loss-of-synchronism (also called out-of-step), and to minimize disruptions to other Utility customers in the area, out-of-step relaying may also be required. The Utility has evaluated and approved a relay for this purpose, which would usually be installed at the same location as the metering, and would isolate the Project from the Utility system. If the Project is connected to an ungrounded distribution system, the secondary winding (Utility side) of the isolation transformer must be connected delta. If the Project is connected to a grounded distribution system, the Project Developer has a choice of the following transformer connections: 1. A grounded-wye - grounded-wye transformer connection is acceptable only if the Project’s single line-

to-ground fault current contribution is less than the Project’s three-phase fault current contribution at the PCC.

2. The isolation transformer may be connected for a delta secondary (Utility side) connection with any

primary (Project side) connection, or

3. Ungrounded-wye secondary connection with a delta primary connection. If the Project is connected to a grounded distribution system via one of the isolation transformer connections specified above, ground fault detection for Utility faults must be provided, and will consist of a (59N) ground overvoltage relay or (51N) overcurrent relay. The specific application of this relay will depend on the connection of the isolation transformer: 1. If a delta secondary/grounded-wye primary connection is used, the (59N) relay will be connected into

the secondary of a set of three-phase VTs, which will be connected grounded-wye primary, with the secondary connected delta with one corner of the delta left open. The (59N) relay will be connected across this open-corner.

2. If an ungrounded-wye secondary/delta primary connection is used, the (59N) relay will be connected into the secondary of a single VT that will be connected from the ungrounded-wye neutral of the isolation transformer to ground.

3. If a grounded-wye - grounded-wye transformer connection is used, a time overcurrent relay must be

connected into a CT located on the Utility side isolation transformer neutral connection. In some instances, additional isolation transformer connection options may be available and will be determined by the Utility for the specific system location. The potential connection alternatives will include all alternatives listed above for application on a grounded distribution system, but will add a possible connection of grounded-wye (Utility side), delta (Project side). In the case of this additional isolation transformer connection, Utility system ground fault detection will take the form of a time overcurrent relay connected into a current transformer located in the Utility-side transformer neutral. This time overcurrent relay must have a very-inverse time characteristic. For a sample One-Line Diagram of this type of facility including the various methods of (59N) application, see Appendix B.


8

Induction Projects Three-phase under/overvoltage relays and three-phase under/overfrequency relays must be provided. Utility-grade relays are required. If the Project is connected to an ungrounded distribution system, the secondary winding (Utility side) of the isolation transformer must be connected delta. If the Project is connected to a grounded distribution system, the developer has a choice of the following transformer connections: 1. The isolation transformer may be connected for a delta secondary (Utility side) connection with any

primary (Project side) connection, or

2. The isolation transformer may be connected for an ungrounded-wye secondary (Utility side) connection with a delta primary (Project side) connection.

3. The isolation transformer may be connected for a grounded-wye - grounded-wye connection. If the Project is connected to a grounded distribution system via one of the isolation transformer connections specified above, ground fault detection for Utility faults must be provided. The specific application of this relay will depend on the connection of the isolation transformer: 1. If a delta secondary/grounded-wye primary connection is used, a (59N) ground overvoltage relay will

be connected into the secondary of a set of three-phase VTs, which will be connected grounded-wye primary, with the secondary connected delta with one corner of the delta left open. The (59N) relay will be connected across this open-corner.

2. If an ungrounded-wye secondary/delta primary connection is used, a (59N) ground overvoltage relay will be connected into the secondary of a single VT that will be connected from the ungrounded-wye neutral of the isolation transformer to ground.

3. If a grounded-wye - grounded-wye connection is used, a time overcurrent relay must be connected into a CT located on the Utility side isolation transformer neutral connection.

Protection must be provided for internal faults in the isolating transformer. In cases where it can be shown that self excitation of the induction generator cannot occur when isolated from the Utility, the Utility may waive the requirement that the Project Developer provide protection for Utility system ground faults. For a sample One-Line Diagram of this type of facility, see Appendix B.


9

Inverter-Type Projects Under/overfrequency relaying and under/overvoltage relaying are required. The under/overvoltage relaying must be either a three-phase relay or three single-phase relays. The isolation transformer (without generation on-line) must be incapable of producing ground fault current to the Utility system; any connection except delta primary (Project side), grounded-wye secondary (Utility side) is acceptable. The isolation transformer must be protected for internal faults; fuses are acceptable. If the inverter has passed a certified anti-island test, the Utility may waive the requirement that the generator Project Developer provide protection for the Utility system ground faults. For a sample One-Line Diagram of this type of facility, see Appendix C.


10

Relay Setting Criteria The relay settings as detailed in this section will apply in the vast majority of applications. The Utility will issue relay settings for each individual Project Developer that will address the settings for these protective functions. All voltages will be adjusted for the specific VT ratio, and all currents will be adjusted for the specific CT ratio. Undervoltage Relays The undervoltage relays will normally be set to trip at 88% of the nominal primary voltage at the relay location, and must reset from a trip condition if the voltage increases to 90% of the nominal primary voltage at the relay location. In order to accommodate variations in this criteria, the trip point of the relays shall be adjustable over a range of 70% of the nominal voltage to 90% of the nominal voltage. The trip time shall not exceed 1.0 seconds at 90% of the relay setting. Overvoltage Relays Two steps of overvoltage relaying are required. For the first overvoltage set point, the overvoltage relays will normally be set to trip at 107% of the nominal primary voltage at the relay location, and must reset from a trip condition if the voltage decreases to 105% of the nominal primary voltage at the relay location. In order to accommodate variations in this criteria, the trip point of the relays shall be adjustable over a range of 105% of the nominal voltage to 120% of the nominal voltage. The trip time shall not exceed 1.0 seconds at 110% of the relay setting. For the second overvoltage set point, the overvoltage relays will normally be set to trip at 120% of the nominal primary voltage at the relay location, and must reset from a trip condition if the voltage decreases to 118% of the nominal primary voltage at the relay location. In order to accommodate variations in this criteria, the trip point of the relays shall be adjustable over a range of 115% of the nominal voltage to 140% of the nominal voltage. The trip time shall be instantaneous (relay operating time not to exceed 0.02 seconds at 110% of the trip setting). Underfrequency Relays The Underfrequency relay will normally be set for a trip point of 58.5 Hz, and must trip within 0.2 seconds. Relays with an inverse time characteristic (where the trip time changes with respect to the applied frequency) are not acceptable. These relays must respond reliably for applied source voltages as low as 70% of the nominal voltage. Overfrequency Relays The overfrequency relay will normally be set for a trip point of 60.5 Hz, and must trip within 0.2 seconds. Relays with an inverse time characteristic are not acceptable. These relays must respond reliably for applied source voltages as low as 70% of the nominal voltage. 51V Relays – Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Relays For synchronous Project applications, the (51V) relays must be set to detect any phase faults that may occur between the Project and the nearest three-phase fault clearing device on the Utility system. Since these faults may take up to 1-second to detect and isolate, the appropriate saturated direct-axis reactance of the Project will be used depending on its time constants. The settings of this device will consider the relay manufacturer’s recommended practice for the type of Project and prime mover (mechanical energy source), and will be determined by the Utility for the specific system application. 59N Relay – Ground Fault Detection This relay will be applied to detect ground faults on the Utility system when the Project is connected to a grounded Utility system via an ungrounded transformer winding. This relay will be set for a 10% shift in the apparent power system neutral. For an ungrounded-wye transformer winding with a single 120 V


11

secondary VT, the setting will usually be 12 Volts. For a delta transformer winding with broken delta 120 V secondary VTs, the setting will usually be 20 Volts. The time delay will normally be 1 second. 51N Relay – Ground Fault Detection This relay will be applied to detect ground faults on the Utility system when the Project is connected to a grounded Utility system via a grounded-wye transformer winding, and will be connected into a CT in the transformer neutral connection. This relay will be set to detect faults on the directly connected Utility system, and the timing will be set to comply with Utility practice for overcurrent relay coordination. The CT ratio and specific relay setting will be determined via a fault study performed by the Utility. 32 Relay – Reverse Power The reverse power relay must be selected such that it can detect a power flow into the Utility system of a small fraction of the overall Project capacity. The relay will normally be set near its minimum (most sensitive) setting, and will trip after a 1 second time delay. The delay will avoid unnecessary tripping for momentary conditions. Maintenance and Testing The Utility reserves the right to test the relaying and control equipment that involves protection of the Utility electric system whenever the Utility determines a reasonable need for such testing exists. The Project Developer is solely responsible for conducting proper periodic maintenance on the generating equipment and its associated control, protective equipment, interrupting devices, and main Isolation Device, per manufacturer recommendations. The Project Developer is responsible for the periodic scheduled maintenance on those relays, interrupting devices, control schemes, and batteries that involve the protection of the Utility electric system. A periodic maintenance program is to be established to test these relays at least every 2 years. This maintenance testing must be witnessed by the Utility. Each routine maintenance check of the relaying equipment shall include both an exact calibration check and an actual trip of the circuit breaker or contactor from the device being tested. For each test, a report shall be submitted to the Utility indicating the results of the tests made and the "as found" and "as left" relay calibration values. Visually setting, without verification, a calibration dial or tap is not considered an adequate relay calibration check. The Project Developer is responsible for maintaining written reports for the above tests for a period of four years. These written reports shall be made available to the Utility upon request. Installation and Design Approval The Project Developer must provide the Utility with 10 business days advance written notice of when the Project will be ready for inspection, testing and approval. The Utility may review the design drawings, for approval, after the Interconnection Study has been completed. The design drawings must be submitted by the Project Developer in accordance with “Engineering Design Drawing Requirements” (see Generator Interconnection Supplement). If reviewed, the Utility shall either approve the Project Developer's design drawings as submitted or return them to the Project Developer with a clear statement as to why they were not approved. Where appropriate, the Utility will indicate required changes on the engineering drawings. In the event that revisions are necessary to the Project Developer's submitted design drawings and the Project Developer submits revised design drawings to the Utility, then the Utility shall either approve, in writing, the Project Developer's revised design drawings as resubmitted, or return them to the Project Developer with a clear statement as to why they were not approved. Where appropriate, the Utility will indicate required changes on the engineering drawings.


12

The Utility will retain one copy of the approved design drawings. In the event that the Utility exercises its option to Acceptance Test the proposed interconnection relays that protect the Utility electric system, then the Utility shall communicate the results of that testing to the Project Developer for both the relays and the necessary documentation on the relays. Prior to final approval for Parallel Operation, the Utility’s specified relay calibration settings shall be applied and a commissioning test must be performed on the Project relaying and control equipment that involves the protection of the Utility electric system. The commissioning test must be witnessed by the Utility and can be performed by the Utility at the Project Developer's request. Upon satisfactory completion of this test and final inspection, the Utility will provide written permission for Parallel Operation. If the results are unsatisfactory, the Utility will provide written communication of these results and required action to the Project Developer. In the event the Project Developer proposes a revision to the Utility’s approved relaying and control equipment used to protect the Utility electric system and submits a description and engineering design drawings of the proposed changes, the Utility shall either approve the Project Developer's amended design drawings or return them to the Project Developer with a clear statement as to why they were not approved. Where appropriate, the Utility will indicate required changes on the engineering drawings. Telemetry and Disturbance Monitoring Requirements Telemetry and disturbance monitoring is required in all cases for Projects that will operate in the Flow-back Mode and have the capability to supply aggregate generation of 2 MW or more to the Utility. For Projects that will operate in the Non-Flow-back Mode, the requirement for telemetry will be determined on a case-by-case basis as part of the Interconnection Study. Telemetry enables the Utility to operate the electric system safely and reliably under both normal and emergency conditions. The Utility measures its internal load plus losses (generation) on a real time basis via an extensive telemetry system. This system sums all energy flowing into the Utility electric system from Projects interconnected to the system and from interconnections with other utilities. During system disturbances when portions of the electrical systems are out of service, it is essential to know if a Project is on line or off line to determine the proper action to correct the problem. Time saved during restoration activities translates to fewer outages and outages of shorter duration for the Utility’s customers. The Utility evaluates the performance of the overall protective system for all faults on the electric system. It is critical that sufficient monitoring of the protective system is in place to determine its response. It is preferable to deploy disturbance monitoring into all Projects, but it can be expensive to deploy. Therefore, disturbance monitoring is required only for installations that already require telemetry. The Project Developer shall provide a suitable indoor location, approved by the Utility, for the Utility’s owned, operated, and maintained Remote Terminal Unit (RTU). The location must be equipped with a 48 V or 125 V DC power supply. The Project Developer must provide the necessary phone and data circuits, and install a telephone backboard for connections to the Utility RTU and metering equipment. All phone circuits must be properly protected as detailed in IEEE Std. 487. See “Typical Meter and RTU Installation Where Telemetry is Required” in the Generator Interconnection Supplement.

When telemetry is required, the following values will be telemetered:

1. Real and reactive power flow at the PCC.

2. Voltage at the PCC.


13

3. The status (normal/fail) of protective relay Communication Channels. A status indication of "FAIL" indicates the Communication Channel used for relaying (i.e. transfer trip) is unable to perform its protective function.

4. The status (open/closed) of the main isolating breaker and each generating unit breaker (if the Project is composed of multiple units, a single logical (OR) status of the individual Project breaker states, indicating all Project breakers are open or any one or more Project breakers are closed, is permissible). A closed status would be indicated if any individual generator is on line.

The RTU will be equipped with “sequence of events” recording. The Project Developer shall provide, wired to a terminal block near the RTU panel, the following general equipment Auxiliary Contacts and relay contacts: 1. An output contact of an instantaneous relay to act as a ground fault detector for faults on the Utility

electric system. This relay shall be connected into the same sensing source as the ground fault protective relay required by the Utility.

2. Each and every trip of an interconnection isolation device, which is initiated by any of the generator interconnection relaying schemes required by the Utility.

3. Each and every trip of an interconnection isolation device, which is initiated by any of the protective

systems for the generator. 4. Each and every trip or opening of an interconnecting isolation device, which is initiated by any other

manual or electrical means. 5. A contact indicating the position of the Project’s primary-side main breaker.

6. A contact indicating operation of the over/undervoltage relays.

7. A contact indicating operation of the under/overfrequency relay or the Utility’s ground fault relay.

8. A contact indicating operation of the Project provided transformer bank relaying.

9. A contact indicating operation of any of the (51V) relaying.

10. A contact indicating the position of the high-side fault-clearing device.

11. A contact indicating the position of the reverse power relay, if said, relay is required by the Utility.

12. The following individual contact from each individual Direct Transfer Trip receiver, required by the Utility:

i. Loss-of-guard (LOG) alarm ii. Receive-trip relay (RTX).

iii. Lockout relay. If any of the functions indicated in items 2-4, 6, 7, 9, or 11 are combined into a multi-functional device, either: 1. Each of those functions must be monitored independently on the RTU, or

2. Provisions acceptable to the Utility must be provided to interrogate the multi-functional device such

that the operation of the individual functions may be evaluated separately.


14

Telemetry, when required, will be provided by the Utility at the Project Developer's expense. In addition to other telemetry costs, a one-time charge will be assessed to the Project Developer for equipment and software installed at the Utility’s System Control Center to process the data signals. Miscellaneous Operational Requirements Miscellaneous requirements include synchronizing equipment for Parallel Operation, reactive requirements, standby power considerations, and system stability limitations. Operating in Parallel The Project Developer will be solely responsible for the required synchronizing equipment and for properly synchronizing the generation with the Utility electric system. Voltage fluctuation at the PCC during synchronizing shall be limited to +5%. The Project Developer will notify the Utility prior to synchronizing to and prior to scheduled disconnection from the electric system. These requirements are directly concerned with the actual operation of the Project with the Utility:

�� The Project may not commence parallel operation until approval has been given by the Utility. The completed installation is subject to inspection by the Utility prior to approval. Preceding this inspection, all contractual agreements must be executed by the Project Developer.

�� The Project must be designed to prevent the Project from energizing into a de-energized Utility

line. The Project’s circuit breaker or contactor must be blocked from closing in on a de-energized circuit.

�� The Project shall discontinue parallel operation with a particular service and perform necessary

switching when requested by the Utility for any of the following reasons:

1. When public safety is being jeopardized. 2. During voltage or loading problems, system emergencies, or when abnormal sectionalizing or

circuit configuration occurs on the Utility system.

3. During scheduled shutdowns of Utility equipment that are necessary to facilitate maintenance or repairs. Such scheduled shutdowns shall be coordinated with the Project.

4. In the event there is demonstrated electrical interference (i.e. Voltage Flicker, Harmonic

Distortion, etc.) to the Utility’s customers, suspected to be caused by the Project, and such interference exceeds then current system standards, the Utility reserves the right, at the Utility’s initial expense, to install special test equipment as may be required to perform a disturbance analysis and monitor the operation and control of the Project to evaluate the quality of power produced by the Project. In the event that no standards exist, then the applicable tariffs and rules governing electric service shall apply. If the Project is proven to be the source of the interference, and that interference exceeds the Utility’s standards or the generally accepted industry standards, then it shall be the responsibility of the Project Developer to eliminate the interference problem and to reimburse the Utility for the costs of the disturbance monitoring installation, removal, and analysis, excluding the cost of the meters or other special test equipment.


15

5. When either the Project or its associated synchronizing and protective equipment is demonstrated by the Utility to be improperly maintained, so as to present a hazard to the Utility system or its customers.

6. Whenever the Project is operating isolated with other Utility customers, for whatever reason.

7. Whenever a loss of communication channel alarm is received from a location where a

communication channel has been installed for the protection of the Utility system.

8. Whenever the Utility notifies the Project Developer in writing of a claimed non-safety related violation of the Interconnection Agreement and the Project Developer fails to remedy the claimed violation within ten working days of notification, unless within that time either the Project Developer files a complaint with the MPSC seeking resolution of the dispute or the Project Developer and Utility agree in writing to a different procedure.

If the Project has shown an unsatisfactory response to requests to separate the generation from the Utility system, the Utility reserves the right to disconnect the Project from parallel operation with the Utility electric system until all operational issues are satisfactorily resolved.

Reactive Power Control Synchronous Projects that will operate in the Flow-back Mode must be dynamically capable of providing 0.90 power factor lagging (delivering reactive power to the Utility) and 0.95 power factor leading (absorbing reactive power from the Utility) at the Point of Receipt. The Point of Receipt is the location where the Utility accepts delivery of the output of the Project. The Point of Receipt can be the physical location of the billing meters or a location where the billing meters are not located, but adjusted for line and transformation losses. Induction and Inverter-Type generators that will operate in the Flow-back Mode must provide for their own reactive needs (steady state unity power factor at the Point of Receipt). To obtain unity power factor, the Induction or Inverter-Type Project can: 1. Install a switchable VAR supply source to maintain unity power factor at the Point of Receipt; or 2. Provide the Utility with funds to install a VAR supply source equivalent to that required for the Project

to attain unity power factor at the Point of Receipt at full output. There are no interconnection reactive power capability requirements for Synchronous, Induction, and Inverter-Type Projects that will operate in the Non-Flow-back Mode. The Utility’s existing rate schedules, incorporated herein by reference, contain power factor adjustments based on the power factor of the metered load at these facilities. Standby Power Standby power will be provided under the terms of an approved rate set forth in the Utility’s Standard Rules and Regulations. The Project Developer should be aware that to qualify for Standby Rates, a separate meter must be installed at the Project. If outside of the Utility’s franchise area, it will be the Project Developer’s responsibility to arrange contractually and technically for the supply of its facility’s standby, maintenance, and any supplemental power needs. System Stability and Site Limitations The Stiffness Ratio is the combined three-phase short circuit capability of the Project and the Utility divided by the short circuit capability of the Project measured at the PCC. A stability study may be required for Projects with a Stiffness Ratio of less than 40. Five times the generator rated kVA will be used as a proxy for short circuit current contribution for induction generators. For synchronous Projects,


16

with a Stiffness Ratio of less than 40, the Utility requires special generator trip schemes or loss of synchronism (out-of-step) relay protection. If the apparent voltage flicker from a loss-of-synchronism condition exceeds 5%, an out-of-step relay will be required. This type of protection is typically applied at the PCC and trips the entire Project off-line, if instability is detected, to protect the Utility electric system and its customers. If the project Developer chooses not to provide for mitigation of unacceptable voltage flicker (above five percent), the Utility may disallow the interconnection of the Project or require a new dedicated interconnection at the Project Developer’s expense. The Project Developer is responsible for evaluating the consequences of unstable generator operation or voltage transients on Project equipment at the Project, and determining, designing, and applying any relaying which may be necessary to protect that equipment. This type of protection is typically applied on individual generators to protect the Project. The Utility will determine if operation of the Project will create objectionable voltage flicker and/or disturbances to other Utility customers and develop any required mitigation measures at the Project Developer’s expense. Revenue Metering Requirements The Utility will own, operate, and maintain the billing metering equipment at the Project Developer's expense. The billing metering will meter both real and reactive interconnection flows between the Project and the Utility electric system. Where applicable, separate metering of station power may be required to accurately meter the generation facility load when the Project is off-line. Special billing metering will be required for Projects operating in the Flow-back Mode. If telemetering is required, the billing metering will be included as part of the telemetering installation. The Project Developer shall provide a suitable indoor location, approved by the Utility, for the Utility’s owned, operated, and maintained billing metering. The Project Developer shall provide authorized employees and agents of the Utility access to the premises at all times to install, turn on, disconnect, inspect, test, read, repair, or remove the metering equipment. The Project Developer may, at its option, have a representative witness this work. The metering installations for Flow-back operation shall be constructed in accordance with the practices, which normally apply to the construction of metering installations for commercial, industrial, or other customers with demand recording equipment. The Utility shall supply to the Project Developer all required metering equipment and the standard detailed specifications and requirements relating to the location, construction, and access of the metering installation and will provide consultation pertaining to the meter installation as required. The Utility will endeavor to coordinate the delivery of these materials with the Project Developer’s installation schedule during normal scheduled business hours. The Project Developer shall provide a mounting surface for the meters, recorders, connection cabinets, a housing for the instrument transformers, a conduit for the conductors between the instrument transformer secondary windings and the meter connection cabinets, and a conduit for the communication links, if required. All of this equipment must meet the Utility’s specifications and requirements. The responsibility for the installation of the equipment is shared between the Utility and the Project Developer, with the Project Developer generally installing all of the equipment on its side of the PCC, including instrument transformers, cabinets, conduits, and mounting surfaces. The Utility, or its agents, shall install the meters, recorders, and communication links. The Utility will endeavor to coordinate the installation of these items with the Project Developer's schedule.


17

Communication Circuits The Project Developer is responsible for ordering and acquiring the telephone circuit required for the Project Interconnection. The Project Developer will assume all installation, operating, and maintenance costs associated with the telephone circuits, including the monthly charges for the telephone lines and any rental equipment required by the local telephone provider. However, at the Utility’s discretion, the Utility may select an alternative communication method, such as wireless communications. Regardless of the method, the Project Developer will be responsible for all costs associated with the material and installation, whereas the Utility will be responsible to define the specific communication requirements. The Utility will cooperate and provide Utility information necessary for proper installation of the telephone circuits upon written request. All telephone circuits (both voice and data) must be analog circuits. A dedicated dial-up voice-grade circuit (POTS line) is required for access to the billing meter by the Utility. When DTT is required, a modular RJ-11 jack must also be installed within six feet of the billing metering equipment, to allow the Utility to use this circuit for voice communication with personnel performing master station checkout of the RTU. This dial-up voice-grade circuit shall be a local telephone company provided business measured line without dial-in or dial-out call restrictions. If DTT is required, a separate dedicated 4-wire, Class A, Data Circuit must be installed and protected as specified by the local telephone Utility for each DTT receiver and for the RTU. The circuit must be installed in rigid metallic conduit from the RTU and each DTT receiver to the point of connection to the telephone Utility equipment. Wall space must be provided for adjacent mounting next to the telephone board, of the billing metering panel and a telemetry enclosure. The billing metering panel is typically 60 inches high by 48 inches wide and the telemetry enclosure is typically 24 inches high by 24 inches wide. A clear space of 4.5 feet in front of this equipment is required to permit maintenance and testing. A review of each installation shall be made to determine the location and space requirements most agreeable to the Utility and the Project Developer.

APPENDIX A

INTERCONNECTION APPLICATION

A-1

GENERATOR INTERCONNECTION APPLICATION AGGREGATE GENERATOR OUTPUT OF 2 MW OR MORE

1. The undersigned Project Developer submits this Generator Interconnection Application and

appropriate filing fee to interconnect a new Project to the Utility Electric System or to increase the capacity of an existing Project interconnected to the Utility Electric System.

2. A Project Developer requesting interconnection or an increase in the capacity of an existing Project to the Utility Electric System must provide the following information: a. Completed Interconnection Application Data sheet appropriate for the capacity rating and

type of generating unit(s), as found in the Utility’s Generator Interconnection Requirements (Interconnection Application Data sheet, found in Appendix B or C, must be attached to this Interconnection Application).

b. Description of the equipment configuration and proposed interconnection one-line diagram (one-line diagram must be attached to this Interconnection Application).

c. Project Developer (Single Point of Contact):

Name: ____________________________________

Address: ____________________________________

____________________________________

Phone Number: ____________________________________

Fax Number: ____________________________________

e-mail Address: ____________________________________

Project Site Address: ____________________________________

3. This Generator Interconnection Application shall be directed to the Utility representative as indicated below:

Director - Electric System Planning and Protection

Consumers Energy Company 1945 West Parnall Road

Jackson, MI 49201

4. I, the undersigned and authorized representative of the Project, submit this Generator Interconnection Application and required technical data for the Utility’s review. I understand that upon acceptance, the Utility shall subsequently provide an Interconnection Study Agreement. The Interconnection Study Agreement will include the Scope of the Interconnection Study. I also understand that I shall be required to furnish certain required technical data as requested by the Utility in support of this study and reimburse the Utility for its study expenses. Authorized Signature:

Printed Name:

Title:

Company Name: Date:

APPENDIX B

SYNCHRONOUS AND INDUCTION GENERATORS

AGGREGATE GENERATION OF 2 MW OR MORE

REQUIRED DATA

ONE-LINE REPRESENTATIONTYPICAL ISOLATION AND FAULT PROTECTION FOR SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR INSTALLATIONS

2 MW OR LARGER

59

27

81o/u

32

3GEN

3 – phase circuit breaker, recloser, switcher or set of 3 fuses

Local Load

52M

TRIP (Note D)

TRIP (Note D)

(1)

(3)

52G

LEGEND

21ST Out-of-step27 Undervoltage32 Reverse Power (not required for sellback)51V Voltage controlled overcurrent51N Neutral overcurrent (required for grounded secondary)59 Overvoltage59N Zero sequence overvoltage (assuming ungrounded secondary on power transformer)81o/u Over/Underfrequency

NOTES

A) See technical requirements for permissible connection configurations and protection. Transformer connections proposed shall be shown on the one-line diagram by the Project Developer. Transformer connection and secondary grounding to be approved by Utility.

B) Protection alternatives for the various acceptable transformer connections are shown. Only one protection alternative will ultimately be used, depending on the actual transformer winding connections. VTs for 59, 27, 81o/u and 32 are shown connected on the primary (Project side) of the power transformer, but may instead be connected on the secondary (Utility side). VTs are required on the secondary of the power transformer if a 59N is required for an ungrounded secondary connection. IEEE std 1547 requirements for voltage and frequency must be met at the PCC. IEEE Std. 1547 permits the VTs to be connected at the point of generator connection in certain cases.

C) Main breaker protection, generator protection and synchronizing equipment are not shown.

D) Trip of all 52G breakers or the 52M breaker is acceptable, depending upon whether the Project Developer wants to serve its own isolated load after loss of Utility service.

POWER TRANSFORMER

(Note A)

(Note C)

(Note C)

M

M

___ /5 A

______ kV

______ kVA

______ kV

______ %Z @ kVA

___ kV/120 V

____ kW ____ PF ____ kV

Xd” = ____ % @ ____ kVA

Xd’ = ____ % @ ____ kVA

Xd = ____ % @ ____ kVA

3GEN

52G

Similar metering, relaying and data is required for each generator.

3 – phase gang operated disconnect switch (if required)

Distribution Circuit

(3)

(1)

59N

3 VTs(Note B)

(1)

21ST

___ kV/120 V

(1)

51N___ /5 A59N

Transfer Trip

Receiver

Com

mun

icat

ion

Line

To

rem

ote

Util

ity e

quip

men

t

Trip

Out

put

To 5

2G o

r 52M

___ /5 A

51V___ /5 A

(Note B)

(Note D)

(Note D)

B-1

ONE-LINE REPRESENTATIONTYPICAL ISOLATION AND FAULT PROTECTION FOR INDUCTION GENERATOR INSTALLATIONS

2 MW OR LARGER

59

27

81o/u

32

3GEN


Local Load

52M

TRIP (Note D)

TRIP (Note D)

(1)

(3)

52G

LEGEND

27 Undervoltage32 Reverse Power (not required for sellback)51N Neutral overcurrent (required for grounded secondary)59 Overvoltage59N Zero sequence overvoltage (assuming ungrounded secondary on power transformer)81o/u Over/Underfrequency

NOTES





POWER TRANSFORMER

(Note A)

(Note C)

(Note C)

M

M

___ /5 A

______ kV

______ kVA

______ kV

______ %Z @ kVA

___ kV/120 V

____ kW ____ kV

3GEN

52G




(3)

(1)

59N

3 VTs(Note B)

(1)

51N___ /5 A59N

(Note B)

(Note D)

B-2

SYNCHRONOUS OR INDUCTION GENERATORS - AGGREGATE � 2 MW INTERCONNECTION APPLICATION DATA FOR: ______________________ PROVIDED BY: _____________________________ DATE: ___________

B-3

Instructions: Attach data sheets as required. Indicate in the tables below the page number of the attached data (manufacturer’s data where appropriate) on which the requested information is provided. Provide one table for each unique transformer.

General Information Item No

Data Description

Attached Page No

1 Flow-back or Non-Flow-back 2 Project Type (Base load, peaking, intermediate) 3 Site Plan 4 Simple One-Line Diagram(s) for Project and Project Load 5 Detailed One-Line Diagram(s) for Project 6 Energization Date for Project Interconnection Facilities 7 First Parallel Operation Date for Testing 8 Project Commercial Operation Date 9 Estimated Project Cost

Isolating Transformer(s) between Project Developer(s) and Utility: Transformer No _____ Item No

Data Description

Attached Page No

1 Rated kV and connection (delta, wye, wye-gnd) of each winding 2 kVA of each winding 3 BIL of each winding 4 Fixed taps available for each winding 5 Positive/negative range for any LTC windings 6 %Z Impedance on transformer self cooled rating 7 Percent excitation current at rated kV 8 Load Loss Watts at full load or X/R ratio

The following information on these system components shall appear on the preliminary One-Line Diagram, including manufacturer make and model for the items listed below: �� Breakers - Rating, location and normal operating status (open or closed) �� Buses - Operating voltage �� Capacitors - Size of bank in kVAR �� Circuit Switchers - Rating, location and normal operating status (open or closed) �� Current Transformers - Overall ratio, connected ratio �� Fuses - normal operating status, rating (Amps), type �� Generators - Capacity rating (kVA), location, type, method of grounding �� Grounding Resistors - Size (ohms), current (Amps) �� Isolating transformers - Capacity rating (kVA), location, impedance, voltage ratings, primary and

secondary connections and method of grounding �� Potential Transformers - Ratio, connection �� Reactors - Ohms/phase �� Relays - Types, quantity, IEEE device number, operator lines indicating the device initiated by the

relays. �� Switches - Location and normal operating status (open or closed), type, rating �� Tagging Point - Location, identification

SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS - AGGREGATE � 2 MW INTERCONNECTION APPLICATION DATA FOR: ______________________ PROVIDED BY: _____________________________ DATE: ___________

B-4

Instructions: Attach data sheets as required. Indicate in the table below the page number of the attached data (manufacturer’s data where appropriate) on which the requested information is provided. Provide one table for each unique generator. Electric Generator(s) at the Project: Generator No _____ Item No

Data Value

Data Description

Attached Page No

1 Generator Type (synchronous or induction) 2 Generator Nameplate Voltage 3 Generator Nameplate Watts or Volt-Amperes 4 Generator Nameplate Power Factor (pf) 5 RPM 6 Minimum and Maximum Acceptable Terminal Voltage 7 Direct axis reactance (saturated) 8 Direct axis reactance (unsaturated) 9 Quadrature axis reactance (unsaturated) 10 Direct axis transient reactance (saturated) 11 Direct axis transient reactance (unsaturated) 12 Quadrature axis transient reactance (unsaturated) 13 Direct axis sub-transient reactance (saturated) 14 Direct axis sub-transient reactance (unsaturated) 15 Leakage Reactance 16 Direct axis transient open circuit time constant 17 Quadrature axis transient open circuit time constant 18 Direct axis subtransient open circuit time constant 19 Quadrature axis subtransient open circuit time constant 20 Open Circuit saturation curve 21 Reactive Capability Curve showing overexcited and

underexcited limits (Reactive Information if non-synchronous)

22 Excitation System Block Diagram with values for gains and time constants (Laplace transforms)

23 Short Circuit Current contribution from Generator at the Point of Common Coupling

24 Rotating inertia of overall combination Generator, prime mover, couplers and gear drives

25 Station Power load when generator is off-line, Watts, pf 26 Station Power load during start-up, Watts, pf 27 Station Power load during operation, Watts, pf 28 National Recognized Testing Laboratory Certification (if

applicable)

29 Written Commissioning Test Procedure

INDUCTION GENERATORS - AGGREGATE � 2 MW INTERCONNECTION APPLICATION DATA FOR: ______________________ PROVIDED BY: _____________________________ DATE: ___________

B-5


Data Value

Data Description

Attached Page No

1 Generator Type (synchronous or induction) 2 Generator Rated Voltage 3 Generator Rated Volt-Amperes 4 Generator Rated Power kW 5 Number of Poles 6 Synchronous Rotational Speed 7 Rotation Speed at Rated Power 8 Slip at Rated Power 9 Minimum and Maximum Acceptable Terminal Voltage 10 Motoring Power (kW) 11 Neutral Grounding Resistor (If Applicable) 12 I22t or K (Heating Time Constant): 13 Rotor Resistance 14 Stator Resistance 15 Stator Reactance 16 Rotor Reactance 17 Magnetizing Reactance 18 Short Circuit Reactance 19 Exciting Current 20 Temperature Rise 21 Frame Size 22 Design Letter 23 Reactive Power Required in Vars (No Load) 24 Reactive Power Required in Vars (Full Load) 25 Total Rotating Inertia, H:___________Per Unit on KVA Base 26 Short Circuit Current contribution from generator at the Point of

Common Coupling

27 Rotating inertia of overall combination generator, prime mover, couplers and gear drives

28 Station Power load when generator is off-line, Watts, pf 29 Station Power load during start-up, Watts, pf 30 Station Power load during operation, Watts, pf 31 National Recognized Testing Laboratory Certification (if

applicable)

32 Written Commissioning Test Procedure

APPENDIX C

INVERTER-TYPE GENERATORS AGGREGATE GENERATION 2 MW OR MORE

REQUIRED DATA

ONE-LINE REPRESENTATIONTYPICAL ISOLATION AND FAULT PROTECTION FOR INVERTER GENERATOR INSTALLATIONS

2 MW OR LARGER

59

27

81o/u

32

3GEN


Local Load

52M

TRIP (Note D)

TRIP (Note D)

(1)

(3)

52G

LEGEND

27 Undervoltage32 Reverse Power (not required for sellback)51N Neutral overcurrent (required for grounded secondary)59 Overvoltage59N Zero sequence overvoltage (assuming ungrounded secondary on power transformer)81o/u Over/Underfrequency

NOTES





POWER TRANSFORMER

(Note A)

(Note C)

(Note C)

M

M

___ /5 A

______ kV

______ kVA

______ kV

______ %Z @ kVA

___ kV/120 V

____ kW ____ kV

3GEN

52G




(3)

(1)

59N

3 VTs(Note B)

(1)

51N___ /5 A59N

(Note B)

(Note D)

C-1

INVERTER-TYPE GENERATORS - AGGREGATE � 2 MW INTERCONNECTION APPLICATION DATA FOR: ______________________ PROVIDED BY: _____________________________ DATE: ___________

C-2

Instructions: Attach data sheets as required. Indicate in the tables below the page number of the attached data (manufacturer’s data where appropriate) on which the requested information is provided. Provide one table for each unique transformer.

General Information Item No

Data Description

Attached Page No

1 Flow-back or Non-Flow-back 2 Project Type (Base load, peaking, intermediate, other) 3 Site Plan 4 Simple One-Line Diagram(s) for Project and Project Load 5 Detailed One-Line Diagram(s) for Project 6 Energization Date for Project Interconnection Facilities 7 First Parallel Operation Date for Testing 8 Project Commercial Operation Date 9 Estimated Project Cost

Isolating Transformer(s) between Project Developer(s) and Utility: Transformer No _____ Item No

Data Description

Attached Page No

1 Rated kV and connection (delta, wye, wye-gnd) of each winding 2 kVA of each winding 3 BIL of each winding 4 Fixed taps available for each winding 5 Positive/negative range for any LTC windings 6 %Z Impedance on transformer self cooled rating 7 Load Loss Watts at full load or X/R ratio

The following information on these system components shall appear on the preliminary One-Line Diagram, including manufacturer make and model for the items listed below: �� Breakers - Rating, location and normal operating status (open or closed) �� Buses - Operating voltage �� Capacitors - Size of bank in kVAR �� Circuit Switchers - Rating, location and normal operating status (open or closed) �� Current Transformers - Overall ratio, connected ratio �� Fuses - normal operating status, rating (Amps), type �� Generators - Capacity rating (kVA), location, type, method of grounding �� Grounding Resistors - Size (ohms), current (Amps) �� Isolating transformers - Capacity rating (kVA), location, impedance, voltage ratings, primary and

secondary connections and method of grounding �� Potential Transformers - Ratio, connection �� Reactors - Ohms/phase �� Relays - Types, quantity, IEEE device number, operator lines indicating the device initiated by the

relays. �� Switches - Location and normal operating status (open or closed), type, rating �� Tagging Point - Location, identification

INVERTER-TYPE GENERATORS - AGGREGATE � 2 MW INTERCONNECTION APPLICATION DATA FOR: ______________________ PROVIDED BY: _____________________________ DATE: ___________

C-3


Data Description

Attached Page No

1 Generator Type (Inverter) 2 Generator Nameplate Voltage 3 Generator Nameplate Watts or Volt-Amperes 4 Generator Nameplate Power Factor (pf) 5 Minimum and Maximum Acceptable Terminal Voltage 6 Reactive Capability Curve showing overexcited and underexcited limits

(Reactive Information if non-synchronous)

7 Short Circuit Current contribution from generator at the Point of Common Coupling

8 Station Power load when generator is off-line, Watts, pf 9 Station Power load during start-up, Watts, pf 10 Station Power load during operation, Watts, pf

APPENDIX D

INTERCONNECTION STUDY AGREEMENT

D-1

[Utility]

[Project]

Interconnection Study Agreement for

Generator Interconnection

With Aggregate Project Output of 2 MW or More

WHEREAS, proposals to construct or upgrade a Project which will be

operated in parallel with and interconnected with the [Utility’s] (“Utility”) electric system must

be reviewed by the Utility to determine how it will impact the Utility’s electric system.

WHEREAS, on Utility received from

(“Project Developer”) a Generator

Interconnection Application.

WHEREAS Utility has determined that an Interconnection Study is necessary

to determine whether the Utility electric system can accommodate the requested

interconnection.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and

agreements herein set forth, Utility and the Project Developer agree as follows:

1. Utility shall complete an Interconnection Study in accordance with Utility’s Generator Interconnection Requirements and this Agreement.

2. The Utility is permitted by the Michigan Public Service Commission to charge the

Project Developer for an Interconnection Study. The charges shall not exceed the lesser of either of the following:

(a) 5% of the estimated total cost of the Project, or (b) $10,000

D-2

The Utility shall not charge the Project Developer if the Project’s aggregate export capacity is less than 15% of the line section peak load and the Project does not contribute more than 25% of the maximum short circuit current at the point of interconnection. The Project Developer will be billed for the cost of the Interconnection Study at the conclusion of the Interconnection Study.

3. The Project Developer is to return this executed Interconnection Study Agreement to the Utility as soon as possible. The interconnection process will not proceed until the fully executed Interconnection Study Agreement is received.

4. The Utility shall supply a copy of the completed Interconnection Study to the Project

Developer.

5. Any notice or request made to or by either Party regarding this Agreement shall be made to the representative of the other Party, or its designated agent, as indicated below.

Utility Project Developer Name Company Address 1 Address 2

D-3

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties have caused this Interconnection Study Agreement to be executed by their respective authorized officials. By: By: (Signature) (Signature) (Typewritten or Printed Name) (Typewritten or Printed Name) Title Title Date Date

APPENDIX E

INTERCONNECTION AND OPERATING AGREEMENT

GENERATOR INTERCONNECTION &

OPERATING AGREEMENT

FOR

PROJECTS WITH

AGGREGATE GENERATOR OUTPUT

OF 2 MW OR MORE

GENERATOR INTERCONNECTION &

OPERATING AGREEMENT

BETWEEN CONSUMERS ENERGY AND (PROJECT DEVELOPER NAME)

Dated _________________, 200_

E-i

GENERATOR INTERCONNECTION & OPERATING AGREEMENT

BETWEEN CONSUMERS ENERGY AND (PROJECT DEVELOPER NAME) Table of Contents SECTION 1 - INTERCONNECTION FACILITIES......................................................................................... 2 General.......................................................................................................................................................... 2 Project Developer's Interconnection Facilities............................................................................................... 2 Consumers' Interconnection Facilities........................................................................................................... 3 Easements and Permits ................................................................................................................................ 3 Relocation by Project Developer ................................................................................................................... 3 Payment by Project Developer of Consumers' Costs and Expenses ........................................................... 3 SECTION 2 - DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE INTERCONNECTION FACILITIES..................... 5 Authority for Construction.............................................................................................................................. 5 Coordination of Construction Program.......................................................................................................... 5 Interconnection of the Project ...................................................................................................................... 5 Parallel Operation of the Project With Consumers' Distribution System....................................................... 6 Subcontractors .............................................................................................................................................. 7 SECTION 3 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE....................................................................................... 7 Operation and Maintenance By Consumers ................................................................................................. 7 Operation and Maintenance By Project Developer ....................................................................................... 9 SECTION 4 - ACCESS ............................................................................................................................... 10 SECTION 5 - INTERCONNECTION POINT; POINT OF DELIVERY; METERING;TELEMETERING..…..10 Interconnection Point................................................................................................................................... 10 Point of Delivery .......................................................................................................................................... 10 Metering ...................................................................................................................................................... 10 Telemetering ............................................................................................................................................... 11 SECTION 6 - SERVICE CONDITIONS....................................................................................................... 11 Site Preparation........................................................................................................................................... 11 Parallel Operation........................................................................................................................................ 11 Voltage Control............................................................................................................................................ 11 System Security........................................................................................................................................... 12 Continuity of Service.................................................................................................................................... 12 Project Backup Power……………….……………………...………………………………………………………12 Consumers' Obligation to Connect.............................................................................................................. 12 SECTION 7 - INDEMNITY; INSURANCE ................................................................................................... 13 Indemnity..................................................................................................................................................... 13 Insurance..................................................................................................................................................... 13 SECTION 8 - LIMITATION ON LIABILITY.................................................................................................. 14 SECTION 9 - FORCE MAJEURE ............................................................................................................... 14 SECTION 10 - BREACH AND DEFAULT ................................................................................................... 15

E-ii

SECTION 11 - SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS ......................................................................................... 16 SECTION 12 - GOVERNING LAW ............................................................................................................. 16 SECTION 13 - EFFECTIVE DATE, TERM AND TERMINATION............................................................... 16 SECTION 14 - RETIREMENT..................................................................................................................... 16 SECTION 15 - ENTIRE AGREEMENT AND AMENDMENTS.................................................................... 17 SECTION 16 - NO PARTNERSHIP ............................................................................................................ 17 SECTION 17 - SEVERABILITY................................................................................................................... 17 SECTION 18 - NOTICE TO PARTIES........................................................................................................ 17 SECTION 19 - NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES ................................................................................. 18 SECTION 20 - SECTION HEADINGS ........................................................................................................ 18 EXHIBIT 1 - SCOPE OF FACILITIES..……………………………………………………………………………19 EXHIBIT 2 - WIRING DIAGRAM…………………………………………………………………………………..20

E-1

GENERATOR INTERCONNECTION & OPERATING AGREEMENT

BETWEEN CONSUMERS ENERGY AND (PROJECT DEVELOPER NAME)

GENERATOR INTERCONNECTON & OPERATING AGREEMENT (hereinafter, this Agreement), is

made and entered into as of the _________________ day of _______________, 200__, (hereinafter, the

Effective Date), between CONSUMERS ENERGY, a Michigan corporation, with offices located at One Energy

Plaza, Jackson, MI 49201, herein termed "Consumers”, and (PROJECT DEVELOPER NAME), with offices

located at (Address, City, State Zip), herein termed "Project Developer." Consumers and Project Developer

are hereinafter sometimes referred to individually as "Party" and collectively as "Parties" where appropriate.

WITNESSETH:

WHEREAS, Consumers owns electric facilities and is engaged in the generation, purchase,

distribution and sale of electric energy in the State of Michigan; and

WHEREAS, Project Developer intends to construct and own a _________ plant, known as the

________________ Generating Plant, herein termed "Project", with a generator design capacity nameplate

rating not to exceed _______ MW and located at (Address, City, State Zip); and

WHEREAS, This Agreement does not address the sale of electricity to or from Consumers; and

WHEREAS, The Parties desire to enter into this Agreement for the purposes, among others, of (a)

describing (i) the facilities and associated appurtenances to interconnect the Project to Consumers’

distribution system, including defining the Point of Delivery and Interconnection Point, (ii) the facilities required

for providing and regulating reactive power supply (kilovars) at the Project, and (iii) any modifications and

additions necessary on Consumers’ distribution system as a result of the operation of the Project;

(b) establishing the ownership interests of Consumers and Project Developer in such facilities; (c) establishing

the respective obligations and rights of the Parties with respect to the procurement, construction, installation,

operation and maintenance of such facilities.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and agreements herein set forth, the

Parties hereto agree as follows:

E-2

SECTION 1

INTERCONNECTION FACILITIES

1.1 General

The Parties shall provide, as specified in this Section 1, certain facilities and associated

appurtenances required to interconnect the Project to Consumers’ distribution system. Such facilities and

associated appurtenances include, but shall not be limited to, interconnection, transformation, switching,

control, metering, telemetering, protective relaying equipment (such protective relaying equipment required by

Consumers or Project Developer to protect Consumers’ distribution system, its customers, and the Project

from electrical faults occurring at the Project or on Consumers’ distribution system or on the systems of others

to which Consumers’ distribution system is directly or indirectly connected) and any necessary additions or

reinforcements by Consumers to Consumers’ distribution system required as a result of the interconnection of

the Project to Consumers’ distribution system. The facilities and associated appurtenances described in

Exhibit 1 – Scope of Facilities, Subsections 1.2, "Project Developer's Interconnection Facilities," and 1.3,

"Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities," are hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "Interconnection

Facilities." Project Developer shall be responsible for the cost of the Interconnection Facilities, unless

otherwise specified in this Agreement.

The Project, configured as discussed in this Agreement and depicted in Exhibit 2 – Wiring Diagram,

will be comprised of _____ generators with a total generation output of _______ MW, which can be

connected to Consumers’ distribution system as described herein. In the future, if the Project Developer

desires to install additional generating units at this present location, the Project Developer must submit a

written application to Consumers. Consumers will evaluate its distribution system to determine if conditions at

that time will allow said system to support additional capacity.

In the event future changes in (a) the design or operation of the Project, (b) Federal, State or local

laws, regulations, ordinances or codes, (c) Project Developer's requirements (such as additional generators

located at the site location identified above) or (d) Consumers’ requirements necessitate additional facilities or

modifications to the then existing Interconnection Facilities, the Parties shall undertake such additions or

modifications as may be necessary. Before undertaking such future additions or modifications, the Parties

shall consult, develop plans and coordinate schedules of activities so as to minimize disruption of the

Interconnection Facilities. The cost of such future additions or modifications to the Interconnection Facilities

shall be borne by the Project Developer, unless agreed upon otherwise at the time. The ownership, operation

and maintenance responsibilities for any such future additions or modifications shall be made consistent with

the responsibilities allocated in this Agreement.

1.2 Project Developer's Interconnection Facilities

Project Developer’s Interconnection Facilities and associated appurtenances are described in

Subsection 1.2 of Exhibit 1 – Scope of Facilities.

Project Developer shall bear the cost of its Project unless otherwise specified in this Agreement.

Project Developer shall be solely responsible for all permits, zoning reviews, and other matters associated with

obtaining rights from any governmental body or agency to construct its Project. Prior to Consumers beginning

E-3

construction of its Interconnection Facilities, Project Developer shall provide a copy of all necessary

documents granting Project Developer the right to construct its Project.

1.3 Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities

Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities and associated appurtenances are described in Subsection 1.3

of Exhibit 1 – Scope of Facilities.

Project Developer shall bear the cost of Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities unless otherwise

specified in this Agreement. Consumers shall be responsible for all permits, zoning reviews, and other

matters associated with obtaining rights from any governmental body or agency to construct its

Interconnection Facilities. Project Developer shall reimburse Consumers for all costs associated with the

installation and connection of Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities. Project Developer shall solely assume

the risk that Consumers may be unable to complete its Interconnection Facilities due to factors beyond its

reasonable control.

1.4 Easements and Permits

If necessary, prior to the installation of the Interconnection Facilities, Consumers will acquire required

permits and necessary easements for its Interconnection Facilities. These easements / permits may include,

but shall not be limited to, easements to clear trees, and all necessary rights-of-way for installation and

maintenance of Interconnection Facilities. The Project Developer shall reimburse Consumers for the costs

and expenses it incurs in acquiring such easements / permits.

1.5 Relocation by Project Developer

If at any time the Project Developer requires Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities located on its

premises to be relocated on such premises, Consumers shall, at Project Developer's expense and upon its

request, relocate the same or give permission for Project Developer to relocate the same.

1.6 Payment by Project Developer of Consumers Costs and Expenses

1.6.1 Project Developer shall reimburse Consumers for its total cost and expenses incurred in

providing the Interconnection Facilities required by Subsection 1.3 and 1.4. Project

Developer shall not be entitled to receive a rebate of any portion of the total cost and expense

incurred in providing the facilities required by Subsection 1.3 and 1.4 in the event that any

Consumers’ customers are later connected to such facilities.

1.6.2 Consumers’ good faith estimate (developed in accordance with “standard utility accounting

practices”) for providing and installing Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities, including

easement rights and permits, is $________________. Further, Consumers estimates it will

incur such cost and expense over a period of time. The Project Developer shall make

advance payments to Consumers for its good faith estimate and expenses in accordance

with invoices rendered by Consumers. For all payments whose due date comes at least 15

days after the effective date of this Agreement, invoices will be rendered and payments shall

be due and payable such that Consumers receives the payments by the target due dates

E-4

indicated in the following payment schedule:

Payment

Amount Due

Milestone Description

Target Due Date (Number of Weeks from Completion of Application)

1 50% or $ figure

Execution of Generator Interconnection & Operating Agreement

0

2 50% or $ figure

Start of Construction 3

$_________ Good Faith Estimate Total True-up

(invoice or refund)

Three months after Construction Complete

N/A

Payments shall be made in accordance with Subsection 1.6.3, 1.6.4, and 1.6.5.

1.6.3 When Consumers has determined that all costs and expenses are accounted for on its

books, Consumers will issue a final invoice or credit to reconcile the good faith estimate with

the final work order estimate of the project. The final work order estimate, will be reviewed

and reconciled to the good faith estimate for each portion of the project covered under this

Agreement. If Consumers’ final work order estimates are less than the good faith estimate

provided in Subsection 1.6.2, Consumers shall refund the incremental amount to Project

Developer, or revise the amount of the final invoice identified in Subsection 1.6.2, if the final

payment has not yet been invoiced. If Consumers’ final work order estimates are greater

than the good faith estimate provided in Subsection 1.6.2, Consumers shall issue a final

invoice to Project Developer for the incremental amount, or revise the amount of the final

invoice identified in Subsection 1.6.2, if the final payment has not yet been invoiced.

1.6.4 All payments to Consumers shall be made payable to Consumers Energy Company and shall

be sent to Consumers, Attention: Treasurer, One Energy Plaza, Jackson, MI 49201, or by

wire transfer to a Consumers’ bank account or such other manner or at such place as

Consumers shall, from time to time, designate by notice to Project Developer. Payments

made by wire transfer shall reference the appropriate invoice number for which payment is

being made.

1.6.5 Any payment not made on or before the due date shall bear interest, from the date due until

the date upon which payment is made, at an annual percentage rate of interest equal to the

lesser of (a) the prime rate published by the Wall Street Journal (which represents the base

rate on corporate loans posted by at least 75% of the nation's banks) on the date due, plus

2%, or (b) the highest rate permitted by law.

SECTION 2

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE INTERCONNECTION FACILITIES

2.1 Authority for Construction

Except as provided in the following paragraph, Project Developer will have sole authority to manage,

design, supervise, construct, procure materials for, control and will take all steps which it deems necessary or

E-5

appropriate for the installation of the Interconnection Facilities required pursuant to Subsection 1.2, "Project

Developer's Interconnection Facilities."

The design, specifications, installation and construction of the Interconnection Facilities required

pursuant to Subsection 1.2 shall be in accordance with standards no less stringent than those used by

Consumers for its own distribution voltage level installations and shall be inspected and commented on by

Consumers prior to being placed into initial operation. However, Consumers has no obligation or responsibility

with respect to such design, plans, specifications, installation or construction because of its inspection and

comment thereon. Inspection of and comments by Consumers shall not relieve Project Developer of any of its

obligations under this Agreement.

Consumers shall exercise sole authority to manage, design, supervise, construct, procure materials

for, control and take all steps which it deems necessary or appropriate for the installation and connection of

the Interconnection Facilities required pursuant to Subsection 1.3, "Consumers' Interconnection Facilities."

2.2 Coordination of Construction Program

The installation of Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities, as herein described, shall be completed and

ready for service within 18 weeks from the time a complete Interconnection Application is received by

Consumers, unless a waiver to this time schedule is granted by the Michigan Public Service Commission

pursuant to Subsection 2.1. Delays that are the responsibility of the Project Developer or are attributable to

the time lapse while Consumers diligently seeks to secure necessary rights-of-way, governmental permitting,

zoning requirements, etc., will not be counted in the time to meet this 18-week deadline.

2.3 Interconnection of the Project

Interconnection of the Project to Consumers' distribution system shall be made after the following

conditions have been satisfied:

2.3.1 Both Parties have declared their Interconnection Facilities ready for service;

2.3.2. Project Developer has met the design, specifications, installation and construction

requirements of the second paragraph of Subsection 2.1, Authority for Construction;

2.3.3. Project Developer has provided adequate protective equipment to protect the equipment and

service of Consumers from damage or interruption from electrical faults occurring at the

Project;

2.3.4 Consumers has tested and accepted the billing meters and associated telemetry for the

collection of the metered data required pursuant to Exhibit 1 – Scope of Facilities, Subsection

1.3__;

2.3.5 Project Developer and Consumers have executed a procedure to describe the process (i) for

switching and tagging the interconnection facilities for workers’ protection during periods

when such equipment must be removed from service and (ii) for returning the equipment to

service. Both Parties agree to follow the procedure for disconnecting and re-connecting the

interconnection as outlined in Appendix F of the appropriate Michigan Electric Utility

Generator Interconnection Requirements document;

2.3.6 If the Project Developer requires backup power from Consumers, the Project Developer shall

E-6

be responsible for contracting with Consumers for the delivery of said backup power. The

Project Developer shall provide Consumers satisfactory evidence that it has purchased the

resources to supply backup power pursuant to Subsection 6.6, Project Backup Power; and

2.3.7 Project Developer has reimbursed Consumers for all pertinent costs associated with the

installation of Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities as identified in Subsection 1.3, 1.4 and

1.6.

2.4 Parallel Operation of the Project With Consumers' Distribution System

Parallel operation of the Project with Consumers' distribution system shall only begin after the

following conditions have been satisfied and confirmed in writing by Consumers to Project Developer:

2.4.1 Project Developer has met all of the requirements of Subsection 2.3;

2.4.2 Project Developer has obtained written approval by Consumers of all protective relay

equipment required pursuant to Exhibit 1 – Scope of Facilities, Subsection 1.2__ and the

direct transfer trip equipment required pursuant to Subsections 1.2__ and 1.3__ for the

protection of Consumers' distribution system. Approval will be granted after the required pro-

tective relay equipment is inspected and calibrated in accordance with the relay setting data

issued by Consumers. Inspection and calibration must be either performed or witnessed by

Consumers' personnel at Project Developer's expense. Project Developer must record the

actual settings and inspection data on the relay-setting document furnished by Consumers

and return such document to Consumers for approval;

2.4.3 Project Developer has developed operating and maintenance procedures, which Consumers

has accepted in writing, for those protective devices which directly connect to Consumers’

distribution system or interface with Consumers’ protective devices;

2.4.4 Consumers has tested and accepted the telemetry / SCADA interface and concurs they meet

the technical requirements as identified in the Telemetry and Disturbance Monitoring

Requirements Section and the Communication Circuits Section of the Michigan Electric Utility

Generator Interconnection Requirements. Testing must be performed by Consumers’

personnel at Project Developer’s expense and acceptance will be communicated to Project

Developer in writing; and

2.4.5 Project Developer has developed operating procedures to manually trip generation for

system security pursuant to Subsection 6.4, System Security.

2.5 Subcontractors

Either Party may hire a subcontractor to perform its obligations under this Agreement. However,

each Party shall require its subcontractors to abide by the terms of this Agreement. Each Party shall remain

primarily liable to the other Party for the performance of such subcontractor. Hiring a subcontractor does not

release either Party from any of its obligations.

E-7

SECTION 3

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

3.1 Operation and Maintenance By Consumers

Consumers shall have sole authority and responsibility to operate and maintain Consumers'

Interconnection Facilities required pursuant to Subsection 1.3, and in accordance with the applicable good

utility practice standards of Consumers. Consumers may manually operate, when necessary, Consumers'

Interconnection Facilities and the isolation device provided by Project Developer pursuant to Exhibit 1 – Scope

of Facilities, Subsection 1.2__, and may perform preventive or emergency maintenance, or make system

modifications, when necessary, on Consumers' Interconnection Facilities. Normal maintenance shall be

scheduled on Consumers' Interconnection Facilities taking into consideration Project Developer's schedule of

maintenance for the Project. Such authority and responsibility shall include removing the Interconnection

Facilities from service, when necessary, as determined by Consumers. Consumers shall not be required to

deliver energy to the Project or provide a temporary connection to the Project when maintenance or system

modifications require disconnecting Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities from Consumers' distribution

system.

3.1.1 Project Developer shall reimburse Consumers for all direct and indirect costs and expenses

(including but not limited to, overtime pay, property taxes, insurance, equipment testing and

inspections) incurred by Consumers in owning, operating and maintaining Consumers’

Interconnection Facilities from the point in time in which Consumers’ Interconnection

Facilities are ready for service. Such costs and expenses shall be determined by Consumers

in accordance with the standard practices and policies followed by Consumers for the

performance of work for others in effect at the time such operation and maintenance is

performed. As used in this Agreement, the term "maintenance" includes inspection, repair

and replacement. Payment by Project Developer of such costs and expenses shall be made

in accordance with Subsection 3.1.4. In the event that Consumers uses any part of

Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities defined in Subsection 1.3 for the benefit of Consumers'

customers, then the allocation of the ongoing costs and expenses which are due to the

ownership, operation and maintenance of Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities provided

pursuant to Subsection 1.3, shall be redetermined with consideration for possible changes in:

(a) Point of Delivery, (b) metering location, (c) operation and maintenance costs to Project

Developer to new Point of Delivery, if any, and (d) compensation to Consumers for

appropriate operating and maintenance costs from the new Point of Delivery, if any.

Consumers shall not be restricted in the use of Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities while

such redetermination is being made.

E-8

3.1.2 If Consumers performs the following tasks on the Project Developer’s behalf, the Project

Developer shall reimburse Consumers for costs associated with (a) testing of metering and

associated telemetry required pursuant to Subsection 2.3.4, (b) the relay setting information,

inspection and calibration required pursuant to Subsection 2.4.2 and (c) the testing of the

dispatching interface required pursuant to Subsection 2.4.4, which shall be separately billed

by Consumers' System Maintenance and Construction Services Department.

3.1.3 Project Developer shall be solely responsible for ordering, acquiring and all continuing

operating expenses associated with the telephone circuits described in Subsection 3.1.2 as

well as the proper safety equipment required for the proper installation of said telephone

circuits. Additional operation and maintenance expenses associated with telemetry facilities

are the responsibility of the Project Developer pursuant to Subsection 5.4.

3.1.4 Payments by Project Developer of the costs and expenses described in Subsections 3.1.1

and 3.1.2 are as follows:

3.1.4.1 As soon as practicable after the end of each month in which operation and

maintenance costs and expenses were incurred by Consumers pursuant to

Subsection 3.1.1 and 3.1.2, Consumers shall furnish Project Developer a

statement describing the work performed or expense incurred and showing the

amount of the payment to be made therefore by Project Developer.

3.1.4.2 Each statement shall be paid by Project Developer so that Consumers will receive

the funds by the 20th day following the date of such statement, or the first

business day thereafter if the payment date falls on a non-business day.

3.1.4.3 All payments shall be made payable to Consumers Energy Company and shall be

sent to Consumers, Attention: Treasurer, One Energy Plaza, Jackson, MI 49201,

or by wire transfer to a Consumers’ bank account or such other manner or at such

place as Consumers shall, from time to time, designate by written notice to Project

Developer. Payments made by wire transfer shall reference the appropriate

invoice number for which payment is being made.

3.1.4.4 Any payment not made on or before the due date shall bear interest, from the date

due until the date upon which payment is made, at an annual percentage rate of

interest equal to the lesser of (a) the prime rate published by the Wall Street

Journal (which represents the base rate on corporate loans posted by at least 75%

of the nation's banks) on the date due, plus 2%, or (b) the highest rate permitted

by law.

3.2 Operation and Maintenance By Project Developer

Except as provided in Subsections 2.4.2 and 3.1 and the provisions of this Subsection 3.2, Project

E-9

Developer shall have sole authority and responsibility to operate and maintain the Project Developer’s

Interconnection Facilities required pursuant to Subsection 1.2 in accordance with prudent industry practices.

Relay settings, for protective devices required by Consumers, may be revised and documents stating

such revisions may be issued by Consumers if it determines that it is necessary to do so. The settings for

these devices may be revised only if Consumers issues documents specifying such revisions. In such event,

the protective relay equipment shall be recalibrated by Project Developer in accordance with such revised

relay settings within a reasonable period specified by Consumers. The procedure for recalibration and

approval shall be the same as stated for the initial calibration pursuant to Subsection 2.4.2.

The protective relay equipment shall be tested every two (2) years (unless an extension is agreed to

by Consumers) to verify the calibration indicated on the latest relay setting document issued by Consumers. If

the protective relay equipment is not calibrated in accordance with the latest relay-setting document, it shall be

recalibrated in accordance with Subsection 2.4.2, to conform with such data. Tests shall be conducted or

witnessed by Consumers at Project Developer's expense. The results of such tests shall be provided to

Consumers in writing for review and approval.

Consumers may, at any time in addition to that specified in the preceding paragraph, at Consumers'

expense, inspect and test Project Developer's Interconnection Facilities to verify that the required protective

interconnection equipment is in service, properly maintained, and calibrated to provide the intended protection.

If necessary, this inspection may also include a review of Project Developer's pertinent records.

Inspection, testing and/or approval by Consumers or the omission of any inspection, testing and/or

approval by Consumers pursuant to this Agreement shall not relieve Project Developer of any obligations or

responsibility assumed under this Agreement.

SECTION 4

ACCESS

Consumers, its agents and employees, shall have full right and authority of ingress and egress at all

reasonable times on and across the premises of Project Developer for the purpose of installing, operating,

maintaining, inspecting, replacing, repairing, and removing its Interconnection Facilities located on the

premises. The right of ingress and egress, however, shall not unreasonably interfere with Project Developer's

use of its premises.

SECTION 5

INTERCONNECTION POINT; POINT OF DELIVERY; METERING; TELEMETERING

5.1 Interconnection Point

The Interconnection Point shall be where the Project Developer’s Interconnection Facilities connect to

Consumers’ distribution system.

E-10

5.2 Point of Delivery

If the Project is connected to a distribution line serving other customers, the Point of Delivery shall be

at the high voltage side of the Project supplied isolation transformer connecting the Project to Consumers’

distribution system. Otherwise, the Point of Delivery shall be the point at which the radial line connecting the

Project to Consumers’ distribution system terminates at the first substation beyond the Project’s isolation

transformer.

5.3 Metering

Measurements of electric energy deliveries shall be made by standard types of electric meters

installed and maintained by Consumers pursuant to Exhibit 1 – Scope of Facilities, Subsection 1.3__.

The standard electric meters shall be tested by Consumers at least once every six (6) years. On

request and at the expense of the Project Developer, a special test may be performed. Representatives of

Project Developer shall be afforded the opportunity to be present at all routine or special tests and upon

occasions when any readings, for purposes of settlements, are taken from meters not bearing an automatic

record.

5.4 Telemetering

Certain telemetry facilities will be provided by Consumers pursuant to Exhibit 1 – Scope of Facilities,

Subsection 1.3__ as a part of the Interconnection Facilities as being necessary for the proper and efficient

collection of metering and control data. The cost and maintenance of such telemetry facilities and associated

phone lines shall be borne by Project Developer.

SECTION 6

SERVICE CONDITIONS

6.1 Site Preparation

At its own expense, the Project Developer shall make the proposed Project site available to

Consumers. Said site shall be free from hazard and shall be adequate for the operation and construction of

distribution facilities necessary to interconnect the proposed Project.

6.2 Parallel Operation

It is understood that the Project will normally remain connected to and be operated in parallel with

Consumers' distribution system. The Project Developer shall, at its expense, install and properly maintain

protective equipment and devices and provide sufficiently trained personnel to protect its equipment and

service, and the equipment and service of Consumers from damage, injury or interruptions during the

Project’s parallel operation with Consumers' distribution system, and, without limiting the indemnity provided in

E-11

Subsection 7.1 herein, will assume any loss, liability or damage to Project Developer and Consumers’

distribution system and equipment caused by lack of or failure of such protection. Such protective equipment

specifications and design shall be consistent with the Michigan Electric Utility Industry Generator

Interconnection Requirements, and any successor and/or supplemental documents. Prior to the Project

operating in parallel with Consumers’ distribution system, the Project Developer shall provide satisfactory

evidence to Consumers that it has met the Michigan Electric Utility Generator Interconnection Requirements

that are on file with the Michigan Public Service Commission and complied with all applicable laws, rules,

regulations, guidelines, and safety standards.

6.3 Voltage Control

Project Developer shall cooperate with Consumers to regulate the voltage level at the Point of

Delivery by controlling its generators in accordance with Consumers' instructions. Such instructions shall

include, but not be limited to, (a) maintaining voltage or (b) delivering real and reactive power to the Point of

Delivery at levels specified by Consumers. The instructions given by Consumers shall be consistent with the

normal practices adhered to by Consumers with respect to its own generators located on its system.

6.4 System Security

Installation, inspection, and calibration of relaying to trip generation for under- or over-frequency

operation shall be coordinated with Consumers, pursuant to Subsection 2.4.2, so as not to degrade the

security of Consumers' distribution system. Operating practices developed by Project Developer which call for

manual tripping of generation for under-or over-frequency operation shall likewise be coordinated and be

consistent with the provisions of East Central Area Reliability Document 3, "Emergency Procedures” During

Declining System Frequency, and any successor and/or supplemental documents, which are incorporated

herein by reference.

6.5 Continuity of Service

Each Party shall exercise reasonable care to maintain continuity of service in the delivery and receipt

of electric energy. If service becomes interrupted for any reason, the cause of such interruption shall be

removed and normal operating conditions restored as soon as practicable.

6.6 Project Backup Power

If the Project Developer requires backup power from Consumers, the Project Developer will contract

with Consumers for the delivery of power provided to the Project under one of Consumers' established retail

rates set forth in Consumers’ tariffs, which are incorporated herein by reference. The provisions of such

contract shall be applied during periods when the Project is not delivering energy to Consumers. The Project

Developer will contract with Consumers for the purchase of energy or provide satisfactory evidence of the

purchase of energy from an alternative energy supplier for the purpose of providing power to the Project

during periods when the Project is not delivering energy to Consumers’ distribution system.

E-12

Project Developer shall have sufficient voltage regulation at the Project to maintain an acceptable

voltage level for Project equipment during such periods when the Project's generation is off line.

6.7 Consumers' Obligation to Connect

Consumers shall not be obligated to continue the electrical interconnection to the Project if any one or

more of the following conditions exist, including but not limited to: (a) those conditions listed in the

Miscellaneous Operational Requirements section of the Michigan Electric Utility Generator Interconnection

Requirements, (b) electrical characteristics of the Project are not compatible with the electrical characteristics

of Consumers' distribution system, (c) the Project Developer is deficient in following either the voltage

schedule or reactive power schedule established by Consumers, (d) an emergency condition exists on

Consumers’ distribution system, (e) Project Developer's protective relay equipment fails, resulting in a lack of

the level of protection required by prudent utility practice, (f) the Project Developer’s Project is determined to

be disrupting Consumers customers or (g) Consumers requires disconnection of the Project in order to

construct, install, maintain, repair, replace, remove, investigate, inspect or test any part of Consumers’

Interconnection Facilities or any other Consumers equipment associated with the interconnection (also if a

required component (example: phone line) or required modification to allow interconnection fails or becomes

incapacitated and is not repaired in a timely manner). Consumers shall electrically connect or reconnect its

distribution system to the Project when, in Consumers' sole opinion, the conditions named above cease to

exist. Under any of the conditions listed above, Consumers will follow the agreed upon procedures for

disconnecting and re-connecting the interconnection as outlined in Appendix F of the appropriate Michigan

Electric Utility Generator Interconnection Requirements document.

SECTION 7

INDEMNITY; INSURANCE

7.1 Indemnity

Each Party shall at all times assume all liability for, and shall indemnify and save the other Party

harmless from, any and all damages, losses, claims, demands, suits, recoveries, costs, legal fees, and

expenses for injury to or death of any person or persons whomsoever occurring on its own system, or for any

loss, destruction of or damage to any property of third persons, firms, corporations or other entities occurring

on its own system, including environmental harm or damage arising out of or resulting from, either directly or

indirectly, its own Interconnection Facilities, or arising out of or resulting from, either directly or indirectly, any

electric energy furnished to it hereunder after such energy has been delivered to it by such other Party, unless

caused by the sole negligence or intentional wrongdoing of the other Party. The provisions of this Subsection

7.1 shall survive termination or expiration of this Agreement.

7.2 Insurance

E-13

Project Developer shall obtain and continuously maintain throughout the term of this Agreement

General Liability insurance written on a standard occurrence form, or other form acceptable to Consumers,

and covering bodily injury and property damage liability with a per occurrence and annual policy aggregate

amount of at least:

Project Capacity Minimum Limit 2 MW or more $5,000,000

When requested in writing by Consumers, said limit shall be increased each year that this Agreement

is in force to a limit no greater than the amount arrived at by increasing the original limit by the same

percentage change as the Consumer Price Index - All Urban Workers (CPI-U.S. Cities Average). Such policy

shall include, but not be limited to, contractual liability for indemnification assumed by Project Developer under

this Agreement.

Consumers shall be named as an additional insured under such policy. The policy shall be primary

coverage with no contribution from any insurance maintained by Consumers. Consumers shall not be

responsible for any unpaid premiums under Project Developer policy.

Evidence of insurance coverage on a certificate of insurance shall be provided to Consumers upon

execution of this Agreement and thereafter within ten (10) days after expiration of coverage; however, if

evidence of insurance is not received by the 11th day, Consumers has the right, but not the duty, to purchase

the insurance coverage required under this Section and to charge the annual premium to Project Developer.

Consumers shall receive thirty (30) days advance written notice if the policy is cancelled or substantial

changes are made that affect the additional insured. At Consumers' request, Project Developer shall provide a

copy of the policy to Consumers. All certificates and notices shall be mailed to:

Consumers Energy Company

One Energy Plaza

Jackson, MI 49201

Attention: Corporate Insurance Department

SECTION 8

LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

NEITHER PARTY SHALL IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE TO THE OTHER FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SUCH AS, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, REVENUE OR GOOD

WILL, INTEREST, LOSS BY REASON OF SHUTDOWN OR NON-OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT OR

MACHINERY, INCREASED EXPENSE OF OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT OR MACHINERY, COST OF

PURCHASED OR REPLACEMENT POWER OR SERVICES OR CLAIMS BY CUSTOMERS, WHETHER

SUCH LOSS IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR

OTHERWISE. EVEN IF IT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

E-14

SECTION 9

FORCE MAJEURE

Neither Party shall be considered to be in Default with respect to any obligation hereunder other than

the obligation to pay money when due, if prevented from fulfilling such obligation by Force Majeure. A Party

unable to fulfill any obligation hereunder (other than an obligation to pay money when due) by reason of Force

Majeure shall give notice and the full particulars of such Force Majeure to the other Party in writing or by

telephone as soon as reasonably possible after the occurrence of the cause relied upon. Telephone notices

given pursuant to this article shall be confirmed in writing as soon as reasonably possible and shall specifically

state full particulars of the Force Majeure, the time and date when the Force Majeure occurred and when the

Force Majeure is reasonably expected to cease. The Party affected shall exercise due diligence to remove

such disability with reasonable dispatch, but shall not be required to accede or agree to any provision not

satisfactory to it in order to settle and terminate a strike or other labor disturbance.

SECTION 10

BREACH AND DEFAULT

A breach of this Agreement (“Breach”) shall occur upon the failure of a Party to perform or observe

any material term or condition of this Agreement. Default of this Agreement (“Default”) shall occur upon the

failure of a Party in Breach of this Agreement to cure such Breach. Examples of Default include, but are not

limited to:

a. Failure to pay money when due; b. Failure to comply with any material term or condition of this Agreement, including but not limited

to any material Breach of a representation, warranty or covenant made in this Agreement; c. A Party: (i) becomes insolvent; (b) files a voluntary petition in bankruptcy under any provision of

any federal of state bankruptcy law or shall consent to the filing of any bankruptcy or reorganization petition against it under any similar law; (c) makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors or (d) consents to the appointment of a receiver, trustee or liquidator;

d. Assignment of this Agreement in a manner inconsistent with the terms of this Agreement; e. Failure of either Party to provide such access rights, or a Party’s attempt to revoke or terminate

such access rights, as provided under this Agreement; f. Failure of either Party to provide information or data to the other Party as required under this

Agreement, provided the Party entitled to the information or data under this Agreement requires such information or data to satisfy its obligations under this Agreement.

In the event of a Breach or Default by either Party, the Parties shall continue to operate and maintain,

as applicable, its Interconnection Facilities, protection and Metering Equipment, transformers, communication

equipment, building facilities, software, documentation, structural components and other facilities and

appurtenances that are reasonably necessary for Consumers to operate and maintain Consumers’ distribution

system and for the Project Developer to operate and maintain its Project in a safe and reliable manner. Upon

a Default, the non-defaulting Party shall give written notice of such Default to the defaulting Party. The

E-15

defaulting Party then has 30 days to cure the Default. If a Default is not cured within the period provided for

herein or as agreed to by the Parties, the non-defaulting Party shall have the right to terminate this Agreement

by written notice and shall be relieved of any further obligations hereunder. Further, in the event of such

termination, the non-defaulting Party shall be entitled to recover from the defaulting Party all amounts due

hereunder, plus all other damages and remedies to which it is entitled at law or in equity. The provisions of

this Section 10 will survive termination of this Agreement.

SECTION 11 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the successors and assigns of the

respective Parties hereto. This Agreement shall not be assigned, transferred or otherwise alienated without

the other Party's prior written consent, which consent shall not unreasonably be withheld. Any attempted

assignment, transfer or alienation without such written consent shall be void.

SECTION 12

GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement shall be deemed to be a Michigan contract and shall be construed in accordance with

and governed by the laws of Michigan, exclusive of its conflict of laws principles. In the event that any change

in law or administrative regulation or rule that would materially alter the terms and conditions of this

Agreement, either Party shall have the right to seek modification of this Agreement without prior written

consent of the other Party.

SECTION 13

EFFECTIVE DATE, TERM AND TERMINATION

The Effective Date of this Agreement shall be the date of execution and shall continue in effect until

this Agreement is terminated as provided herein. The Agreement may be terminated at any time by mutual

agreement of both Parties, or by either Party upon giving the other at least ninety (90) days written notice if

one or more of the conditions exist as outlined in Subsection 6.7, Consumers’ Obligation to Connect.

SECTION 14

RETIREMENT

Upon termination of this Agreement pursuant to Section 13 or at such time after any of the

Interconnection Facilities described herein are no longer required, then the need for the retirement of said

Interconnection Facilities shall be mutually determined by the Parties. Retirement of said Interconnection

E-16

Facilities may include without limitation (i) dismantling, demolition, and removal of equipment, facilities, and

structures, (ii) security, (iii) maintenance and (iv) disposing of debris. The cost of such removal shall be borne

by the Party owning such Interconnection Facilities.

SECTION 15

ENTIRE AGREEMENT AND AMENDMENTS

This Agreement and the Michigan Electric Utility Generator Interconnection Requirements shall

constitute the entire understanding between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, supersedes

any and all previous understandings between the Parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and bind

and insure to the benefit of the Parties, their successors, and permitted assigns. No amendments or changes

to this Agreement shall be binding unless made in writing and duly executed by both Parties.

SECTION 16

NO PARTNERSHIP

This Agreement shall not be interpreted or construed to create an association, joint venture, agency

relationship, or partnership between the Parties or to impose any partnership obligation or partnership liability

upon either Party. Neither Party shall have any right, power or authority to enter into any agreement or

undertaking for, or act on behalf of, or to act as or be an agent or representative of, or to otherwise bind, the

other Party.

SECTION 17

SEVERABILITIY

If any provision or portion of this Agreement shall for any reason be held or adjudged to be invalid or

illegal or unenforceable by any court of competent jurisdiction or other Governmental Authority, (1) such

portion or provision shall be deemed separate and independent, (2) the Parties shall negotiate in good faith to

restore insofar as practicable the benefits to each Party that were affected by such ruling, and (3) the

remainder of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect.

SECTION 18

NOTICE TO PARTIES

Unless otherwise provided in this Agreement, any notice, consent or other communication required

to be made under this Agreement, shall be in writing and (i) mailed postage prepaid, by certified or registered

mail, return receipt requested; (ii) mailed via a nationally recognized overnight delivery service, or (iii) delivered

in person to the address as the receiving Party may designate in writing.

E-17

Consumers Energy

One Energy Plaza

Jackson, MI 49201

Attention: Manager – Transmission Agreements

(Project Developer’s Name)

(Address)

(City, State Zip)

Attention: (Contact Name)

All notices shall be effective when received.

SECTION 19

NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES

This Agreement is intended for the benefit of the Parties hereto and does not grant any rights to any

third parties unless otherwise specifically stated herein.

SECTION 20

SECTION HEADINGS

The various headings set forth in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only and shall in no

way affect the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have executed this Agreement.

CONSUMERS ENERGY

By ________________________________

Title_______________________________

(PROJECT DEVELOPER’S NAME)

By ______________________________

Title______________________________

E-18

EXHIBIT 1

SCOPE OF FACILITIES

1.1 General Facilities

Such facilities and associated appurtenances as required to interconnect Consumers’ existing

___________________ - ______________________ distribution line to the Project Developer’s new /

modified ________ MW Project by way of a new or modified interconnection, which shall include, but shall not

be limited to the following:

1.2 Project Developer’s Interconnection Facilities

(Identify Project Developer’s Interconnection Facilities here!)

1.3 Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities

(Identify Consumers’ Interconnection Facilities here!)

E-19

EXHIBIT 2

WIRING DIAGRAM

(Insert PDF file here!)

APPENDIX F

CONTACT LIST

F-1

CONTACT LIST Normal Operations and Emergency Switching

GENERAL Switching and clearance procedures for Consumers Energy (“Consumers”) and the Project Developer provides important documentation to ensure safe working conditions and orderly and reliable service when work is required on the Interconnection Facilities. PROCEDURE 1. Emergency Switching Procedure:

Operating Authority for the Project Developer will be handled by the following "Priority Contact List."

a. Project Developer’s Project ( ) b. Project Operator (pager) ( ) or mobile ( ) c. 1st Contact Name (home phone) ( ) d. Second Contact: If applicable

e. Third Contact: If applicable Operating Authority for Consumers will be the System Controller located in ________, Michigan. Telephone numbers are either ( ) or ( ) .

2. Scheduled Outage Procedure:

Request initiated by the Project Developer.

Operating Authority for the Project Developer will be (Contact Name), Project Operator or an authorized representative. (Contact Name) or an authorized representative will contact the System Control Scheduler to make the necessary arrangements and to agree on the switching procedures.

Request initiated by Consumers. Scheduling Authority for Consumers will be the System Control Scheduler located in __________, Michigan. Contact numbers are either ( ) or ( ) .

The System Control Scheduler will contact (Contact Name) or an authorized representative to make necessary arrangements and to agree on switching procedures. NOTE: Each authority will attempt to provide a minimum of 72 hours notice on scheduled outage requests, except in an emergency or imminent equipment failure.

3. Protective Tagging Procedures:

The Project’s primary substation disconnect switch (#199) and metering secondary knife switch will be considered as the normal tagging point for both the Project Developer and Consumers. NOTE: A written reminder will be included in the switching and tagging schedule to confirm that no generation is on the line at the Project Developer’s Project and that the Project’s breaker is open.

a. When the Project Developer requires protection to work on its equipment:

F-2

1. When Project Developer requires protection to work on its equipment, (Contact Name) or authorized representative will contact the System Control Scheduler and request protection. The System Control Scheduler will make the necessary arrangements and a Consumers employee, accompanied by a Project Developer representative, will check open the metering secondary knife switch and the primary substation disconnect switch. The primary substation disconnect switch and knife switch will be locked open and tagged with red protective tags for the Project Developer. The System Controller will then contact (Contact Name) or authorized representative and advise that the line exit is protected for the person in charge and give the tag points.

2. When (Contact Name) or authorized representative notifies the System Controller that

protection is no longer needed, a Consumers employee accompanied by a Project Developer representative will remove all protective tags and locks placed on the metering secondary knife switch and the primary substation disconnect switch.

b. When Consumers requires clearance: 1. The System Controller will contact (Contact Name) or authorized representative and request

the metering secondary knife switch and the primary substation disconnect switch be opened. A Consumers employee will verify that the metering secondary knife switch and the primary substation disconnect switch are open and place a red protective tag and lock on both switches at the Project Developer’s Substation.

2. When the work has been completed, the System Controller will notify (Contact Name) or

authorized representative that clearance is no longer needed. A Consumers employee, accompanied by a Project Developer representative, will remove the lock and protective tag from the metering secondary knife switch and the primary substation disconnect switch. The System Controller will notify (Contact Name) or authorized representative that Project Developer may restore service.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the Effective

Date identified below.

(PROJECT DEVELOPER’S NAME) CONSUMERS ENERGY

By _______________________ By _________________________ Title_______________________ Title________________________ Effective Date_________________

Lake WindsTM Energy Park Balance of Plant FINAL Engineering, Procurement, and Construction Agreement CONFIDENTIAL

Exhibit E

Project Milestone Schedule

Act

ivity

IDA

ctiv

ity N

ame

Ori

gD

ays

Rem

.D

ays

Sta

rtF

inis

h

CO

NS

UM

ER

S E

NE

RG

Y:

LA

KE

WIN

D, M

I (56

WT

Gs)

- 5

per

wk

WT

G D

eliv

erie

s &

1 M

ain

Cra

ne

CO

NS

UM

ER

S E

NE

RG

Y:

LA

KE

WIN

D, M

I (56

WT

...43

3d43

3d15

-Feb

-11

09-N

ov-1

2

MIL

ES

TO

NE

SM

ILE

ST

ON

ES

433d

433d

15-F

eb-1

109

-Nov

-12

LW-L

NT

PLi

mite

d N

otic

e to

Pro

ceed

0d0d

15-F

eb-1

1

LW-N

TP

Ful

l Not

ice

to P

roce

ed0d

0d01

-Ap

r-11

*

LW-M

ET

ME

T T

ower

s C

omp

lete

0d0d

28-A

pr-

11

LW-C

onst

2011

Sta

rt S

ite A

cces

Rd

s &

Fou

ndat

ions

0d0d

01-S

ep-1

1*

LW-S

ubst

aS

ubst

atio

n C

omp

lete

0d0d

15-M

ay-1

2

LW-M

ech

Mec

hani

cal C

omp

letio

n0d

0d20

-Aug

-12*

LW-S

ubC

omp

Sub

stan

tial C

omp

letio

n0d

0d16

-Oct

-12

LW-F

inal

Fin

al C

omp

letio

n0d

0d09

-Nov

-12*

DE

SIG

N/A

PP

RO

VA

LS

& P

RO

CU

RE

ME

NT

DE

SIG

N/A

PP

RO

VA

LS

& P

RO

CU

RE

ME

NT

156d

156d

15-F

eb-1

126

-Sep

-11

ME

T T

ow

ers

ME

T T

ow

ers

30d

30d

15-F

eb-1

129

-Mar

-11

LW-8

ME

T T

ower

Pro

cure

men

t30

d30

d15

-Feb

-11

29-M

ar-1

1

Civ

il &

Fo

un

dat

ion

sC

ivil

& F

ou

nd

atio

ns

146d

146d

15-F

eb-1

112

-Sep

-11

Geo

Tec

h, R

oad

s D

esig

n &

Fo

un

dat

ion

Des

ign

Geo

Tec

h, R

oad

s D

esig

n &

Fo

un

dat

ion

Des

ign

86d

86d

15-F

eb-1

116

-Jun

-11

LW-7

Site

Sur

veyi

ng22

d22

d15

-Feb

-11

17-M

ar-1

1

LW-6

Geo

tech

nica

l Inv

estig

atio

n50

d50

d18

-Mar

-11

26-M

ay-1

1

LW-D

P-1

3C

ivil

Des

ign

(Rd

s &

Fd

ns)

40d

40d

01-A

pr-

1126

-May

-11

LW-D

P-1

5C

ivil

Des

ign

Ap

pro

val

15d

15d

27-M

ay-1

116

-Jun

-11

Pro

cure

men

t fo

r F

ou

nd

atio

ns

Pro

cure

men

t fo

r F

ou

nd

atio

ns

60d

60d

17-J

un-1

112

-Sep

-11

Ele

ctri

cal

Ele

ctri

cal

156d

156d

15-F

eb-1

126

-Sep

-11

Ele

ctri

cal E

ng

inee

rin

gE

lect

rica

l En

gin

eeri

ng

69d

69d

15-F

eb-1

123

-May

-11

Su

bst

atio

ns

En

gin

eeri

ng

Su

bst

atio

ns

En

gin

eeri

ng

69d

69d

15-F

eb-1

123

-May

-11

LW-D

P-2

075

% D

esig

n (S

ubst

atio

n)40

d40

d15

-Feb

-11

11-A

pr-

11

LW-D

P-2

110

0% D

esig

n (S

ubst

atio

n)20

d20

d12

-Ap

r-11

09-M

ay-1

1

LW-D

P-2

2O

wne

r R

evie

w/A

pp

rova

l (S

ubst

atio

n)10

d10

d10

-May

-11

23-M

ay-1

1

Co

llec

tio

n S

yste

m &

Tra

nsm

issi

on

En

gin

eeri

ng

Co

llec

tio

n S

yste

m &

Tra

nsm

issi

on

En

gin

eeri

ng

59d

59d

15-F

eb-1

109

-May

-11

LW-D

P-1

775

% D

esig

n (C

olle

ctio

n/T

rans

mis

sion

)40

d40

d15

-Feb

-11

11-A

pr-

11

LW-D

P-1

810

0% D

esig

n (C

olle

ctio

n/T

rans

mis

sion

)10

d10

d12

-Ap

r-11

25-A

pr-

11

LW-D

P-1

9O

wne

r R

evie

w/A

pp

rova

l (C

olle

ctio

n/T

rans

mis

sion

)10

d10

d26

-Ap

r-11

09-M

ay-1

1

Ele

ctri

cal P

rocu

rem

ent

Ele

ctri

cal P

rocu

rem

ent

156d

156d

15-F

eb-1

126

-Sep

-11

GE

NE

RA

L C

ON

DIT

ION

SG

EN

ER

AL

CO

ND

ITIO

NS

20d

20d

04-A

ug-1

131

-Aug

-11

Mo

bili

zati

on

Mo

bili

zati

on

15d

15d

04-A

ug-1

124

-Aug

-11

Lay

do

wn

Lay

do

wn

15d

15d

11-A

ug-1

131

-Aug

-11

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NC

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

344d

384d

01-A

pr-

1116

-Oct

-12

ME

T T

OW

ER

SM

ET

TO

WE

RS

20d

20d

01-A

pr-

1128

-Ap

r-11

LW-M

ET

01

ME

T T

ower

Con

stru

ctio

n20

d20

d01

-Ap

r-11

28-A

pr-

11

CIV

IL &

FO

UN

DA

TIO

NS

CIV

IL &

FO

UN

DA

TIO

NS

201d

201d

01-S

ep-1

129

-Jun

-12

Acc

ess

Ro

ads

Acc

ess

Ro

ads

56d

56d

01-S

ep-1

118

-Nov

-11

Ro

ads

Rad

iiR

oad

s R

adii

15d

15d

16-A

pr-

1204

-May

-12

Fo

un

dat

ion

sF

ou

nd

atio

ns

183d

183d

23-S

ep-1

126

-Jun

-12

Exc

avat

e F

ou

nd

atio

nE

xcav

ate

Fo

un

dat

ion

175d

175d

23-S

ep-1

114

-Jun

-12

Po

ur

Mu

d S

lab

Po

ur

Mu

d S

lab

175d

175d

26-S

ep-1

115

-Jun

-12

Inst

all R

ebar

& A

nch

or

Bo

lts

Inst

all R

ebar

& A

nch

or

Bo

lts

177d

177d

27-S

ep-1

120

-Jun

-12

Inst

all E

mb

eds

& F

orm

Fo

un

dat

ion

sIn

stal

l Em

bed

s &

Fo

rm F

ou

nd

atio

ns

175d

175d

30-S

ep-1

121

-Jun

-12

Po

ur

Co

ncr

ete

Fo

un

dat

ion

sP

ou

r C

on

cret

e F

ou

nd

atio

ns

175d

175d

03-O

ct-1

122

-Jun

-12

Ele

ctri

cal G

rou

nd

ing

/ C

on

du

itE

lect

rica

l Gro

un

din

g /

Co

nd

uit

175d

175d

04-O

ct-1

125

-Jun

-12

Bac

kfil

l Fo

un

dat

ion

sB

ackf

ill F

ou

nd

atio

ns

175d

175d

05-O

ct-1

126

-Jun

-12

Fo

un

dat

ion

s C

ure

Tim

eF

ou

nd

atio

ns

Cu

re T

ime

179d

179d

04-O

ct-1

129

-Jun

-12

Cra

ne

Pad

sC

ran

e P

ads

175d

175d

06-O

ct-1

127

-Jun

-12

TO

WE

RS

TO

WE

RS

79d

79d

30-A

pr-

1220

-Aug

-12

WT

G D

eliv

erie

sW

TG

Del

iver

ies

53d

53d

30-A

pr-

1213

-Jul

-12

Ere

ctio

nE

rect

ion

66d

66d

05-M

ay-1

208

-Aug

-12

Inst

all B

ase/

Mid

& G

rou

tIn

stal

l Bas

e/M

id &

Gro

ut

58d

58d

05-M

ay-1

227

-Jul

-12

Mai

n E

rect

ion

(1

Cra

ne)

Mai

n E

rect

ion

(1

Cra

ne)

61d

61d

10-M

ay-1

207

-Aug

-12

Sin

gle

Bla

de

Ere

ctio

nS

ing

le B

lad

e E

rect

ion

60d

60d

14-M

ay-1

208

-Aug

-12

Mec

h /

Ele

c C

om

ple

tio

ns

Mec

h /

Ele

c C

om

ple

tio

ns

64d

64d

21-M

ay-1

220

-Aug

-12

SIT

E R

ES

TO

RA

TIO

NS

SIT

E R

ES

TO

RA

TIO

NS

1d72

d05

-Jul

-12

16-O

ct-1

2

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L IN

FA

ST

RU

CT

UR

EE

LE

CT

RIC

AL

INF

AS

TR

UC

TU

RE

200d

219d

09-S

ep-1

101

-Aug

-12

Su

bst

atio

nS

ub

stat

ion

30d

165d

09-S

ep-1

115

-May

-12

Co

llec

tio

n S

yste

mC

oll

ecti

on

Sys

tem

195d

214d

16-S

ep-1

101

-Aug

-12

12

30

12

20

12

20

11

20

01

23

01

22

01

12

00

12

20

11

20

11

23

01

22

01

12

00

12

30

12

20

11

20

01

23

01

22

01

12

00

12

30

12

20

11

20

01

22

01

12

01

12

30

Janu

ary

Feb

ruar

yM

arch

Ap

ril

May

June

July

Aug

ust

Sep

tem

ber

Oct

ober

Nov

emb

erD

ecem

ber

Janu

ary

Feb

ruar

yM

arch

Ap

ril

May

June

July

Aug

ust

Sep

tem

ber

Oct

ober

Nov

emb

erD

ecem

ber

Janu

ary

2011

2012

2013

CO

NS

UM

ER

S E

NE

RG

Y:

LAK

EW

IND

, MI (

56 W

TG

s) -

5 p

er w

k W

TG

Del

iver

ies

& 1

Mai

n C

rane

MIL

ES

TO

NE

S

Lim

ited

Not

ice

to P

roce

ed

Ful

l Not

ice

to P

roce

ed

ME

T T

ower

s C

omp

lete

Sta

rt S

ite A

cces

Rd

s &

Fou

ndat

ions

Sub

stat

ion

Com

ple

te

Mec

hani

cal C

omp

letio

n Sub

stan

tial C

omp

letio

n

Fin

al C

omp

letio

n

DE

SIG

N/A

PP

RO

VA

LS &

PR

OC

UR

EM

EN

T

ME

T T

ower

s

ME

T T

ower

Pro

cure

men

t

Civ

il &

Fou

ndat

ions

Geo

Tec

h, R

oad

s D

esig

n &

Fou

ndat

ion

Des

ign

Site

Sur

veyi

ng

Geo

tech

nica

l Inv

estig

atio

n

Civ

il D

esig

n (R

ds

& F

dns

)

Civ

il D

esig

n A

pp

rova

l

Pro

cure

men

t for

Fou

ndat

ions

Ele

ctri

cal

Ele

ctri

cal E

ngin

eeri

ng

Sub

stat

ions

Eng

inee

ring

75%

Des

ign

(Sub

stat

ion)

100%

Des

ign

(Sub

stat

ion)

Ow

ner

Rev

iew

/Ap

pro

val (

Sub

stat

ion)

Col

lect

ion

Sys

tem

& T

rans

mis

sion

Eng

inee

ring

75%

Des

ign

(Col

lect

ion/

Tra

nsm

issi

on)

100%

Des

ign

(Col

lect

ion/

Tra

nsm

issi

on)

Ow

ner

Rev

iew

/Ap

pro

val (

Col

lect

ion/

Tra

nsm

issi

on)

Ele

ctri

cal P

rocu

rem

ent

GE

NE

RA

L C

ON

DIT

ION

S

Mob

iliza

tion

Layd

own

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N

ME

T T

OW

ER

S

ME

T T

ower

Con

stru

ctio

n

CIV

IL &

FO

UN

DA

TIO

NS

Acc

ess

Roa

ds

Roa

ds

Rad

ii

Fou

ndat

ions

Exc

avat

e F

ound

atio

n

Pou

r M

ud S

lab

Inst

all R

ebar

& A

ncho

r B

olts

Inst

all E

mb

eds

& F

orm

Fou

ndat

ions

Pou

r C

oncr

ete

Fou

ndat

ions

Ele

ctri

cal G

roun

din

g /

Con

dui

t

Bac

kfill

Fou

ndat

ions

Fou

ndat

ions

Cur

e T

ime

Cra

ne P

ads

TO

WE

RS

WT

G D

eliv

erie

s

Ere

ctio

n

Inst

all B

ase/

Mid

& G

rout

Mai

n E

rect

ion

(1 C

rane

)

Sin

gle

Bla

de

Ere

ctio

n

Mec

h / E

lec

Com

ple

tions S

ITE

RE

ST

OR

AT

ION

S

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

INF

AS

TR

UC

TU

RE

Sub

stat

ion

Col

lect

ion

Sys

tem

CO

NS

UM

ER

S E

NE

RG

Y:

LA

KE

WIN

D, M

I (56

WT

Gs)

- 5

per

wk

WT

G D

eliv

erie

s 1

Mai

n C

ran

eM

ilest

on

e S

ched

ule

02-N

ov-1

0 P

rin

t D

ate

& T

ime:

02-

No

v-10

14:

59

Act

ual W

ork

Rem

aini

ng W

ork

Crit

ical

Rem

aini

ng W

ork

Mile

ston

e

Pag

e 1

of 1

D

ata

Dat

e: 1

5-F

eb-1

1


Exhibit G

*Intentionally Omitted*


Exhibit H Form of Change Order Request

1 Change Order No. X

CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER

Date: ____________, 20___ Change Order No. _____

To: <BOP EPC Contractor>

In your Balance of Plant Agreement with CONSUMERS ENERGY COMPANY dated ______________, 20____ (the “Agreement”), you are hereby authorized and directed to make the following change(s) in the Agreement:

In all other respects the terms and conditions of the Agreement remain effective. No claim for extra work or additions shall be valid in the absence of an order signed by both parties. CONSUMERS ENERGY COMPANY Accepted: <BOP EPC Contractor>

By: _________________________________ By: _________________________________

Name:

Name: _________________________________

Title: Title: _________________________________


Exhibit I



Exhibit J



Exhibit L

Form of Turbine Foundation Group Completion Certificate

EXHIBIT L FORM OF TURBINE FOUNDATION GROUP COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

(Page 1 of 2)

The undersigned, White Construction, Inc. (“Contractor”), does hereby deliver this Certificate of Turbine Foundation Group Completion (complete except for countersignature) toConsumers Energy Company, (“Owner”). Terms used and not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in that certain Balance of Plant Engineering, Procurement and Construction Agreement (“Agreement"), dated [Effective Date], by and between Owner and Contractor.

Contractor hereby certifies and represents that, with respect to [IDENTIFY APPLICABLE FOUNDATION GROUP], all of the following have been satisfied in accordance with the criteria set forth in Subsection 6.2(a) of the Agreement:

(i) each of the Turbine Foundations in such Turbine Foundation Group is mechanically completed and installed in accordance with the requirements of the Agreement;

(ii) each of the Turbine Foundations in such Turbine Foundation Group is structurally completed and grounded and ready for the installation of the Turbine, and all necessary embedded inserts for the connection to the applicable Collection System Circuit have been properly installed;

(iii) the concrete portion of each of the Turbine Foundations in such Turbine Foundation Group has set and cured so as to have achieved the minimum strength necessary to allow assembly, erection and permanent installation of the Turbine thereon;

(iv) the grounding grid for the Turbines to be installed upon each of the Turbine Foundations in such Turbine Foundation Group has been installed;

(v) all Route Improvements have been completed to the full extent necessary to allow delivery of the Turbine including all of its components to, and to otherwise provide all access necessary for the assembly, erection and permanent installation of, the Turbine at each of the Turbine Foundations in such Turbine Foundation Group, including without limitation the passage of all delivery trucks, construction vehicles, equipment and cranes;

(vi) backfilling and compaction of the area surrounding each of the Turbine Foundations in such Turbine Foundation Group has been completed; and

(vii) the crane hardstand and laydown and work areas associated with each of the Turbine Foundations in such Turbine Foundation Group have been completed in accordance with the requirements of the Agreement.

Turbine Foundation Completion Certificate

(Page 2 of 2)

The person signing below is authorized to submit this certificate to Owner for and on behalf of Contractor.

Executed this ___ day of _____________, 20__

Contractor: White Construction, Inc.

By: ____________________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________

Owner to cross through one (1) of the following statements:

A. Owner agrees that Turbine Foundation Group Completion has been achieved for the above identified Turbine Foundation Group.

B. Owner does not agree that Turbine Foundation Group Completion has been achieved for the above identified Turbine Foundation Group for the following reasons (see also attached page(s) if relevant):

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

The person signing below is authorized to sign this Turbine Foundation Completion Certificate for and on behalf of Owner.

Owner: Consumers Energy Company

By: ____________________________ Date: _________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________


Exhibit M

Form of Turbine Mechanical Completion Certificate

EXHIBIT M FORM OF TURBINE MECHANICAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

(Page 1 of 2)

The undersigned, White Construction, Inc. (“Contractor”), does hereby deliver this Certificate of Turbine Mechanical Completion (complete except for countersignature) to Consumers Energy Company (“Owner”). Terms used and not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in that certain Balance of Plant Engineering, Procurement and Construction Agreement (“Agreement"), dated [Effective Date], by and between Owner and Contractor.

Contractor hereby certifies and represents that, with respect to Turbine #______, all of the following have been satisfied in accordance with the criteria set forth in Subsection 6.5(a) of the Agreement:

(i) Turbine Foundation Completion for such Turbine has occurred;

(ii) the Turbine has been assembled, erected, and installed in accordance with the requirements of the Agreement and the Turbine Specifications;

(iii) Substation Completion has occurred and Collection System Circuit Completion has occurred with respect to the applicable Collection System Circuit;

(iv) the Turbine is ready for Energization and initial operation in a safe manner; and

(v) the Owner and Turbine Supplier have completed their agreed upon Mechanical Completion inspection and approval procedure pursuant to the terms of the Turbine Purchase Agreement and have confirmed Mechanical Completion to have occurred pursuant to the Turbine Purchase Agreement.

Turbine Mechanical Completion Certificate

(Page 2 of 2)




By: ____________________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________


A. Owner agrees that Turbine Mechanical Completion has been achieved for the above identified Turbine.

B. Owner does not agree that Turbine Mechanical Completion has been achieved for the above identified Turbine for the following reasons (see also attached page(s) if relevant):

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

The person signing below is authorized to sign this Turbine Mechanical Completion Certificate for and on behalf of Owner.


By: ____________________________ Date: _________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________


Exhibit N

Form of Substation Completion Certificate

EXHIBIT N Substation Completion Certificate

(Page 1 of 2)

The undersigned, White Construction, Inc. (“Contractor”), does hereby deliver this Substation Completion Certificate (complete except for countersignature) to Consumers Energy Company (“Owner”). Terms used and not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in that certain Balance of Plant Engineering, Procurement and Construction Agreement (“Agreement"), dated [Effective Date], by and between Owner and Contractor.

Contractor hereby certifies and represents that all of the following have been satisfied in accordance with the criteria set forth in Subsection 6.3(a) of the Agreement:

(i) all Route Improvements associated with the Collection System Substation have been completed;

(ii) the Collection System Substation is mechanically complete in accordance with the requirements of the Agreement, with all relaying, metering, communications and other equipment and systems tested;

(iii) the Transformers for the Collection System Substation are dressed out and tested;

(iv) the Collection System Substation SCADA infrastructure has been installed and tested;

(v) the Collection System Substation is capable of delivering power to the Point of Interconnection and all of the electrical energy generated by the Turbines connected, or to be connected, to the Collection System Substation;

(vi) the Collection System Substation has been successfully Energized and tested; and

(vii) all construction debris, rubbish and foreign material have been removed from the area of the Collection System Substation.




By: ____________________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________

Substation Completion Certificate (Page 2 of 2)


A. Owner agrees that Substation Completion has been achieved.

B. Owner does not agree that Substation Completion has been achieved for the following reasons (see also attached page(s) if relevant):

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

The person signing below is authorized to sign this Substation Completion Certificate for and on behalf of Owner.


By: ____________________________ Date: _________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________


Exhibit O

Form of Collection System Circuit Completion Certificate

Exhibit O Collection System Circuit Completion Certificate

(Page 1 of 2)

The undersigned, White Construction, Inc. (“Contractor”), does hereby deliver this Collection System Circuit Completion Certificate (complete except for countersignature) to Consumers Energy Company (“Owner”). Terms used and not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in that certain Balance of Plant Engineering, Procurement and Construction Agreement (“Agreement"), dated [Effective Date], by and between Owner and Contractor.

Contractor hereby certifies and represents that, with respect to Collection System Circuit #_____, all of the following have been satisfied in accordance with the criteria set forth in Subsection 6.4(a) of the Agreement:

(i) all Route Improvements associated with such Collection System Circuit have been completed;

(ii) such Collection System Circuit is complete and connected from each Turbine on such Collection System Circuit to the Collection System Substation in accordance with the detailed design drawings identified on the Deliverables List as submitted by Contractor to and approved by Owner;

(iii) the complete fiber optic network connection from each Turbine on such Collection System Circuit and the permanent metrological tower compliant with the Turbine Supplier’s SCADA requirements have been provided, installed, and tested;

(iv) fiber optic cable is in place at Tower base to enable termination by Turbine Supplier; and

(v) the Collection System Circuit has been successfully Energized and tested.


Executed this ___ day of _____________, 20____


By: ____________________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________

Collection System Circuit Completion Certificate

(Page 2 of 2)


A. Owner agrees that Collection System Circuit Completion has been achieved for the above-identified Collection System Circuit.

B. Owner does not agree that Collection System Circuit Completion has been achieved for the above-identified Collection System Circuit for the following reasons (see also attached page(s) if relevant):

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

The person signing below is authorized to sign this Collection System Circuit Completion Certificate for and on behalf of Owner.


By: ____________________________ Date: _________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________


Exhibit P

Civil Works Completion (Later)


Exhibit Q

Form of Substantial Completion Certificate

EXHIBIT Q FORM OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

(Page 1 of 2)

The undersigned, White Construction, Inc. (“Contractor”), does hereby deliver this Certificate of Substantial Completion (complete except for countersignature) to Consumers Energy Company (“Owner”). Terms used and not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in that certain Balance of Plant Engineering, Procurement and Construction Agreement (“Agreement"), dated [Effective Date], by and between Owner and Contractor.


(i) Substation Completion has been achieved;

(ii) Collection System Circuit Completion has been achieved for all Collection System Circuits;

(iii) Turbine Mechanical Completion has been achieved for all of the Turbines;

(iv) Operation and Maintenance Building Completion has been achieved [STRIKE IF OWNER DID NOT ELECT THE OPTION FOR THE OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE BUILDING PROVIDED IN EXHIBIT A TO THE AGREEMENT];

(v) the BOP is capable of delivering electric power up to the full rated capacity of the Turbines to the Point of Interconnection;

(vi) Contractor has delivered all the documents and drawings required, including but not limited to the Job Books (including Operating Manuals) and all QA/QC documentation, other than the As-Built Drawings, which shall be submitted pursuant to clause “iv.” of Subsection 2.2(b) of the Agreement;

(vii) all non-conforming QA/QC issues have been resolved in accordance with the QA/QC procedures,

(viii) the Balance of Plant and the Work have in all respects been properly constructed, installed, adjusted, successfully tested, and is complete, in a mechanically, electrically, and structurally sound manner and in accordance with the criteria set forth in Exhibit A of the Agreement, the specifications set forth in the Interconnection Requirements, the Scope of Work, the Turbine Specifications and any other requirements set forth in Agreement and can be operated and used safely;

(ix) the payment of all Delay Liquidated Damages to Owner previously invoiced pursuant to Section 8.2 of the Agreement, and

(x) the Punch List has been agreed to in writing by Contractor and Owner.

Substantial Completion Certificate

(Page 2 of 2)




By: ____________________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________


A. Owner agrees that Substantial Completion has been achieved.

B. Owner does not agree that Substantial Completion has been achieved for the following reasons (see also attached page(s) if relevant):

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

The person signing below is authorized to sign this Substantial Completion Certificate for and on behalf of Owner.


By: ____________________________ Date: _________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________


Exhibit R Form of O&M Building Completion Certificate

EXHIBIT R FORM OF OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE BUILDING COMPLETION

CERTIFICATE [To Be Used Only if Owner Elects the Option for an Operations

and Maintenance Building as provided in Exhibit A] (Page 1 of 2)

The undersigned, White Construction, Inc. (“Contractor”), does hereby deliver this Certificate of Operations and Maintenance Building Completion (complete except for countersignature) to Consumers Energy Company (“Owner”). Terms used and not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in that certain Balance of Plant Engineering, Procurement and Construction Agreement (“Agreement"), dated [Effective Date], by and between Owner and Contractor.


(i) the Operations and Maintenance Building is completed in accordance with the detailed design drawings identified on the Deliverables List as submitted by Contractor to and approved by Owner;

(ii) the complete fiber optic network connection from each Turbine, each Meteorological Tower, and the Collection System Substation to the Operations and Maintenance Building has been installed and tested;

(iii) all permanent stormwater controls associated with the Operations and Maintenance Building have been completed;

(iv) all construction debris, rubbish and foreign material have been removed from the area of the Operations and Maintenance Building;

(v) all access roads and parking areas for the Operations and Maintenance Building are complete;

(vi) the county (or other applicable Governmental Authority having jurisdiction) has issued an Occupancy Permit for the Operations and Maintenance Building.


Executed this ___ day of _____________, 20____


By: ____________________________

Name: ____________________________

Title: ____________________________

Operations and Maintenance Building Completion Certificate (Page 2 of 2)


A. Owner agrees that Operations and Maintenance Building Completion has been achieved. B. Owner does not agree that Operations and Maintenance Building Completion has been achieved for the following reasons (see also attached page(s) if relevant):

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

The person signing below is authorized to sign this Operations and Maintenance Building Completion Certificate for and on behalf of Owner.


By: ____________________________ Date: _________________

Name: ____________________________

TITLE: _______________________


Exhibit S

Insurance Requirements

11/10/2010

EXHIBIT S INSURANCE REQUIREMENT

1.01 Insurance Summary

(a) The provisions in this Exhibit S shall in no way be interpreted as relieving any Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier of any responsibility under this Agreement or any Subcontract or purchase order. Such provisions are solely intended to identify the insurance coverages required by Owner and Contractor and are not intended (and shall not be construed) to constitute directions as to the means, methods, construction techniques, safety measures or other procedures to be employed by Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier in connection with the performance of the Work.

(b) Contractor shall procure and maintain and pay at its own expense the insurance coverages set forth in this Exhibit S (except for those coverages in Section 2.01 hereof) with carriers that have an A.M. Best Company rating of at least “A-” and a financial size category of Class IX or better.

(c) Contractor shall provide the Owner with written notification immediately upon the Contractor’s receipt

of notice of cancellation of any Contractor required insurance. (d) Contractor may carry, at its own expense, any additional insurance as they deem necessary or desirable. (e) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assure that Subcontractors and Suppliers are adequately

insured at all times. (f) If Contractor fails to procure, maintain or provide acceptable evidence of any insurance required to be

procured and maintained by Contractor hereunder or fails to perform any other obligation under this Exhibit S, then Owner may pursue all available remedies under Article [14] of this Agreement.

1.02 Contractor Required Insurance Contractor shall, at a minimum, provide the insurance coverage specified below through primary insurance policies or a combination of both primary and excess or umbrella liability policies. Without limiting the Contractor’s liabilities under or arising from this Agreement, it is expressly understood that all deductibles or self-insured retentions for Contractor procured policies shall be for the account of Contractor and shall not be reimbursable by the Owner.

(a) Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability. Prior to the commencement of Work under this Agreement and continuing through the Warranty Period, Workers’ Compensation insurance in full compliance with the workers’ compensation and occupational disease laws of all authorities (both State and Federal) having jurisdiction in the State of Michigan and all other locations in which Work is performed, with Coverage A in statutory limits and Coverage B Employer’s Liability with limits of $1,000,000 each Accident for Bodily Injury by Accident, $1,000,000 Policy Limit for Bodily Injury by Disease and $1,000,000 each Employee for Bodily Injury by Disease. (b) Commercial General Liability. Prior to the commencement of any Work and continuing through the Warranty Period, Commercial General Liability insurance on an “occurrence” basis for all operations. The policy shall include liability coverage for bodily injury, property damage and personal injury for all work performed under this Agreement, including products and completed operations,

11/10/2010

premises and operations, contractual liability, independent contractor’s exposure, explosion, collapse and underground property damage hazards, and include limits of not less than $2,000,000 Each Occurrence Limit, $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury Limit, $2,000,000 Products and Completed Operations. The Commercial General Liability coverage shall be project-specific policies, or project-dedicated limits, or not be subjected to general aggregate limits to avoid erosion of limit by the addition of any other entity or project that is not directly related to the performance of Contractor’s obligations under this Agreement. (c) Automobile Liability Insurance. Prior to the commencement of any Work and continuing through the Warranty Period, Automobile Liability insurance covering all owned, hired and non-owned automobiles, trucks and trailers of Contractor with coverage not less than that of the commercial Business Auto Policy and limits not less than $1,000,000 combined single limit each occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. (d) Excess/Umbrella Liability Insurance. Prior to the commencement of any Work and continuing through the Warranty Period, Excess/Umbrella Liability insurance in the amount of $10,000,000 each occurrence and $10,000,000 annual aggregate. Such coverage shall be excess/umbrella over the required Commercial General Liability, Automobile Liability and Employers’ Liability.

(e) Contractor Property and Equipment. Contractor at its option shall be responsible for insuring all Contractor’s tools and equipment including temporary plants, scaffolding, false works, and all owned, leased, rented or borrowed tools and equipment. (f) Aviation and/or Marine Liability. If aircraft or watercraft of any kind is used in the performance of the Work, Contractor shall maintain or cause the operator of the aircraft or watercraft to maintain aircraft/watercraft public liability insurance, including bodily injury, property damage and passenger liability, as respects any aircraft/watercraft owned, used, operated or hired in connection with the performance of the Work in limits of not less than $10,000,000 combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage in any one occurrence.

(g) Engineering & Design Professional Liability. Professional Liability insurance covering liability for claims alleging an act, error, or omission in the providing of engineering and design services including, but not limited to, bodily injury and property damage, if not part of the commercial general liability policy, and other types of losses. Limits shall be no less than $2,000,000 each claim and the policy shall be maintained for two (2) years following Final Completion of the Work.

(h) Pollution Legal Liability. Liability insurance covering liability for collecting, handling, storing and removing from all Job Sites, other Work areas, and areas adjacent thereto, and for properly disposing of, Hazardous Material brought onto any Job Sites or other Work areas by Contractor, its personnel, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Limits shall be no less than $500,000 each occurrence and the policy shall be maintained for two (2) years following Final Completion of the Work.

Each policy of insurance set forth in this Section 1.02, unless otherwise noted, shall contain the following provisions:

(1) Waiver of Subrogation. Each policy shall contain a waiver of subrogation in favor of Owner, its engineers, and other Persons as Owner may require, their agents, representatives, partners, affiliates, successors and assigns and each of their respective officers, directors and employees (2) Additional Insureds. The Commercial General Liability, Automobile Liability, Excess/Umbrella Liability, Aviation and/or Marine Liability and Pollution Legal Liability insurance policies shall insure as additional insureds the following: Owner, and its engineers, and other Persons as

11/10/2010

Owner may require, their agents, representatives, partners, affiliates, successors and assigns and each of their respective officers, directors and employees for their liability, including their vicarious liability, arising out of the work under this Agreement. (3) Primary Insurance. The Commercial General Liability, Automobile Liability, Excess/Umbrella Liability, Aviation and/or Marine Liability and Pollution Legal Liability insurance policies shall contain language that such insurance coverage shall be primary with respect to the interests of Owner its engineers, and other Persons as Owner may require, their agents, representatives, partners, affiliates, successors and assigns and each of their respective officers, directors and employees and that any insurance which may be procured, maintained by or on behalf of Owner, and other Persons as Owner may require, their agents, representatives, partners, affiliates, successors and assigns and each of their respective officers, directors and employees shall be in excess and not contributory to such policies. (4) Separation of Insureds. The Commercial General Liability, Automobile Liability, Excess/Umbrella Liability, Aviation and/or Marine and Pollution Legal Liability insurance policies shall contain wording such that the insurance afforded by the policy shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to limits of insurance.

1.03 Certificates of Insurance

Contractor shall provide, or cause to be provided, to Owner (and any other Persons that Owner may designate in a written notice to Contractor) Certificates of Insurance for all insurance required to be procured and maintained by Contractor under this Exhibit S, in form and substance acceptable to Owner, evidencing the insurance and endorsements required hereunder. Such Certificates of Insurance for Contractor provided insurance shall be provided (a) fifteen (15) Business Days prior to the commencement of any Work activities and (b) on each issuance anniversary while such insurance is in effect. Such Certificates of Insurance shall be sent to the Owner at: Consumers Energy Company Attn: Insurance Risk Management Department, EP7-415 One Energy Plaza Jackson, MI 49201-2276 FAX: 517-788-1693 EMAIL: [email protected] 1.04 Subcontractor and Supplier Insurance

(a) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that its Subcontractors and Suppliers are adequately insured at all times, including but not limited to, the maintenance of workers’ compensation insurance, in accordance with all applicable State and Federal laws.

(b) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that its Subcontractors’ and

Suppliers’ insurance policies contain a waiver of the insurers’ rights of subrogation against the following: Owner, and its engineers, and other Persons as Owner may require, their agents, representatives, partners, affiliates, successors and assigns and each of their respective officers, directors and employees.

(c) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that its Subcontractors’ and

Suppliers’ commercial general liability insurance policy insures as additional insured the following: Owner, and its engineers, and other Persons as Owner may require, their

mailto:[email protected]�

11/10/2010

agents, representatives, partners, affiliates, successors and assigns and each of their respective officers, directors and employees for their liability, including their vicarious liability, arising out of the work under this Agreement.

2.01 Owner Required Insurance Owner shall procure and maintain the insurance coverages set forth below in Section 2.01 of this Exhibit S.

(a) The Owner will carry Builder's Risk Insurance covering the Owner’s and the Contractor's respective insurable interests in the equipment and materials at the Job Sites or other work locations that are intended to be permanently incorporated into the BOP. Said Builder's Risk Insurance shall be subject to terms, conditions, limitations and exclusions of the policy; a copy of which policy (without premium pricing) shall be furnished to the Contractor upon request or be made available for review by the Contractor at the offices of the Owner. Said Builder's Risk Insurance will also be subject to a deducible of not more than $50,000 per occurrence. Said Builder's Risk Insurance will contain a waiver of subrogation in favor of the Contractor and its Subcontractors;

(b) To the extent that loss or damage for which the Contractor is responsible under Section 12.2 of

the Agreement exceeds the deductible under, and is otherwise within the scope of coverage of, the Builder's Risk Insurance maintained by the Owner pursuant to the immediately preceding subparagraph (a), it is understood that the Contractor, in regard to fulfilling its obligations under said Section 12.2, will be entitled to the benefit of any proceeds received from the insurer under such policy in respect to said loss or damage.

2.02 Providing Information To the extent such disclosure is within its control, Contractor shall ensure that full disclosure of the following is made to Owner and those insurers providing insurance coverage which is required to be taken out and maintained pursuant to this Agreement, provided such information is necessary for such insurers to provide such insurance coverage:

(a) all reasonable information which the insurers specifically request to be disclosed; (b) all reasonable information which is of a type which insurance brokers in relation to the relevant

policy advise in writing should be disclosed to the insurers; and (c) all other information which Owner, acting in accordance with Prudent Industry Practices, could

reasonably consider to be significant to the relevant insurance coverage, which shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing shipping information.


Exhibit T

Guaranteed Completion Dates

Page 1 of 2Bid Issue

July 23, 2010

Guaranteed Turbine Foundation Group Completion Dates:

First 5 Turbines 30-Apr-2012Next 5 Turbines 7-May-2012Next 5 Turbines 14-May-2012Next 5 Turbines 21-May-2012Next 5 Turbines 28-May-2012Next 5 Turbines 4-Jun-2012Next 5 Turbines 11-Jun-2012Next 5 Turbines 18-Jun-2012Next 5 Turbines 25-Jun-2012Next 5 Turbines 2-Jul-2012Last 6 Turbines 9-Jul-2012

Guaranteed Substation Completion Date: 15-May-2012

Collection System Circuit No.Guaranteed Collection System Circuit

Completion Date *Collection System Circuit No. 1 15-May-12Collection System Circuit No. 2 29-May-12Collection System Circuit No. 3 12-Jun-12Collection System Circuit No. 4 26-Jun-12Collection System Circuit No. 5 11-Jul-12

TurbineGuaranteed Turbine Mechanical Completion

Date *Each of the First 5 Turbines 11-Jun-12Each of the Next 5 Turbines 19-Jun-12Each of the Next 5 Turbines 25-Jun-12Each of the Next 5 Turbines 2-Jul-12Each of the Next 5 Turbines 10-Jul-12Each of the Next 5 Turbines 16-Jul-12Each of the Next 5 Turbines 23-Jul-12Each of the Next 5 Turbines 30-Jul-12Each of the Next 5 Turbines 6-Aug-12Each of the Next 5 Turbines 13-Aug-12Each of the Last 6 Turbines 20-Aug-12

EXHIBIT T GUARANTEED COMPLETION DATES

In the event the ten (10) Turbine delivery schedule is utilized between Owner and Turbine Supplier, then the Guaranteed Collection System Circuit Completion dates shall be revised accordingly in writing between Owner and Contractor.

In the event the ten (10) Turbine delivery schedule is utilized between Owner and Turbine Supplier, then the Guaranteed Turbine Mechanical Completion dates shall be revised accordingly in writing between Owner and Contractor.

* Listed dates correspond to 5 Turbine per week delivery schedule between Owner and Turbine Supplier.

* Listed dates correspond to 5 Turbine per week delivery schedule between Owner and Turbine Supplier.

Page 2 of 2Bid Issue

July 23, 2010

Guaranteed Operations and Maintenance Building Completion Date (if this option is elected by the Owner): 31-Aug-2012


Exhibit U-1 Records Format – Retirement Units Format Example

Page 1 of 1 Final

Consumers Energy Lake Winds Energy Park

Balance of Plant Retirement Units Format Example

Exhibit U-1 PPM Group Unit of Township/ Size/ Method of Identification Estimated (Plant Account) PPM Unit Description Measure Range/Section Quantity Type Vendor/Make/Model Serial No. Company No. Cost 341.000 Control house – structure complete 1 1,000 Control house – foundation Sq ft 20’x40’ 2,000 344.000 Tower Foundation Sq Ft Note (1) 3,000 344.000 Gearbox braking system assembly 1 Note (1) 4,000 Gearbox heating and cooling sys assembly 1 Note (1) 5,000 344.000 Generator – rotor shaft assembly 1 XN5555 Note (1) 6,000 Generator – windings complete Note (1) 7,000 Generator – cathodic protection assembly 1 Note (1) 7,000 344.000 SCADA – software complete 1 8,000 SCADA – fiber optic cable linear ft 9,000 345.000 Battery charging set or motor Generator assembly 1 Note (1) 1,500 Fire extinguisher system complete 1 Note (1) 2,500 Underground collection cable linear ft 3,500 346.000 Air compressor complete 1 Note (1) 4,500 Note (1): Each tower, wind turbine generator, associated equipment, and foundation should have a related identifying number.


Exhibit U-2

Records Format – Policy and Process Manual

Page 1 of 9 Final

PPoolliiccyy aanndd PPrroocceessss MMaannuuaall EExxhhiibbiitt UU--22

Effective Date: 03/16/2010 Category: 5 Manage Accounting and Control Data Subject: 5.4 Perform Fixed Asset Accounting Document Type: Process Sox Control: No Process Number: 5.4.112 Process Title: List of Retirement Units for Other Production - Wind Turbine Generators Version Number: 1 Change Abstract: No change to Company policy. This is a revised process to include new retirement units. Process Policy Statement: List of Retirement Units for Other Production – Wind Turbine Generators Process Description:

OTHER PRODUCTION – WIND TURBINE GENERATORS

List of Retirement Units

The following shall be general retirement units and are includable in any of the plant accounts for Other Production – Wind Turbine Generators:

Control installation: automatic, semiautomatic or remote

Coupling device: speed reducer, speed increaser, clutch

Driving unit: prime mover, motor, engine, 10 HP or greater

Foundation: for a unit or item of equipment

Housing: if major, nonintegral enclosure that covers a piece of equipment. If integral to a piece of equipment, include with its equipment

Insulation: 100 square feet or more on a duct between two retirement units, or all insulation on a retirement unit.

Recording or indicating device, costing over $1,000 installed

Tank Tank liner, complete

Page 2 of 9 Final

340.000 LAND AND LAND RIGHTS 340.100 LAND All land, owned by the Company, on which "Other" production plant

is located. 340.200 RIGHTS OF WAY All land rights, including easements, obtained by the Company for

use in connection with the operation of an "Other" production plant. 341.000 STRUCTURES AND IMPROVEMENTS - OTHER PRODUCTION PLANT A. BUILDING OR MAJOR COMPONENTS Building, complete (used to house, support, or safeguard property or

persons, including all fixtures permanently attached) Air conditioning or ventilating system a. Chiller b. Compressor c. Cooler d. Driving unit e. Roof mounted ventilating fan f. Tank

Boiler, furnace, piping, wiring, fixtures, and machinery for heating Cabling, entire building a. Telephone b. Computers Compressed air system a. Air compressor b. Cooler c. Driving unit d. Dryer e. Receiver Dock, receiving and shipping (include with building) Electrical system a. Control panel, complete b. Lighting systems

c. Switchgear d. Transformer

Page 3 of 9 Final

Fire protection system and equipment a. Fire suppression system (hoses and sprinklers, complete building) b. Fire detection system (smoke and heat sensors) c. Fire annunciation system Heating system

Intrasite communication system Partitions, including movable office units Platforms, railings, and gratings when constructed as part of a structure Plumbing system Roof, each level Security system Water basin or reservoir

Water improvement and dock facilities B. YARD IMPROVEMENTS Bridge or trestle Carport or truck port Crane or hoist (separate from building) Curbs and gutters Culvert Electric, gas or water services Fencing Flag pole Gate Gate opener, motor operated Guard posts, rail and parking bumpers Landscaping Parking facilities Retaining wall Roads or driveways

Page 4 of 9 Final

Sanitary sewer system Scrap or storage bins Sidewalks Sign with Company name Storage rack Transformer vault Well Yard drainage system Yard lighting system 342.000 FUEL HOLDERS, PRODUCERS AND ACCESSORIES

(Not Used - See Account 344.000, Generators) 343.000 PRIME MOVERS - OTHER (Not Used - See Account 344.000, Generators) 344.000 GENERATORS

Anemometer, Wind Vane, and Lightning Rod

a. Anemometer, includes built-in heaters, controls and display b. Wind vane, Includes built-in heaters, controls and display

Brake System

a. Turbine mechanical brake system. (emergency-stops and rotation

prevention) Corrosion protection equipment and system Equipment Cooling

a. Air-based cooling systems (not water, glycol, or oil based) for main Turbine components (generator system, gearbox, hydraulic system, GSU transformer system)

Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Lighting

a. FAA turbine obstruction lighting – complete (includes fixtures, lamps,

mounting brackets and hardware; flashing lights capable of being synchronized with other FAA lighting systems on other Turbines.)

Page 5 of 9 Final

Fire Protection

a. Turbine fire protection system – complete, includes detection and suppression system, heat sensors and/or smoke detectors and alarms

Gearbox

a. Braking system (emergency-stops and rotation prevention) b. Gearbox heating and cooling system c. Bearings and gears

Generator

a. Rotor shaft b. Windings – complete c. Stator windings – complete d. Lead bushings – complete e. Generator step-up (GSU) transformer f. Cathodic protection equipment g. Speed governing, control and feedback equipment

Hub

a. Complete unit (Includes material, connections, and access hatch)

Lightning Protection System

Lubrication Systems

a. Accumulator b. Cooler c. Oil lubricating equipment d. Pump e. Purifier or filter f. Tank

Nacelle

a. Complete weatherproof enclosure b. Lighting, indoor, outdoor or emergency lighting including sensors c. Rotating parts safety guards d. Hatch access to blades, hub, or roof e. Roof fall protection tie-offs f. Nacelle heating, ventilation and cooling system g. Nacelle hoist or crane h. Hoist controller located, in both nacelle and remote control i. Crane, including disconnect switches j. Sound-insulating and silencers

Rotor and Blades

a. Main rotor shaft and coupling b. Generator/converter torque control c. Bearing Systems, used in turbine

Page 6 of 9 Final

d. Each set of blades, which attach to hub e. Blade pitch drives and controllers f. Turbine overspeed control, manual and automatic g. Tie-offs for rotor and blade

SCADA System (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System)

a. Including software, hardware, and any required licensing. (Does not include long-term maintenance support.)

b. Load break switch, including lock-out capability

Service Lift

a. Turbine tower service lift from base of tower to nacelle, minimum capacity of 1,000 pounds.

Tower

a. Tubular steel tower - complete, not individual sections (which rise above

the tower foundation interface and supports the turbine.) b. Steel door at base of the tower c. Door card access system. d. Tower interior stairs, including hand-rails, permanently fastened to

Turbine tower and/or foundation. (Constructed of galvanized steel) e. Tower interior service platforms, including hand-rails, permanently

fastened to Turbine structure. (Constructed of galvanized steel) f. Internal ladder fall arresting safety system (No external ladders) g. Interior lighting, complete from base of tower to tower top h. Emergency egress system (should tower lift and ladder become

unusable) Turbine Control System

a. Individual Turbines controls. (Turbine farm capable of being controlled automatically or manually from the control system interface at substation, Operation and Maintenance building, or other location.)

b. Braking system

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

a. UPS system, including lead acid batteries and vent for UPS located

Yaw System

a. Turbine active yaw control system b. Yaw drives (electric or hydraulic motor drives) c. Turbine yaw brake system (emergency-stops and rotation prevention)

345.000 ACCESSORY ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT Battery charging set or motor generator Control alarm system

Page 7 of 9 Final

Equipment fences and enclosures Fan or blower Fire extinguishing system Frequency changer Frequency control system Fuse mounting and fuse, 22 kV and higher Generator voltage regulator system Induction regulator Inverter Load Control Center Metal-clad or cubicle switchgear Motor Control Center Oil circuit breaker or recloser Oil tank Oscillograph Panel or panels devoted to a single purpose with electric equipment accessory Reactor or resistor Rectifier Static condensers, set or bank of Storage battery (station control) Supervisory control equipment Switches, 22 kV and higher, or group operated Testing equipment Tower (non wind turbine) Transformer, not accessory to a panel, including station power Truck switch with wiring and instruments Wave trap, carrier current

Page 8 of 9 Final

Wiring and bus - power a. Bus and compartment, including integral cubicles for equipment b. Bus - wires, cables and insulators c. Cable or conductor, each continuous circuit run

d. Circuit of generator leads to a bus, including supports and protective barriers

e. Multiple conduit run between two or more retirement units f. Outgoing feeder or auxiliary power feeder, including its individual conduit,

supports and barriers

346.000 MISCELLANEOUS POWER PLANT EQUIPMENT A minimum cost of $1,000 per item applies to all equipment in this account. Air compressor Air-conditioning or ventilating system Audio-visual equipment Benders Communication system Comparator (switch comparing two voltages) Crane, hoist or derrick (platform truck, tractor, yard truck) Exercise equipment Fire protection equipment First-aid equipment Furniture and office equipment Kitchen equipment (range, freezer, dishwasher, etc) Laboratory equipment Meteorological and hydrological equipment Painting and coating equipment Pump, portable (sump, drain, miscellaneous) Safety and rescue equipment Storeroom equipment

Tool, each principal item such as forge, lathe, drill press, steam hammer, welding

equipment, etc

Page 9 of 9 Final

NOTE: If any of the plant units listed above are a part of structure, and

includable in account "Structures and Improvements," they shall be accounted for through that account.

Additional Information & Attachments


Exhibit V

Form of Job Book

Turn Over Package Table of Contents

March 2010 Form Number: WCQA.282.05 Page 1

Turn Over Package

Table of Contents

The following list of documents will be included in the final turn over packages. The documents will be the original documents completed on-site by the Quality Manager or his or her representative. One package will be completed for each turbine location for a total of : unless otherwise stated in the contractual agreement. Each Item in bold will be a separate heading and contain the subsidiary documents.

Project: Project Number:

TAB 1 Civil Inspection Reports Project Applicable Form Modified

1.1 Field Tile Repair Report (Exhibit 10.0) YES NO YES NO 1.2 Road Installation Survey (Exhibit 10.1) YES NO YES NO 1.3 Crane Pad/Truck Turnaround (Exhibit 10.2) YES NO YES NO 1.4 Exploratory Trench Inspection Report (Exhibit 10.3) YES NO YES NO 1.5 Final Access Road Proof Roll YES NO YES NO 1.6 Crane Pad Inspection/Proof Roll (3rd party) YES NO YES NO 1.7 Crane Pad Pre-Lift Inspection Report (Exhibit 11.1) YES NO YES NO 1.8 YES NO YES NO

TAB 2 Foundation Inspection Reports Project Applicable Form Modified

2.1 Proof Roll Inspection Report (3rd Party) YES NO YES NO 2.2 Undercut information (if applicable) YES NO YES NO 2.3 Geotechnical Information (Foundation Bearing Test Reports) YES NO YES NO 2.4 Concrete Mud Slab Pre-Placement Inspection (Exhibit 10.5) YES NO YES NO 2.5 Copy of concrete mud slab tickets YES NO YES NO 2.6 Concrete Foundation Pre-Placement Inspection (Exhibit 10.6) YES NO YES NO 2.7 Corrugated Metal Pre-Placement Inspection (Exhibit 10.7) YES NO YES NO 2.8 Concrete Foundation Placement Control Form (Exhibit 10.8) YES NO YES NO 2.9 Concrete Pedestal Form Placement Inspection (Exhibit 10.9) YES NO YES NO 2.10 Embedded Plate Placement Inspection Form (Exhibit 10.10) YES NO YES NO 2.11 Anchor Bolt Projection Verification Inspection Report (Exhibit 10.11) YES NO YES NO 2.12 Post Pour Inspection Report (Exhibit 10.12) YES NO YES NO 2.13 Form of Foundation Completion Certificate (Exhibit 10.16) YES NO YES NO 2.14 Form of Reclamation Completion Certificate (Exhibit 10.17) YES NO YES NO 2.15 Record of Property Inspection (Exhibit 10.18) YES NO YES NO



TAB 3 Mill Certificates Project Applicable Form Modified

3.1 Rebar Mill Certificates YES NO YES NO 3.2 Embedded Plate Certificate YES NO YES NO 3.3 Anchor Bolt Certificates YES NO YES NO 3.4 YES NO YES NO

TAB 4 Concrete Foundation Tickets (3rd Party) Project Applicable Form Modified

4.1 Concrete Foundation Test Results: 3, 7, 14, & 28 day strength reports (3rd Party)

YES NO YES NO

YES NO YES NO

TAB 5 Backfill/Compaction Project Applicable Form Modified

5.1 Backfill Foundation Inspection Report (Exhibit 10.15) YES NO YES NO 5.2 3rd Party Compaction reports YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO

TAB 6 Grout Project Applicable Form Modified

6.1 Epoxy Grout Inspection Checklist (Exhibit 11.4) YES NO YES NO 6.2 3rd Party Grout Test Results YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO

TAB 7 Receiving Inspection Reports (Client Supplied) Project Applicable Form Modified

7.1 Receiving Inspection Report Log (8.1) YES NO YES NO 7.2 Receiving Inspection Report for Parts Shipped Loose (8.2) YES NO YES NO 7.3 Blade Receiving Inspection Report (Exhibit 8.3) YES NO YES NO 7.4 Hub Receiving Inspection Report (Exhibit 8.4) YES NO YES NO 7.5 Nacelle Receiving Inspection Report (Exhibit 8.5) YES NO YES NO 7.6 Control Console Receiving Inspection Report (Exhibit 8.6) YES NO YES NO 7.7 Tower Section Receiving Inspection Report (Exhibit 8.7) YES NO YES NO 7.8 Over Short & Damage Log (Exhibit 8.8) YES NO YES NO 7.9 Missing Component Sheet (Exhibit 8.9) YES NO YES NO 7.10 YES NO YES NO

YES NO YES NO



TAB 8 Joint Control Sheets Project Applicable Form Modified

8.1 Base Setting Completion Form (Exhibit 11.6) YES NO YES NO 8.2 Base Tensioning (Exhibit 9.1) YES NO YES NO 8.3 Tower Section Connection (Exhibit 9.1) YES NO YES NO 8.4 Rotor to main shaft Connection (Exhibit 9.1) YES NO YES NO 8.5 Blade to Rotor Connection (Exhibit 9.1.1) YES NO YES NO

TAB 9 Completion Certificates Project Applicable Form Modified

9.1 Mechanical Completion Certificates (Client Supplied))* YES NO YES NO 9.2 Completed Punch List Certificate * YES NO YES NO 9.3 Installation Check List* YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO *The above items may be in copied form if original documents are required to be handed over at the time of completion to commission the turbine.

TAB 10 Photos Project Applicable Form Modified

10.1 Various Site Photos YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO

Supportive Documentation

The following list of documents will be included in the final turn over packages. The documents will be the original documents completed on-site by the Quality Manager or his or her representative. Each of the following documents will be housed in a single job binder unless otherwise stated in the contractual agreement. Each Item in bold will be a separate heading and contain the subsidiary documents.

1. Acknowledgement of Document Turnover Packages (Exhibit 17.1) 2. Erosion Control Inspection Report (Exhibit 10.4) 3. Concrete Pre-Pour Comprehensive Strength Verification Report (Exhibit 10.13) 4. Concrete Test Result Log (Exhibit 10.14) 5. Grout Pre-Pour Comprehensive Strength Verification Report (Exhibit 11.2) 6. Grout Result Log (Exhibit 11.3) 7. Audits 8. Inspection & Test Plan (ITP) (Exhibit 15.1) 9. Third Party Quality Control Plans



9.1. Copy of Concrete Supplier Quality Control Plan 9.2. Batch Plant Inspections (Exhibit 10.19) 9.3. Copy of Third Party Testing Agency Certifications 9.4. Copy of Sub-contractors Quality Control Plan

Calibration & Test Equipment

The following documents will be included in the final turn over packages. The documents will be an electronic original completed on-site by the Quality Manager or his or her representative. Each of the following documents will be housed in one job binder and labeled “Calibration Log” unless otherwise stated in the contractual agreement. Each Item in bold will be a separate heading and contain the subsidiary documents.

1. Hand Wrenches 1.1. Hand Wrench Daily Calibration Verification Log (Exhibit 9.4) 1.2. Out of Tolerance Evaluation of Torque Wrenches (Exhibit 14.2)

2. Electric/Hydraulic Wrenches 2.1. E-Rad Daily Calibration Verification Log (Exhibit 9.4.1) 2.2. Hydraulic Daily Calibration Verification Log (Exhibit 9.4.2) 2.3. Out of Tolerance Evaluation of Tooling (Exhibit 14.2)

3. Electrical Equipment 3.1. Pump & Crimper Verification Log (Exhibit 12.6)

4. Base Tensioning 4.1. KIP Verification Form (Exhibit 9.2)

5. Certificates 5.1. Measuring and Test Equipment Calibration Log (Exhibit 14.1) 5.2. Calibration Tooling Certificates

Electrical Reporting

The following documents will be included in the final turn over packages. The documents will be an electronic original completed on-site by the Electrical Manager or his or her representative. Each of the following documents may be housed in a single job binder for each turbine or separate binders can be prepared and labeled unless otherwise stated in the contractual agreement. Each Item may or may not be included as part of the final turnover package depending upon contract specifications.

Electrical Checklists Project Applicable Form Modified

1.1 Wire/Cable Installation Checklist (Exhibit 12.1) YES NO YES NO 1.2 Transformer Completion Certificate (Exhibit 12.2) YES NO YES NO



1.3 Meggar Sheet (Exhibit 12.3) YES NO YES NO 1.4 Collection System Cable Inst. Checklist (Exhibit 12.4) YES NO YES NO 1.5 Cable Installation Log (Exhibit 12.5) YES NO YES NO 1.7 Phase Voltage and Rotation Test Report (Exhibit 12.7) YES NO YES NO 1.8 Junction Box Inspection (Exhibit 12.8) YES NO YES NO 1.9 WTG Ground Inspection (Exhibit 12.9) YES NO YES NO 1.10 Field Tile Repair Report (Exhibit 10.0) YES NO YES NO 1.11 Related Construction Photos YES NO YES NO

RFI & RFI Log

The following documents will be included in the final turn over packages. Each of the following documents will be housed in a single job binder and labeled “FRI & Log” unless otherwise stated in the contractual agreement. Each Item in bold will be a separate heading and contain the subsidiary documents.

1. RFI (Request For Information) (Exhibit 5.1) 2. RFI Log (Exhibit 5.2)

Letter of Transmittal & Log

The following documents will be included in the final turn over packages. Each of the following documents will be housed in a single job binder and labeled “Letter of Transmittal & Log” unless otherwise stated in the contractual agreement. Each Item in bold will be a separate heading and contain the subsidiary documents.

1. Letter of Transmittal (LOT) (Exhibit 7.1) 2. Letter of Transmittal Log (Exhibit 5.2)

QA/QC Surveillance Report Log

The following documents will be included in the final turn over packages. The documents will be an electronic original completed on-site by the Quality Manager according to the terms and specifications listed in the Field Quality Control Plan For The Installation of Land-Based Wind Turbines. Each of the following documents will be housed in one job binder and labeled “QA/QC Surveillance Report Log” unless otherwise stated in the contractual agreement. Each Item in bold will be a separate heading and contain the subsidiary documents.

1. Daily Surveillance Reports (Exhibit 18.3) 2. QC Surveillance Reports Log (Exhibit 18.4)



NCR & Corrective and Preventative Action Log

The following documents will be included in the final turn over packages. The documents will be an electronic original completed on-site by the Quality Manager or his or her representative. Each of the following documents will be housed in one job binder and labeled “NCR & Corrective and Preventative Action Log” unless otherwise stated in the contractual agreement. Each Item in bold will be a separate heading and contain the subsidiary documents.

1. Non Conformance Report (Exhibit 16.1) 2. Non Conformance (NCR) Log (Exhibit 16.2) 3. Corrective and Preventative Action Report (Exhibit 18.1) 4. Corrective and Preventative Action Tracking Log (Exhibit 18.2)


Exhibit W-1

CSS 734 Partial Unconditional Waiver

Form 734 12-2000

PARTIAL UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER I/We have a contract with (Other Contracting Party) to provide for the improvement to the property described as and hereby waive my/our

construction lien to the amount of $ for labor/materials provided through .

This waiver, together with all previous waivers, if any, does/does not cover all amounts due to me/us

for contract improvement provided through the date shown above.

Signed on (Date) (Signature of Lien Claimant) Address:

Telephone:

DO NOT SIGN BLANK OR INCOMPLETE FORMS. RETAIN A COPY.


Exhibit W-2

CSS 735 Full Unconditional Waiver

Form 735 12-82

FULL UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER

My/our contract with to (Other contracting party) provide for the improvement of the property described as Having been fully paid and satisfied, all my/our lien rights against such property are hereby waived and released. Signed on (Date) (Signature of lien claimant) Address Telephone

DO NOT SIGN BLANK OR INCOMPLETE FORMS. RETAIN A COPY.


Exhibit W-3

CSS 0651A – Vendor Payment Financial EDI Transactions

CSS FORM 0651A VENDOR PAYMENT - FINANCIAL EDI TRANSACTIONS

CSS Form 0651A 9-2009 Page 1 of 2

This Agreement is made as of November 10, 2010, by and between CONSUMERS ENERGY COMPANY, a Michigan corporation, One Energy Plaza, Jackson, Michigan, 49201 (“Buyer”) and White Construction Inc., , , (“Seller”). The Seller agrees to have the Buyer initiate Credit Entries to its account specified below ("the Account") in payment of obligations owed by the Buyer to the Seller pursuant to the terms of this Attachment and the rules relating to Corporate Trade Exchange entries (the "Rules") of the National Automated Clearing House Association and the Buyer is willing to initiate such Credit Entries on the terms set forth herein. Payments of obligations owed to the Seller by the Buyer will be made from the Buyer's Accounts Payable Department in Jackson, Michigan. Seller's Account Financial Institution: The Private Bank___________ Account Number: 2196289 _________________ Bank Office Location: Chicago, Illinois Bank Routing Number: 071-006-486 _____________ Federal Tax I.D. Number: 35-1111003 SELLER / VENDOR There are new processing requirements for electronic vendor payments that are being sent to a financial institution outside of the United States. If our payments to you are being forwarded from a U.S. financial institution to a financial institution in another country, please indicate below.

IAT DIRECT DEPOSIT INFORMATION REQUEST

Declaration – U.S. law requires that the following information be obtained for all direct deposit (ACH) transactions

Will the payment that is made via direct deposit pursuant to this Authorization be forwarded across the U.S. border to a foreign bank or financial institution through the ACH network?

No Yes*

*If “Yes”, only Wire payments will be allowed.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

1. DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise defined herein, capitalized terms shall have the meanings provided in the Rules.

2. NOTICES Any written notice or other written communication required or permitted to be given under this Attachment shall be delivered, or sent by United States certified or registered mail, postage prepaid, to the parties at the addresses stated below:

To Buyer: To Seller: CONSUMERS ENERGY COMPANY White Construction, Inc._____ Accounts Payable Department, 9th Floor P.O. Box 249 One Energy Plaza Clinton, IN 47842 Jackson, Michigan 49201 _________________________ 517-788-7229 _________________________ Unless another address is substituted by notice delivered or sent as provided herein. Any such notice shall be deemed given when so delivered or sent.



3. E-MAIL PAYMENT NOTIFICATION SERVICE (Optional)

Contact Name: Tracy Gelb E-mail Address [email protected]

4. AUTHORIZATION Subject to the terms set forth below, the Seller authorizes the Buyer to initiate Credit Entries to the Account in accordance with the Rules for amounts owed by the Buyer to the Seller for goods and services purchased by the Buyer from the Seller.

5. LIMITATIONS No Entry shall be initiated under this Attachment except in conformity with the authorization provided above. The Buyer shall time the initiation of Entries so that funds are available to the Seller by the time such funds would be available had Entries not been authorized hereunder.

6. ACCEPTANCE AND RETURN OF ENTRIES Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to require the Seller or its financial institution to accept any Entry initiated under this Attachment and any such Entry may be returned as provided in the Rules. The Seller shall not be deemed to have accepted any Entry which is returned in accordance with the Rules. The Buyer shall not be deemed in default or suffer any loss of discount or other penalty by reason of the return of any Entry provided such Entry was initiated in accordance with the terms of this Attachment. The Seller shall not be deemed to have accepted any Entry as being in the correct amount if it provides written notice to the Buyer of a discrepancy within thirty (30) days after receipt of the Entry by the Seller's financial institution.

7. CREDIT FOR ENTRIES Unless such Entry is returned in accordance with the Rules, the Seller shall, as of the date the amount of a Credit Entry is credited to the Account, credit the Buyer with the amount of each Entry received. Unless such Entry is returned in accordance with the Rules, the Buyer shall, as of the date any Debit Entry is credited to its account with its financial institution, credit the Seller with the amount of each such Entry.

8. ENTRY INFORMATION Each Entry initiated under this Attachment shall be accompanied by the following information:

(a) Transaction Code (b) Document Date (usually invoice date) (c) Gross Amount (d) Net Amount of Invoice (e) Discount (if taken) (f) Invoice Bill Number

9. LIABILITY OF PARTIES Neither the Seller nor the Buyer shall be liable for the act or omission of any Automated Clearing House, financial institution or other person.

10. TERMINATION The transaction arrangements provided for in this Attachment may be terminated by either party at any time by giving thirty (30) days' prior written notice to the other party. Notwithstanding any such termination, the terms of this Attachment shall remain in force and effect as to all Entries which have been initiated prior to the date of termination and termination of such arrangements shall not affect the remainder of the Contract provisions, which shall remain in full force and effect.



3. E-MAIL PAYMENT NOTIFICATION SERVICE (Optional)

Contact Name: Tracy Gelb E-mail Address [email protected]

4. AUTHORIZATION Subject to the terms set forth below, the Seller authorizes the Buyer to initiate Credit Entries to the Account in accordance with the Rules for amounts owed by the Buyer to the Seller for goods and services purchased by the Buyer from the Seller.

5. LIMITATIONS No Entry shall be initiated under this Attachment except in conformity with the authorization provided above. The Buyer shall time the initiation of Entries so that funds are available to the Seller by the time such funds would be available had Entries not been authorized hereunder.

6. ACCEPTANCE AND RETURN OF ENTRIES Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to require the Seller or its financial institution to accept any Entry initiated under this Attachment and any such Entry may be returned as provided in the Rules. The Seller shall not be deemed to have accepted any Entry which is returned in accordance with the Rules. The Buyer shall not be deemed in default or suffer any loss of discount or other penalty by reason of the return of any Entry provided such Entry was initiated in accordance with the terms of this Attachment. The Seller shall not be deemed to have accepted any Entry as being in the correct amount if it provides written notice to the Buyer of a discrepancy within thirty (30) days after receipt of the Entry by the Seller's financial institution.

7. CREDIT FOR ENTRIES Unless such Entry is returned in accordance with the Rules, the Seller shall, as of the date the amount of a Credit Entry is credited to the Account, credit the Buyer with the amount of each Entry received. Unless such Entry is returned in accordance with the Rules, the Buyer shall, as of the date any Debit Entry is credited to its account with its financial institution, credit the Seller with the amount of each such Entry.

8. ENTRY INFORMATION Each Entry initiated under this Attachment shall be accompanied by the following information:

(a) Transaction Code (b) Document Date (usually invoice date) (c) Gross Amount (d) Net Amount of Invoice (e) Discount (if taken) (f) Invoice Bill Number

9. LIABILITY OF PARTIES Neither the Seller nor the Buyer shall be liable for the act or omission of any Automated Clearing House, financial institution or other person.

10. TERMINATION The transaction arrangements provided for in this Attachment may be terminated by either party at any time by giving thirty (30) days' prior written notice to the other party. Notwithstanding any such termination, the terms of this Attachment shall remain in force and effect as to all Entries which have been initiated prior to the date of termination and termination of such arrangements shall not affect the remainder of the Contract provisions, which shall remain in full force and effect.


Exhibit W-4

CSS 0417A Contractor Requirements Hazardous Chemicals

CONTRACT ADDENDUM Contractor Requirements - Hazardous Chemicals

CSS Form 417A Modified Page 1 Exhibit W-4 Contractor Requirements..-FINAL.DOC

The term "Contractor" as used herein means the party contracting with Consumers Energy Company in the contract to which this form is attached. The term "Owner" means Consumers Energy Company.

1. The Contractor shall comply and shall ensure that its subcontractors comply, in the performance of all work and operations hereunder, with all applicable requirements of Occupational Safety and Health Standards Subpart Z (Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Chapter XVII, Part 1910, Subpart Z, Section 1910.1200, hereinafter referred to as "29 CFR § 1910.1200"), and of Acts 80, 67 and 79 of the Michigan Public Acts of 1986.

2. In addition to the foregoing:

(a) The Contractor shall notify the Owner, and shall require its subcontractors to notify the Owner, of any "hazardous chemicals" that will be used in any work or operations hereunder. Such "hazardous chemicals" shall be as defined by 29 CFR § 1910.1200. Such notification shall be made by submitting to the Owner a current Material Safety Data Sheet ("MSDS") for each such hazardous chemical, which MSDS shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR § 1910.1200. For all "hazardous chemicals" that the Contractor or its subcontractors know, prior to commencement of the work and operations hereunder, will be used in such work and operations, the MSDS shall be submitted prior to commencement of any work or operations hereunder. For any "hazardous chemicals" that the Contractor or subcontractors may thereafter determine will be used, the Contractor or subcontractor shall submit the MSDS as soon as possible, and in all events prior to such "hazardous chemicals" being brought to any of the Owner's plants or jobsites.

(b) The original of each MSDS that the Contractor and its subcontractors are required to submit to the Owner as set forth above shall be submitted to the Owner's designated representative in the field for the work hereunder. At the same time as the original is so submitted to the Owner's designated representative in the field, the Contractor shall submit another copy thereof to the Owner's applicable Hazard Communication Coordinator(s) at the address(es) designated on the following page(s) for the location(s) where the work is being performed.

(c) The Contractor shall ensure that all "hazardous chemicals" used or supplied by it or its subcontractors in the work and operations hereunder are labeled in accordance with 29 CFR § 1910.1200.

3. Whenever, after an MSDS has been submitted to the Owner in accordance with the above provisions of this Addendum, an updated MSDS becomes required in accordance with 29 CFR § 1910.1200 for a "hazardous chemical" being used by the Contractor or subcontractor, the Contractor shall ensure that such updated MSDS is submitted to the Owner in the same manner as set forth in Item 2(b) of this Addendum.

4. In the event that the Contractor or any of its subcontractor is using "hazardous chemicals" at any of the Owner's plants or jobsites without submitting the required MSDSs or without proper labeling as set forth above, the Contractor shall ensure that such chemicals are immediately removed until an MSDS is formally submitted as set forth above and/or proper labeling is achieved. Any costs that may be incurred from the resulting delay in the work shall be borne fully by the Contractor.

5. The Contractor shall contact both the Owner's designated representative in the field and the applicable Hazard Communication Coordinator(s) or designated alternate(s) before the Contractor or any of its subcontractors mobilize onsite at the Owner's plant or jobsite to confirm the receipt of the information supplied by the Contractor and its subcontractors as required in the above provisions.

6. "Subcontractors," for purposes hereof, shall mean the Contractor's subcontractors of any tier.

7. The Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from and against all losses, liabilities, costs, expenses, damages, fines and penalties arising from any failure of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors to comply with the provisions of this Addendum.

CONTRACT ADDENDUM Contractor Requirements - Hazardous Chemicals

CSS Form 417A Modified Page 2 Exhibit W-4 Contractor Requirements..-FINAL.DOC

FIELD OFFICES ALLEGAN CENTRAL MAIL REMITTANCE EAST KENT GRAND RAPIDS GREENVILLE HASTINGS KALAMAZOO LANSING NORTH KENT OWOSSO SOUTH HAVEN CONFRNCE CTR ZEELAND WHITE PIGEON T&S 1801 W Main Street Owosso, MI 48867 Attn: Field Environmental Coordinator

ALMA BAD AXE BAY CITY CARO CLARE EAST TAWAS FLINT GLADWIN LAINGSBURG MIDLAND MIDLAND TRAINING CENTER PRUDENVILLE ROSE CITY SAGINAW STANDISH SAGINAW M&R 4141 E. Wilder Rd Bay City, MI 48706 Attn: Field Environmental Coordinator BENZONIA BIG RAPIDS BOYNE CITY CADILLAC CHEBOYGAN TRAVERSE CITY GAYLORD LAKE CITY LUDINGTON MANISTEE MUSKEGON MARION T&S MUSKEGON RIVER T&S OVERISEL T&S OVERISEL STORAGE T&S FREMONT 330 Chestnut Street Cadillac, MI 49601 Attn: Field Environmental Coordinator

FIELD OFFICES (Continued)

HOWELL LAPEER RAU t*s LIVONIA MACOMB FREEDOM T&S ST CLAIR T&S PONTIAC ROYAL OAK NORTHVILLE T&S WILLIAMSTON T&S 4600 Coolidge Highway PO Box 369 Royal Oak, MI 48068 Attn: Field Environmental Coordinator

ADRIAN BATTLE CREEK BRONSON JACKSON LDC JONESVILLE SOUTH MONROE CORPORATE GARAGE CORPORATE HANGER BRIDGE STREET FILES ONE ENERGY PLAZA PARNALL OFFICE BLDG PARNALL EAST MARSHALL TRAINING CENTER GENERAL METER BLDG MORRILL ROAD TRAIL STREET LAB INVESTMENT RECOVERY CTR BOILERHOUSE-PARNALL RD 1945 W Parnall Rd Jackson, MI 49201 Attn: Field Environmental Coordinator COMBUSTION TURBINE OPERATIONS Karn 3 & 4 Peakers Gaylord Peakers Thetford Peakers Straits Peakers Morrow Peakers 425 Fairview Street Zeeland, MI 49464 Attn: Environmental Coordinator

PLANTS

JH CAMPBELL PLANT 17000 Croswell Street West Olive, MI 49460 Attn: Regulatory Department

BC COBB PLANT 151 North Causeway Muskegon, MI 49440 Attn: Regulatory Department

D E KARN PLANT 1 & 2 2742 North Weadock Hwy Essexville, MI 48732 Attn: Regulatory Department

D E KARN PLANT 3 & 4 2680 North Weadock Highway Essexville, MI 48732 Attn: Regulatory Department

LUDINGTON PUMPED STORAGE PLANT 5825 West US-10 Ludington, MI 49431 Attn: Regulatory Department

MIDLAND TRAINING CENTER 3249 East Gordonville Road Midland, MI 48640 Attn: Facilities Supervisor

JC WEADOCK PLANT 2555 North Weadock Hwy Essexville, MI 48732 Attn: Regulatory Department

JR WHITING PLANT 4525 East Erie Road Erie, MI 48133 Attn: Environmental Department

COMBUSTION TURBINE OPERATIONS 2680 North Weadock Highway Essexville, MI 48732 Attn: Regulatory Department

HYDRO OPERATIONS 330 Chestnut Street Cadillac, MI 49601 Attn: Regulatory Department ZEELAND GENERATING STATION 425 Fairview Street Zeeland, MI 49464 Attn: Environmental Coordinator

END OF CONTRACT ADDENDUM


Exhibit W-5

Third Party Ethics and Compliance Guidelines

t h i r d - p a r t y

Ethics and Compliance

g u i d E l i n E s

2008

rEvision 1 – april 2008

these guidelines set forth the framework of acceptable con-duct CMs Energy Corporation (“CMs Energy”) expects from its suppliers of goods and services and its vendors (“suppliers”).

The guidelines outline the key principles that demonstrate our commit-ment to conduct all business activities in accordance with high ethical standards and in compliance with all laws, rules and regulations. These guidelines are based largely on the CMs Energy Code of Conduct and statement of Ethics handbook.

all work performed for CMs Energy must be performed in full com-pliance with all applicable laws, rules, regulations and policies, as well as, in accordance with our commitment to high ethical standards. For sup-pliers who have employees contracted to work directly for CMs Energy, this includes reviewing these standards with all their employees and sub-contractors working on CMs Energy accounts.

We expect our employees and our contractors, consultants and agents to conduct themselves in a safe and professional manner, to refrain from any action that may be considered a conflict of interest, and to treat oth-ers with respect, fairness and dignity while working on behalf of CMs Energy.

additional information on our compliance and ethics commitment, as well as the CMs Energy Code of Conduct and statement of Ethics handbook for our employees, is available on the CMs Energy Web site at www.cmsenergy.com.

if you have questions or concerns about compliance or ethics issues while working for CMs Energy or want to report illegal or unethical activities, you may call our toll-free compliance and ethics hotline at 1-800-CMs-5212 or e-mail [email protected]. you also may anonymously call 1-800-ethicsp or visit the Web site www.ethicspoint.com.

We regard our supplier base as a critical and necessary extension of our operations and future success, and we thank you for continuing to make compliance and ethics a top priority as you work with CMs Energy.

to all contractors, consultants and materials/services suppliers to CMs Energy:

safety, Environmental and health n CMs Energy strives to have an injury- and illness-free work environ-ment. to this end, CMs Energy expects its contractors, consultants and agents’ suppliers (herein collectively “suppliers”) to perform their work in a way that will protect themselves and others and comply with all appropri-ate safety and health laws, rules, regulations and procedures, including any site-specific safety requirements. you should look for and resolve unsafe situations and help and encourage others to work safely. When involved in CMs Energy-related work, you must report to work fit for duty and remain fit for duty during working hours.

CMs Energy is committed to conducting business in a manner that con-serves and protects natural resources and the environment. suppliers must comply with all applicable environmental laws and regulations and con-duct operations on behalf of CMs Energy in an environmentally friendly manner.

CMs Energy is committed to a drug- and alcohol-free workplace. We expect you to avoid using or being under the influence of alcohol while performing work for CMs Energy or on CMs Energy property. supplier employees shall not consume alcoholic beverages during a meal period if they are to return to work for CMs Energy after the meal. supplier employees will not work for CMs Energy evidencing any effects of alcohol consumption.

CMs Energy is a drug-free workplace. We expect that you will not use, possess, sell, provide or be under the influence of illegal drugs or other con-trolled substances while engaged in CMs Energy-related work. you must not allow the use of prescription drugs or over-the-counter medications to affect your ability to work safely or efficiently. your employees also must comply with applicable state and federal laws and regulations, including the department of transportation fitness for duty regulations.

Weaponsn supplier employees may not possess any licensed or unlicensed weapon while on CMs Energy property, in personal vehicles parked on CMs Energy property, in CMs Energy vehicles or while conducting CMs Energy busi-ness unless otherwise specifically authorized by CMs Energy management. Weapons include, but are not limited to, firearms, explosives, ammunition, pellet guns, paintball guns, tasers, bows/arrows and swords.

3 | T h i r d - p a r t y E t h i c s a n d C o m p l i a n c e G u i d e l i n e s • C M S E n e r g y

relationships with othersn suppliers must conduct all their operations with CMs Energy in a socially responsible, nondiscriminatory manner and in full compliance with all applicable laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to equal opportunity, child labor, working hours and harassment-free work environment laws. CMs Energy expects its employees and suppliers to treat one another with respect and dignity and to demonstrate our commitment to being a good corporate citizen in the communities where our Company representatives work.

CMs Energy does not tolerate harassment or discrimination, including behavior, comments, e-mail messages or other conduct that contributes to an intimidating or offensive environment. slurs based on race, gender or religion, or any other conduct, remarks, jokes or pictures that encourage or foster an offensive work environment are dealt with seriously. in addition, we expect you, in your business activities with CMs Energy, to comply with applicable federal, state and local statutes that prohibit discrimination or harassment based on race, color, religion, age, sex, national origin, ancestry, physical or mental disability, medical condition, veteran status, marital status, sexual orientation, height, weight or any other non-job-related factor.

CMs Energy is committed to providing a safe and secure work environ-ment for its employees and suppliers. CMs Energy will not tolerate acts of violence committed by or against its employees or suppliers.

responsibility for Company resourcesn suppliers are expected to safeguard CMs Energy resources which include property, assets, intellectual property, company technology assets (network, phone, internet, software applications and e-mail systems) and confiden-tial or sensitive information while performing work for CMs Energy. use of CMs Energy resources without proper approvals or for anything other than to perform CMs Energy work activities is strictly prohibited. intellectual property rights of CMs Energy must be protected. CMs Energy confiden-tial or sensitive information must be protected. suppliers may only possess such information if they need to do so to perform work activities. suppliers should not use this information for gain or advantage, and never share this information without appropriate CMs Energy approval. all confidential or sensitive information obtained by a supplier must have documented autho-rization in place. inappropriate use of CMs Energy internet or e-mail is strictly prohibited.


CMs Energy retains the right to monitor its assets and work environ-ments in compliance with applicable federal, state and local law. We moni-tor to promote safety, prevent criminal activity, investigate alleged miscon-duct and security violations, manage information systems, and for other business reasons.

Conflict of interestn a conflict of interest exists when there is a choice between acting in a personal interest (financial or otherwise) or in the interest of CMs Energy. While engaged in CMs Energy- related work, you must exercise reasonable care and diligence to avoid any actions or situations that could result in a conflict of interest. This includes not accepting any employment or engag-ing in any work that creates a conflict of interest with CMs Energy or in any way compromises the work you are to perform for our Company. supplier employees who also are CMs Energy employees must obtain the proper approvals from management and the chief compliance officer.

suppliers should not give to or accept from any CMs Energy employee or his/her immediate family member any loans, trips, gifts or entertain-ment that could influence or be perceived to influence business decisions. a gift can be anything of value, including such items as a ticket to a sport-ing event or play, a nonbusiness meal, a bottle of wine, a special discount or an all-expense paid trip to a conference or event.

occasionally suppliers may be solicited to donate to CMs Energy- sponsored charitable events. suppliers who decide to contribute are limited to donating $1,000 per sponsored event.

CMs Energy expects suppliers to prevent or immediately disclose a con-flict of interest or the appearance of a conflict of interest as soon as possible to CMs Energy managers or the compliance department.

Compliance with laws, rules and regulationsn suppliers, while working on behalf of CMs Energy, are expected to abide by all regulations from all government agencies that apply to CMs Energy including, but not limited to, Federal Energy regulatory Commis-sion, north american Electric reliability Corporation, Michigan public service Commission, u.s. Environmental protection agency, department


of homeland security, Michigan department of Environmental Quality, occupational safety and health administration, Michigan department of transportation, u.s. department of transportation, Michigan occupa-tional safety and health administration and department of Energy.

CMs Energy expects suppliers working on our behalf to abide by the legal requirements prohibiting bribes, kickbacks, corruption and requir-ing fair dealings and full disclosures. Compliance with all laws, including antitrust laws and the Foreign Corrupt practices act, is strictly required for work related to CMs Energy. in addition, suppliers working on our behalf are required to fully comply with any provisions regarding interactions between affiliates in the energy industry and should not share any customer, rates or market information between the affiliates Consumers Energy and CMs Enterprises. suppliers should obtain proper approvals from CMs Energy managers before sharing information between the affiliates.

accurate records and disclosures are critical to CMs Energy meeting its legal, financial, regulatory and management obligations. We expect that you will never misstate facts or omit material information related to CMs Energy-related business. you must ensure that all records, including dis-closures, accounts, reports, bills, invoices, time-worked records, correspon-dence and public communications are full, fair, accurate, timely and under-standable. you must never hide, alter, falsify or disguise the true nature of any transaction.

CMs Energy must comply with all sarbanes-oxley act requirements regarding the accounting, contracting and payment for goods and services. CMs Energy’s commitment to compliance requires that you accept orders only when accompanied by an approved CMs Energy contract, purchase order or charge card. Failure to comply with this requirement may impact our ability to reimburse you for goods or services in a timely manner.

government officials shape the legal and regulatory environment in which CMs Energy operates. if you interact on CMs Energy’s behalf with government officials or candidates for public office, you must understand and comply with the laws and CMs Energy policies that control CMs Energy’s participation in the political process including, but not limited to, state and federal lobbying laws, limitations on gifts, the approval process for contributions, reporting of lobbying contacts and regulatory reporting requirements.

CMs Energy expects that you will never make investment decisions regarding any equity or debt securities based on information obtained in the course of your CMs Energy-related work if the information 1) has not been publicly disseminated and 2) could have a material effect on the value


of the investment. Examples of such information include expansion plans, major management changes, dividend rates, earnings, mergers and signifi-cant new contracts or projects. using this information is against CMs Ener-gy’s policies and may violate laws or regulations.

Copyrighted works may include newsletters, magazine articles, newspa-pers, books, videotapes, drawings, musical recordings and software. Copy-right law protects such works even if they do not include a copyright notice. if you wish to copy material for distribution related to CMs Energy work, we expect that you will obtain permission from the copyright holder before making copies.

Computer software typically is covered by licensing agreements that pro-hibit unauthorized use or copying. do not make unauthorized copies of software that is licensed to CMs Energy. We expect that you will not load unlicensed software onto CMs Energy computer equipment or download unauthorized software from the internet.

Endorsementsn CMs Energy does not endorse products/services or the firms or individu-als who supply them. you may not use CMs Energy’s name or corporate logo in any advertising materials or publicity without first obtaining the prior written consent of CMs Energy.

supplier diversityn CMs Energy is committed to providing maximum practical business opportunities to women, minority and disabled veteran-owned business enterprises. however, we do not use set-asides, preferences or quotas in administering our supplier diversity program.

Waivers or Exceptionsn suppliers seeking an exception to or waiver of a provision of these guide-lines should do so by contacting the appropriate CMs Energy contract administrator. The administrator will present a business case justification for the waiver or exception to the chief compliance officer. only the CMs Energy chief compliance officer may grant an exception to or waiver of these guidelines.



reporting Ethical Concernsn The standards of conduct described in these guidelines are critical to the ongoing success of CMs Energy’s relationship with its suppliers. if you have questions or concerns about compliance or ethics issues while working for CMs Energy or want to report illegal or unethical activities, you may call our toll-free compliance and ethics hotline at:

1-800-CMS-5212 or e-mail: [email protected]

you also may anonymously call: 1-800-ethicsp or visit the Web site:www.ethicspoint.com

The information provided and procedures set forth in these guidelines do not confer contractual rights of any kind on any supplier or create contractual obligations of any kind for CMs Energy.

15932 500 4/08


Exhibit W-6

Supplemental W9 Form


Exhibit W-7

CSS 733 Sworn Statement

Form 733 10-2001

SWORN STATEMENT

STATE OF MICHIGAN } } SS COUNTY OF }

, being duly sworn, deposes and

says

that is the contractor/subcontractor for an improvement to the

following described real property situated in County, Michigan, described as follows:

(Insert legal description of property)

That the following is a statement of each subcontractor and supplier and laborer, for which labor the payment of wages or fringe benefits and withholdings is due but unpaid, with whom the contractor/subcontractor has contracted/subcontracted for performance under the contract with the owner or lessee thereof, and that the amounts due to the persons as of the date hereof are correctly and fully set forth opposite their names, as follows:

Name of Subcontractor, Supplier

or Laborer

Type of

Improvement Furnished

Total

Contract Price

Amount Already

Paid

Amount

Currently Owing

Balance to Complete (Optional)

Amount of

Laborer Wages Due but Unpaid

Amount of Laborer Fringe Benefits and Withholdings

Due but Unpaid

(Some columns are not applicable to all persons listed.) That the contractor has not procured material from, or subcontracted with, any person other than those set forth above and owes no money for the improvement other than the sums set forth above. Deponent further says that he or she makes the foregoing statement as the contractor/subcontractor or as of the contractor/subcontractor for the purpose of representing to the owner or lessee of the above-described premises and his or her agents that the above-described property is free from claims of construction liens, or the possibility of construction liens, except as specifically set forth above, and except for claims of construction liens by laborers which may be provided pursuant to Section 109 of the Construction Lien Act, Act No. 497 of the Public Acts of 1980, as amended, being Section 570.1109 of the Michigan Compiled Laws. WARNING TO OWNER: AN OWNER OR LESSEE OF THE ABOVE-DESCRIBED PROPERTY MAY NOT RELY ON THIS SWORN STATEMENT TO AVOID THE CLAIM OF A SUBCONTRACTOR, SUPPLIER OR LABORER WHO HAS PROVIDED A NOTICE OF FURNISHING, OR A LABORER WHO MAY PROVIDE A NOTICE OF FURNISHING PURSUANT TO SECTION 109 OF THE CONSTRUCTION LIEN ACT TO THE DESIGNEE OR TO THE OWNER OR LESSEE IF THE DESIGNEE IS NOT NAMED OR HAS DIED.

(Deponent)

WARNING TO DEPONENT: A PERSON, WHO WITH INTENT TO DEFRAUD, GIVES A FALSE SWORN STATEMENT, IS SUBJECT TO CRIMINAL PENALTIES AS PROVIDED IN SECTION 110 OF THE CONSTRUCTION LIEN ACT, ACT NO. 497 OF THE PUBLIC ACTS OF 1980, AS AMENDED, BEING SECTION 570.1110 OF THE MICHIGAN COMPILED LAWS.

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , .

Notary Public____________________________________________

County, Michigan

Form 733 10-2001

My Commission Expires


Exhibit W-8



Exhibit X

Approved Subcontractors

11/2/2010 Lake Winds Wind Farm

WHITE

Subcontractor / Supplier List Rebar Supply: Ambassador Steel 149 Sycamore Lane Mooresville,Indaina 46158 Contact:Steve Curtis Rebar Installer: Davis JD Steel,LLc 310 S. 6th Street Mayfield,KY 42066 Contact:Louie Leon Anchor Bolt Supplier: Williams Form Engineering Corp. 8165 Graphic Dr.NE Belmont,MI. 49306 Contact:John White Embed Ring Supplier: Bassett Mechanical 1215 Hyland Ave. Kaukana,Wi. 54130 Paul VanderHeyden Concrete/Aggregate Supply: Team Elmers P.O. Box 6150 Traverse City Mi. 49696-6150 Contact:John Girven Electrical Subcontract: Field Performance Vendors: M.J. Electric, LLC 200 West Frank Pipp Drive Iron Mountain, MI 49801 906-774-8000

Henkels and McCoy 1800 Johnson Street Elkhart, IN 46514 574-264-1121 Electrical and Civil Engineering: Barr Engineering Co. 4700 West 77th Street Minneapolis, MN 55435 800-632-2277 Donald Keefe & Associates, Inc. 1725 East Cypress Ave. Suite A Redding, CA 96002 (530) 223-1413 (ph)

Surveying / Layout: Materials Testing Consultants, Inc. 693 Plymouth Ave NE Grand Rapids, MI 49505 800-968-TEST Soils & Structures 6480 Grand Haven Rd Muskegon, MI 49441 231-798-4127 Soil and Materials Engineers, Inc. 4705 Clyde Park Avenue, SW Grand Rapids, MI 49509 616-406-1756 Elevator Installer: To be completed by a Michigan Licensed Installer


Exhibit Y



Exhibit Z

QA-QC Program

Field Quality Control Plan WCQA.100.08 White Construction, Inc.

Page 1 of 122

Field Quality Control Plan

For The

Installation of Land Based Wind Turbines

2010 Edition Revision 8

THIS DOCUMENT WHETHER CONTAINING PATENTABLE OR NON-PATENTABLE SUBJECT MATTER, EMBODIES THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF WHITE CONSTRUCTION, INC. THIS INFORMATION IS LOANED IN CONFIDENCE WITH THE UNDERSTANDING

THAT IT WILL NOT BE REPRODUCED, USED OR DISCLOSED FOR ANY PURPOSE EXCEPT THE LIMITED PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT WAS LOANED.

THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE RETURNED TO WHITE CONSTRUCTION, INC. UPON DEMAND.


Page 2 of 122

Table of Contents Section Description Revision Date

01 Statement of Authority and Responsibility

0 03/10

02 Organization

0 03/10

03 Safety

0 03/10

04 Quality Assurance Program

0 03/10

05 Request For Information (RFI)

0 03/10

06 Procurement Control

0 03/10

07 Document Control

0 03/10

08 Control of Material and Services

0 03/10

09 Bolting

0 03/10

10 Civil

0 03/10

11 Wind Turbine Installation

0 03/10

12 Electrical and Mechanical BOP Installation

0 03/10

13 Painting and Coatings

0 03/10

14 Control of Measuring and Test Equipment

0 03/10

15 Inspection and Test Control

0 03/10

16 Nonconformance Reporting

0 03/10

17 Documentation

0 03/10

18 Audits and Surveillances

0 03/10

19

Welding & Non-Destructive Inspection 0 03/10

20 Start Up and Commissioning

0 03/10

THIS DOCUMENT WHETHER CONTAINING PATENTABLE OR NON-PATENTABLE SUBJECT MATTER, EMBODIES THE PROPRIETARY AND

CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF WHITE CONSTRUCTION, INC. THIS INFORMATION IS LOANED IN CONFIDENCE WITH THE UNDERSTANDING THAT IT WILL NOT BE REPRODUCED, USED OR DISCLOSED FOR ANY PURPOSE EXCEPT THE LIMITED PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT WAS LOANED.

THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BE RETURNED TO WHITE CONSTRUCTION, INC. UPON DEMAND.


Page 3 of 122

1.0 Introduction and Statement of Authority and Responsibility

White Construction, Inc. is totally committed to the concept of quality. All of the Company’s

activities are devoted to delivering services and projects that constantly meet or exceed the

customer requirements.

The Company endorses the concept that total quality services and products are based on

principles where quality is a functional responsibility of each individual and segment of the

White Construction organization. Managers and key personnel at all levels are responsible

for giving full attention to quality in managing and performing their respective activities. All

employees have the responsibility and authority to identify quality problems, to initiate and

provide solutions to quality problems, to verify implementation and to resolve deficiencies

that affect quality.

Sections of this plan may be used in whole, or in part, to govern activities commensurate with

the scope of the activities. This plan directs a self-implementation project where a White

Construction, Inc. is employed to perform installations. Subcontractors are required to

implement their own plan under their respective Quality plan commensurate to this

plan. Additional WCI procedures necessary to perform the installation of the wind turbine

generators are addressed and referenced.

Each Project Manager, Assistant Project Manager, Project Supervisor / Superintendent, Field

Quality Control Manager, Craft Foreman, as well as all other company employees and

subcontractors, as assigned, will be responsible for implementing requirements of this plan in

their area of assigned responsibility.

The Project Manager is responsible for assuring that all applicable phases of this plan are

implemented for the contents of this plan and is assigned authority and organizational

freedom to implement this quality program, identify quality problems, initiate, recommend or

provide solutions, verify implementation of solutions, and limit or control further processing

or installation of a nonconforming item or unsatisfactory condition until proper disposition

has occurred. At his discretion, the Project Manager may direct queries to the Field Quality

Control Manager for resolution.

Any issues, differences or nonconformance that cannot be resolved in accordance with this

plan shall be brought to the attention of the Wind Operations Director for resolution and/or

the Corporate Quality Control Director for resolution.

Organization

2.1 This section describes the organization of White Construction, Inc. (WCI) for the field

installation of Wind Turbines.

2.1.1 H.B. White Canada Corp. is a wholly owned subsidiary of White Construction,

Inc. Both White Construction, Inc. and H.B White Canada Corp. actively

maintain Wind Power Divisions. The Wind Operations Manager of each

respective company is in charge of this business operation, and is responsible

for the overall cost and schedule.


Page 4 of 122

2.1.2 White Construction, Inc. is divided into groups providing services in the

contracting, engineering, installation and maintenance of Wind turbines. Each

group has a Wind Operations Director who reports to the Corporate Vice

President of Operations.

2.1.3 The Project Manager is responsible for overseeing the construction of the wind

turbines, as well as all other related contract work. The Project Manager

reports to the Wind Operations Director.

2.1.4 The Assistant Project Manager is responsible for the directing all construction

activities, which includes supervision of all Project Superintendents, as well as

the administration of the Equipment/Logistics Manager(s), Site Safety

Manager, and Office Manager/Payroll Clerk. The Assistant Project Manager is

responsible, along with the Site Quality Control Manager, to implement the

Quality Program and Plan, and interfaces with the Project Superintendents to

implement all work activities of the Craft Labor.

2.1.5 The Field Quality Control Manager reports to the Corporate Quality Control

Director and supports the Assistant Project Manager. The Corporate Quality

Control Director is responsible for supervision of White Construction, Inc. Site

Quality Assurance/Control, implementation of this or any subcontractor’s plan,

technical direction in Quality Control to White Construction, Inc. personnel,

controlling contents, revisions, and approving quality plans.

2.1.6 Other than Discipline Engineers, The Field Quality Control Manager may

appoint a Site Quality Specialist, NDE Technician, Welding Specialist, Civil

Specialist, Mechanical Specialist, or other technically specialized personnel to

the project commensurate with the scope of work to be performed. These

technical specialists report functionally to the Field Quality Control Manager

and administratively to the Assistant Project Manager and are responsible for

providing direction in their specific area of authority for the project. The Field

Quality Control Manager can assign field technical responsibility to a Site

Quality Specialist.

2.1.7 Health and Safety is a separate department reporting to upper Corporate

Management. The Director of Health and Safety reports issues and advises

White Management at all levels of Management up to the Company President.

2.1.8 It is the responsibility of White Construction, Inc. to provide and maintain an

effective Quality Plan throughout the duration of the contract. To accomplish

our overall goal of completing the timely construction of these facilities in

compliance with the contract documents while providing a safe work

environment for our employees and subcontractors. White Construction, Inc.

shall provide and ensure the performance of sufficient inspection and testing of

all work performed incident to this construction effort. These tests and

inspections include all subcontracted as well as self-performed work. All tests

and inspections will be performed to provide the quality of materials,

workmanship, and functional performance requirements mandated by the

contract documents.


Page 5 of 122

2.1.9 If WCI (Contractor) is delayed in the performance of the Contract Work for

any reason beyond Contractor’s control, and without Contractor’s fault or

negligence, including delays caused in whole or in part by Owner or any other

persons, entities or events, or if the Contract Work is delayed by order of

Owner or an authorized representative of Owner, or if the Contract Work is

delayed for any reason or cause for which Owner has resulted in excusable

delay, then Contractor is entitled to an extension of the Contract Time and

money in which to complete its work. Said extension shall be set forth in a

Contract Change Order for such time and funds as the parties may agree is

reasonable.

2.2 Delegation and Performance of Duties

Each manager or supervisor may delegate the performing of duties to others who are direct

reports, and who are qualified to perform such duties. However, the responsibility for those

duties cannot be delegated; each manager of supervisor may, when qualified, perform the

duties of, and assume the responsibilities for those direct reports.

Corporate QA/QC Director

Project Organization

Project Manager

Field Quality

Control Manager

Site Safety

Representative

Payroll Clerk /

Office Manager

Site Safety

Specialists

Assistant Project Manager

Subcontractors

Project Engineers

/ Superintendents

Vice President of Operations

Wind Operations Director

White Construction, Inc.

Other Dept Managers

Other Site Dept

Personnel

Other Managers

Of -

Departments

Site Craft

Labor

Quality

Specialists, NDE,

Inspection and Testing

subcontractors

Shaded area duplicated in

Canadian and US Divisions

Senior QA/QC Manager

Executive Vice President

Organizational Chart Figure 2.1


Page 6 of 122

3.0 Safety

3.1 Safety is everyone’s responsibility while working on any White Construction, Inc.

project. The White Construction, Inc. Corporate Health and Safety Program will be

adhered to and strictly enforced by the Site Safety Representative. The White

Construction, Inc. Corporate Health and Safety Program includes, but is not limited to,

the following site specific safety requirements:

3.1.1 All lifting Activities will have a procedure and will be reviewed and approved

by the Site Safety Representative prior to any work.

3.1.2 A 100% tie off rule is in effect for the project. Safety Harnesses will be worn

with no exceptions.

3.1.3 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) shall be worn at all times.

3.1.4 Material Data Safety Sheets (MSDS) are to be reviewed where applicable. See

the Site Safety Representative.

3.1.5 All turbine components supplied by the manufacture will meet all OSHA and

Canadian equivalent safety standards.

3.1.6 If the chain hoist is to be operated during the erection process, the turbine

manufacture will supply WCI or HB White with written documentation for

each hoist in each turbine confirming that the hoist(s) meets all OSHA or

Canadian equivalent requirements and has been certified by a third party

inspector that the hoist(s) is capable to perform safely during normal load-

bearing operations.

3.2 Any issues or questions concerning safety regulations are to be directed to the Site

Safety Representative.

4.0 Quality Assurance Program

4.1 Scope

4.1.1 This plan describes the program used by White Construction, Inc. to control the

quality of activities performed.

4.1.2 This Plan is not International Systems Organization (ISO) rated or certified and

does not control the ISO quality requirements of any White Construction, Inc.

business or of work performed by other White Construction, Inc. businesses.

4.1.3 This plan does not control the installation, alignment, and performance of Wind

Turbine Equipment and software that is controlled by other vendor manuals,

documents and programs.


Page 7 of 122

4.1.4 The performance and documentation of activities stated in this plan can be

documented either in paper copy or computer-generated form as consummate

with the project specifications.

4.1.5 The forms in this plan can be substituted with similar forms as long as the

essential information is the same in the substituted documentation as required by

contract, specifications and applicable codes.

4.1.6 Each subcontractor is required to work to their own White Construction, Inc.

equivalent quality program and plan. In fulfilling the requirements of this

contract, and the White Construction, Inc. Quality Plan, subcontractor shall

employ adequate personnel competent in the fields of knowledge for the various

Quality Management positions augmented by subcontracts as required with

qualified agencies, laboratories, consultants, etc. to perform the desired services.

4.2 Plan Control

4.2.1 The Corporate Quality Control Director is responsible for the contents of this

plan and revisions there in. The Corporate Quality Control Director will review

this plan as required to assure compliance with requirements.

4.2.2 The "Table of Contents" for this plan shows the revision number and date on

each section and will be updated when a revision is made. Revisions will be

identified by a vertical line in the left margin and controlled by sections. When

deemed appropriate, and at the option of the Corporate QA/QC Director, the

Manual may be advanced to the next edition level, as indicated on the Table of

Contents and the revision level of all sections and the Exhibits may be returned

to ―0‖.

4.2.3 This plan will be maintained in the White Construction, Inc. JOBSERVER

Quality Control Folder ―Quality Plan‖. The version on this folder will be

considered the controlled version; all other copies, either paper copy or

electronic will be considered uncontrolled.

4.2.4 Copies of this plan may be made available upon request. All transmitted copies

of the plan are designated ―uncontrolled‖ and need not be labeled.

4.2.5 Plan changes that are unique to a project may be made. These changes will be

considered plan addenda. When such changes are made, they will be added to

this plan as addenda and not revisions. Any field changes are prohibited without

first informing the Project Manager and Corporate Quality Control Director.

The Assistant Project Manager and Field Quality Control Manager will be

notified of any such changes via transmittal record.

4.2.6 Changes in titles, document forms and material that do not change the intent of

this plan are not considered to be a revision. In addition, special addenda’s can

be issued to address governmental, site and/or client specific requirements.


Page 8 of 122

4.2.7 Each subcontractor is responsible for the distribution and control of their

respective plan and program manual as stated in their controlling document.

4.2.8 The subcontractor upon request will be allowed to use in whole, in part, or forms

of this plan to complete their contract quality control requirements.

5.0 Request For Information (RFI)

5.1 Scope- Request For Information (RFI)

5.1.1 This section describes the Request for Information (RFI) system and how it

relates to the execution of this plan and its contents.

5.1.2 RFI is a system used to quickly resolve primarily Balance of Plant (BOP) issues

that may arise during the contracted installation at customer sites. RFI may be

issued electronically or through paper copy as in Exhibit 5.1. As RFI’s are

generated, RFI Log shall be maintained by field personnel as in Exhibit 5.2.

5.1.3 An RFI can be used to resolve conflicts between drawings, installation

interferences, to clarify where requirements are not clear or any other situation

that poses a lack of understanding. RFI may also be used to drive extra work

orders.

5.1.4 An RFI may be internally or externally initiated, and shall be used by project

personnel, as required, for formal documentation of the response to any issue

regarding the effective accomplishment of project and/or customer requirements

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Routine questions and answers for all project subjects.

2. Customer questions, concerns, issues, complaints.

3. Changes to schedule.

4. Changes to vendor information.

5. Changes in requirements brought about by regulatory, client request,

operating experience, change in scope, or other requirements.

6. Revision(s) to original design(s) or specification(s).

7. Additional technical (or other) information/clarifications.

8. Nonconformance issues.

5.1.5 The Project Manager, supported by the Project Team, shall ensure RFIs are

properly processed.

5.2 Implementation

5.2.1 The WTG Supplier, White Construction, Inc., subcontractors or the client can

generate an RFI.

5.2.1.1 To facilitate timely and proper response, the RFI Process in section 5.3

shall be observed.

5.2.1.2 Personnel shall initiate and document resolution of RFI’s.


Page 9 of 122

NOTE: To ensure RFIs are understandable, it is recommended that non-

standard abbreviations and colloquial “jargon” be minimized.

5.2.2 The Project Manager supported by the assigned Project Team, consisting of, at a

minimum and as applicable, the Contract Manager, Construction Manager,

Scheduler, Estimator, Project Engineer, is responsible to ensure compliance with

this document.

5.3 Exhibits

Exhibit 5.1 – Request for Information (RFI)

Exhibit 5.2 – Request for Information Log


Page 10 of 122

5.4 RFI Flow Process


Page 11 of 122

Date: 3/17/2010

Originator:

Ref. Dwg. No:

Specification Section:

Form Number: F7503-01

ATTENTION: CC:

SUBJECT:

RECOMMENDATION:

Cost Impact: Time Impact:

Date Response Required: Submitted by:

RESPONSE:

Date: By:

RFIs (using this form) shall be corrected by lining through (crossing out) areas to be corrected, entering the new

information, and initializing and dating the change. The use of correction tape is prohibited.

Exhibit 5.1

TO:

www.whiteconstruction.com P.O. BOX 249 11993 So. S.R. 63 CLINTON, INDIANA 47842 PHONE: 800-355-9401 / 765-832-8526 FAX: 765-832-2075

REQUEST FOR

INFORMATION

RFI

Number:

http://www.whiteconstruction.com/


Page 12 of 122

White Construction Request For Information Log Form Number: F7503-02

Exhibit 5.2

RFI

# Description Requested

By

Date

Sub

Response

Requested

Received

Date

Response

Received

Other

RFI

#

Issue

Resolved

Schedule

Impact Cost

Impact C

E

# Comments

Yes No Yes No Yes No

WRFI# - XX - XXX

White RFI # Month Number

RFI NAMING CONVENTION

RFIs Summary Status Submitted Resolved Comments

RFIs to be submitted

RFIs schedule impact

RFIs cost impact

Project

Job Number

Contractor

Contact


Page 13 of 122

6.0 Procurement Control

6.1 Scope

6.1.1 This section described the control of purchasing for items and materials not

provided by the WTG supplier or the customer/client that may affect the

quality of the installed systems and components

6.2 Procurement Procedures

6.2.1 The Project Manager has total responsibility for site procurement. The

Assistant Project Manager has the responsibility for verifying site purchasing

of items and materials to be installed as part of the permanent equipment.

Through delegation the Assistant Project Manager may appoint a Project

Controls Specialist or Material Controls Specialist to perform site purchases

and procurement.

6.2.2 The Assistant Project Manager will provide purchase orders for review to

assure that provisions for traceability, identification and quality requirements

are specified for items and materials as applicable.

6.2.3 The original purchase orders are sent to the vendor either electronically or

paper copy and copies of purchase orders will be retained either by paper copy

or electronically.

6.2.4 Revisions to purchase orders will be handled in the same manner as the

original.

6.2.5 When purchase orders are issued by organizations outside of White

Construction, Inc. for material and services for the site, the issuing organization

will be required to forward a copy of the purchase order to the Field Quality

Control Manager for use in verifying quality requirements. The Project

Manager is responsible for approval for all P.O.s and can delegate the

performing duties who are direct reports, and who are qualified to perform such

duties for P.O.s up to a designated amount.

6.2.6 A copy of receipts and/or documented confirmation of purchases shall be kept

on record to verify and for review for site finances and budget.


Page 14 of 122

7.0 Document Control

7.1 Scope

7.1.1 This section describes the control system for review and distribution of

specifications, drawings, procedures, instructions and other documents.

7.2 Client Documents - The Client will furnish applicable documents as defined in the

contract. The Project Manager is responsible for conducting a review of all

Customer documents. All Customer documents will be maintained and controlled

the same as White Construction, Inc. documents unless otherwise stated in the

contract.

7.3 White Construction, Inc. Documents - The Project Manager is responsible for the

identification and preparation of documents not provided by the Client.

7.3.1 Where applicable, drawings, specifications, etc. will be uploaded, stored and

issued to the subcontractors through email or via paper copy.

7.3.2 When documents are not available, the Project Manager will assign the

preparation of or prepare such documents to meet the identified requirements.

7.3.3 The Assistant Project Manager and the Field Quality Control

Manager/Specialists are responsible for conducting a review of these

documents prior to releasing for distribution.

7.3.4 When required by contract, the Project Construction Manager will submit

documents to the Client for review by electronic means, paper copy, or other

customer defined method.

7.4 Control of Documents

7.4.1 The Project Manager has the responsibility for the controlled distribution of

project documents to the subcontractor(s) and the Contractor’s Site Manger is

responsible for issuance within the contractor’s company.

7.4.2 Uncontrolled or Draft copies of documents may be released for non-

production purposes. These documents will be marked "Uncontrolled" or

―Draft‖. Any document that is kept controlled in an electronic folder is

designated uncontrolled when downloaded from the folder of origin.

7.4.2.1 Two paper copies are received at site under a transmittal letter, or

through electronic means of the client collaboration system.

7.4.2.2 The paper copy of the transmittal letter and associated documents are

stamped with date received.


Page 15 of 122

7.4.2.3 The documents received are checked against the letter of transmittal

to assure quantity and legibility. The client is contacted to rectify any

problems.

7.4.2.4 The documents are logged into the project file log by their respective

numbers. If necessary one copy will be for distribution to the

appropriate subcontractor(s). Subcontractors that receive paper copies

are required to acknowledge within 3 working days receipt of the

associated documents.

7.4.2.5 One copy is placed in the job-site master set. One copy is placed in

the job-site drawing file. Subcontractor transmittals and associated

documents are sent out. If the document(s) received is a revision, both

obsolete copies, master and file, are stamped "Void" or "Superseded".

The voided "Master" drawings will be filed in "Void Drawings file

cabinet".

7.4.2.6 A log is kept of current documents. Exhibib 7.3 (Current Drawing

Log) or similar form shall indicate acknowledgement from

subcontractors that information was received. Past due

acknowledgements are followed up on.

7.4.2.7 A monthly printout of the Current Drawing Log will be made and

distributed to Contractor's subcontractors. This print out shall be a

report (listing) of all the latest documents Contractor has and who

they have distributed to.

7.4.2.8 All drawings, which have been released for construction, will be

marked ―Released for Construction‖ by stamp or by computer

generated markings applicable to the Digital Program. A drawing

index with revisions will be maintained at the site to assure tracking.

The Index shall be either paper copy or digitally generated through an

electronic media.

7.5 As-built documents

7.5.1 WCI’s master set (stick or electronic) shall also be used as the Red-Line (as-

built) documents. WCI for their self perform work and their subcontractors

for their work scope shall be responsible for Redlining as appropriate. The

official Redlines will remain with WCI until turned over to the client at the

end of construction.

7.5.2 Redlining will be performed as changes occur. If revisions to documents are

received without the previous changes incorporated, the later revision has to

be redlined with the previous changes. If multiple changes occur over a

period of time, they are to be separately identified and assigned a revision

number. WCI will review redlines by their subcontractors to assure

correctness and adherence to prior agreements.


Page 16 of 122

7.5.3 Final as-built drawings, in the quantity specified and incorporating all

subcontractor data shall be reproduced from the full-size and half-size

drawings maintained throughout the project and submitted to the Client

during close out procedures.

7.6 Revision of Documents

7.6.1 Revised documents shall be identified, reviewed and controlled in the same

manner as original documents in section 7.4

7.7 Documentation Transfer or Forwarding

7.7.1 Documents can be transferred by electronic means or by paper copy.

7.7.2 Electronic transfer or forwarding – A copy of the transfer via such as e-mail,

shall represent the transfer record or letter of Transmittal.

7.7.3 Documents transferred by paper copy shall be transferred or forwarded with a

Letter of Transmittal similar to Exhibit 7.1 and entered in to a Letter of

Transmittal Log Exhibit 7.2.

7.7.4 The White Assistant Project Manger is responsible for the completeness and

accuracy of White Construction, Inc. Letters of Transmittals and the Log.

Each Subcontractor is responsible for the completeness and accuracy of their

Letters of Transmittals and the Log.

7.8 Digital Photography Documentation

7.8.1 WCI requires photo documentation of the various stages of the construction

and erection process.

7.8.2 Although not practical to photograph every inspected item, WCI’s policy is

to provide representative photographic documentation of each definable

feature of work or phase of work.

7.8.3 By taking photos on a frequent and regular basis and organizing them

logically and labeling them accurately, a complete pictorial record can be

assembled that will document specific construction assemblies comply with

project requirements.

7.8.4 Digital photography will be in accordance to the digital photography policy.

7.9 Exhibits

Exhibit 7.1 – Letter of Transmittal (LOT)

Exhibit 7.2 – Letter of Transmittal Log

Exhibit 7.3—Current Drawing Log


Page 17 of 122

11993 S. State Road 63 P.O. Box 249 Clinton, IN 47842 (800) 355-9401 or (765) 832-8526 Fax (765) 832-2975 Date: Transmittal Number:

We are sending you:

ATTACHED FORWARDED SEPARATELY VIA ____________________________

Shop Drawings Plans Brochures Samples

Copy of Letter Change Order

Specifications Other: _________________________________________________

QUANITY

INDENT. NO. DATE DESCRIPTION

THESE ARE TRANSMITTED as checked below:

For Approval Approved Resubmit copies for approval

For your use Approved as noted Submit copies for distribution

As Requested Returned for corrections Returned corrected prints

For review and comment other

_____________________________________________________________________________________

Remarks:

Exhibit 7.1

PLEASE NOTIFY SENDER IF INFORMATION IS NOT CORRECT

LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL

To: From:

Re:

c.c. Received by:


Page 18 of 122

Letter Of Transmittal Log

No. Transmittal No. Individual Sent to Company Sent to Sent By Received Date

Exhibit 7.2


Page 19 of 122

CURRENT DRAWING LOG

Project: Form Number: WCQA.200.04

Project Number: Date: Time:

Location:

Report Initiator: Company:

Issued To:

Document Description Date of Issue

Rev No. Status Issued to:

Receiver Acknowledgement Date Responsible Person

Notes:

1. Document Receivers are required to acknowledge within 3 working days receipt of associated documents. 2. Under Status, Documents are to be labeled either: Current; Void, Superseded; Master, Not for Construction, or Released for Construction.

ADDITIONAL REMARKS:

Exhibit 7.3


Page 20 of 122

8.0 Control of Client/Customer Supplied Materials and Services

8.1 Scope

8.1.1 This section describes the system used to control the receiving and storage of

materials and items provided by the Client/Customer, WTG Supplier, and for

subcontracted services.

8.2 Receiving Inspection

8.2.1 Where applicable the WTG Supplier or Project Manager is responsible for

receiving inspection consisting of the following:

a) Visual checking for damage and correct quantities

b) Unloading and handling

c) Storing products in appropriate storage areas

d) Purchase Order requirements

8.2.2 When receiving components, a visual check will be made of the WTG’s

manufactured supplied components. Any on site measurements required to

verify proper manufacturing tolerances of any specific WTG supplied

component will be the sole responsibility of the WTG manufacture or the

third party who manufactured the supplied component. WCI will not accept

responsibility, take possession of, or be responsible for the purchase of any

special tooling required to check the WTG’s original manufacturing

requirements or tolerances outlined in the component manufacturing

specifications or fabrication process.

8.2.3 When receiving materials and items a Receiving Inspection Report (RIR) will

be generated by the receiving company. Specific WTG Supplier formatted

RIRs will be used for the respective WTG Equipment received. The WTG

Supplier will provide specific Formatted RIRs to White Construction, Inc.

where applicable. A general RIR form may be used for specific items not

addressed. All RIRs will be logged onto a receiving log. (RIRs and the RIR

log are at the end of this section.)

8.2.4 Upon completion of receiving inspection, any discrepancies will be reviewed.

If received material has been damaged or does not meet specifications or

drawings, a report will be issued to the Vendor by the WTG Supplier Site

Manager or the assigned WTG Supplier Technical Advisor (TA) for

rectification of any anomalies. Alternatively, a Nonconformance (NCR) can

be issued to address any unacceptable condition of received material.

8.2.5 Inspection Reports available to WTG Supplier and WTG Supplier’s Site

Manager will make Receiving Inspection Reports available to the Customer/

Client when required.


Page 21 of 122

8.2.6 It is the responsibility of White Construction, Inc. or the subcontractor

receiving the material to immediately notify WTG Supplier of any material

that has been damaged and to document those findings.

8.3 Storage and Preventative Maintenance

8.3.1 Storage of equipment shall be implemented in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommended instructions. Where applicable, an

environmentally controlled storage facility will be installed where required. If

warranted, the lay down area(s) will be mapped for easy material locating.

8.3.2 Where applicable, a preventative maintenance program will initiate to

perform the mechanical, electrical and lubrication requirements on equipment

prior to start up. All preventative maintenance will be document on when

and what and by whom the maintenance was performed. The documentation

will list the referencing Site Turbine Unit No., Turbine Serial Number,

description of the Equipment being serviced and the Serial and Model

number of the equipment being serviced. If the WTG manufacture has a

specific formatted document to record the long-term storage of equipment,

this document will be used to record the preventive maintenance program.

8.4 Overages, Shortages and Damages

8.4.1 Specific WTG Supplier formatted OS&D reports will be used for the

respective WTG Equipment. The WTG Supplier will provide specific

Formatted OS&D reports to White Construction, Inc. where applicable. A

general OS&D report form may be used for specific items not addressed and

can be generated by the White Construction, Inc., Material Coordinator or

Project Manager and forwarded to the parties identified below to identify the

extent of damage to a specific piece of equipment (both WTG Supplier and

BOP supplied equipment), and recommend any action required, (i.e.: repair,

replacement, etc.). If necessary, a Non-Conformance Report can be

generated to track on-going or consistent problems, deficiencies or

discrepancies. Shortages are to be identified indicating quantity of shortage,

specific equipment, etc. OS&D reports shall be routed as follows:

8.4.1.1 Material Supplied Direct or WTG Supplier Furnished Material – File

a report with the WTG Site Manager so resolution can be initiated.

Balance Of Plant Material – Contact the Vendor/Supplier and/or the

White Construction, Inc.’s Buyer. The OS&D Log provides a

running tally of OS&D reports generated to date to assist site

management to identify potential negative schedule impacts from

damaged or material shipped short (Exhibit 8.8) .

8.4.1.2 Missing Component Sheet (MCS) - This form is used to identify

missing quantities of components discovered during inspection

inventory of received material/equipment (Exhibit 8.9).


Page 22 of 122

8.5 Subcontracting/Services

8.5.1 Labor subcontracts may be used for the purpose of obtaining the necessary

craft labor at the site. Such personnel will work under the supervision of the

Project Manager who has the authority to assign or remove such personnel.

8.5.2 In concurrence with WTG Supplier, the Project Manager is responsible for

review, approval and control of service subcontractors. All companies

subcontracted to the contractor will supply their own quality plan, inspection

and testing plan for their project-specific scope of work to the Project

Manager and shall work in accordance with the contractor’s quality

program and as such the contractor shall enforce their activities.

8.5.3 The WCI Field Quality Control Manager is responsible to assure compliance

with applicable Codes and Standards and will also review and approve

Testing Companies and Laboratories procedures and personnel.

8.5.4 Service/Material, and/or subcontractors may be used to provide construction

services, special services or materials during activities. These subcontractors

will function under a quality program commensurate with the work to be

performed and the materials provided. The subcontractor’s quality control

program will be equivalent or exceed White Construction, Inc.’s quality plan.

The subcontractor’s quality control plan will be submitted to the Field

Quality Control Manager for review prior to performing any work.

8.5.5 Testing agencies will submit appropriate certifications and credentials to the

Field Quality Control Manager prior to performing any testing on site.

8.5.6 Before being considered for an invitation to bid, subcontractors shall go

through a pre approval phase to review availability, Quality Control, Safety,

Financial Capacity Eligibility and previous work history.

8.5.7 The Field Quality Control Manager or his designee is responsible for the

review and approval of subcontractor’s QA/QC program prior to the issuance

of purchase orders and contracts, and to schedule audits commensurate with

the scope of the work to be performed. Other White Construction, Inc.

department managers are responsible for the approval of the contractor’s

written practice and documentation as applicable.

8.5.8 Purchase order/contracts for subcontracted services will delineate applicable

quality requirements for the performance of work of the subcontractor. The

deliverables, requirements and terms and conditions or the services shall be

plainly stated in the contract or Purchase Order (PO). All contracts and PO’s

for the project shall be reviewed and directed by the Project Manager or his

designee such as the Project Construction Manager or Assistant Project

Manager.


Page 23 of 122

8.5.9 The White Construction, Inc. Field Quality Control Manager is responsible

for maintaining a program of quality surveillance on site subcontractor's

activity, when applicable. Site QC personnel will perform inspections and

verifications based on individual subcontractor's performance, to assure

compliance to contract, drawings and specification/codes.

8.6 Exhibits

Exhibit 8.1 – RIR Log

Exhibit 8.2 – General RIR (Use for BOP)

Exhibit 8.3 – Blade RIR

Exhibit 8.4 – Hub RIR & Repair

Exhibit 8.5 – Turbine RIR

Exhibit 8.6 – Control Console RIR

Exhibit 8.7 – Tower Section RIR (Can be used for top, mid and base sections)

Exhibit 8.8 – OS&D Log

Exhibit 8.9 – Missing Component Sheet


Page 24 of 122

RECEIVING INSPECTION REPORT LOG

Form Number: WCQA.201.00

Project Project No Client

RIR # Date Received DESCRIPTION UNIT VENDOR DRAWING

NUMBER

Comments NCR

Number

Exhibit 8.1


Page 25 of 122

RECEIVING INSPECTION REPORT FOR PARTS SHIPPED LOOSE


Project Project No RIR No.:

Shipper: Date Shipped:

Carrier: P. O. No.

Vendor: Rail Car No.:

NCR #: Truck No.:

P. O. Item

No.

Quantity

Received

Unit Description of Material Tag No.: Stored

In

Comments:

Inspector Date:

Exhibit 8.2


Page 26 of 122

BLADE RECEIVING INSPECTION REPORT

Form Number WCQA.203.04

Project: Turbine Location:

Date Arrived: Time:

Time:

Blade Serial #:

Date Unloaded: Time:

Set #:

Fiberglass Damage

Trailing Edge

Yes Fiberglass Damage

Leading Edge

Yes Dirty

Normal

No No Excessive

Lightning Tip Damage Yes

T-Bolt Damage Yes Fin Damage Yes

No No No

Flange Damage Yes Paint/Gel Coat Damage Yes Root End Dirty Yes

No No No

Description and Location of Damages (indicate location of damages on above sketch):

Inspected By:

Company Print Sign/Date

High Pressure Side

Low Pressure Side

LPS HPS

Exhibit 8.3

(if applicable)


Page 27 of 122

HUB RECEIVING INSPECTION REPORT

Form Number: WCQA204.04


Date Arrived: Time:

Time:

Serial #:


Other:

Paint Damage Bearing Surface Dirty Saddle/Strap Marks

OK OK Normal Yes

Damaged Damaged Excessive No

Fiberglass Nose Cone Handrail Hatch Hardware

OK OK OK OK Complete

Didn’t Count

Damaged Damaged Damaged Damaged Deficient

Shrink Wrap Oil Leaks Limit Switch Control Panel

OK Yes OK OK

Damaged NO Damaged Damaged

Items Removed:

Description of Damages: ______________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Comments: ________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Inspected By: ______________________________________________________________________________

Print Name Sign Date of Inspection

Exhibit 8.4

Exhibit 8.4


Page 28 of 122

NACELLE RECEIVING INSPECTION REPORT Form Number: WCQA.205.04


Date Arrived: Time:

Time:

Serial #:


Other#:

Dirty Inside Dirty Outside Hand Rails Met-Mast Ladder

Normal Normal OK OK OK

Excessive Excessive Damaged Damaged Damaged

Hatch(s) Instrumentation Hardware Hatch/Window Bolts-Nuts

for Hub

OK OK OK OK OK

Damaged Damaged Missing Damaged Short

Fiberglass Hub Adapter Shrink Wrap Pictures Taken Packaged Material

OK OK OK Yes OK

Damaged Damaged Damaged No Damaged

Description of Damages: _____________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Comments:_________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Inspected By:_______________________________________________________________________________

Print Name Sign Date of Inspection Exhibit 8.5


Page 29 of 122

CONTROL CONSOLE RECEIVING INSPECTION REPORT



Date Arrived: Time:

Time:

Serial #:


Other #:

Packing List OK Shrink Wrap OK Cabinet Doors OK

Missing Damaged Damaged

Hardware Complete Console Stand OK Sheet Metal Damage OK

Deficient Damaged Damaged

Paint Damage OK Cable Damage OK Saddle/Strap Marks OK

Damaged Damaged Damaged

Walkway Ok Hand Rail OK Pictures Taken Yes

Damaged Damaged No

Comments: __________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Inspected By: ___________________________________________________________________________

Print Name Sign Date of Inspection

Exhibit 8.6


Page 30 of 122


Page 31 of 122

OS & D LOG Form Number:WCQA.208.00

Project Date

Project No. Contact Name

Contact Phone Contact E-mail

MCS

No.

Description QTY

Short

Contact

Name

Contact

Company

Contact

Phone No

Date

Expected

Date

Received

Exhibit 8.8

PAGE OF


Page 32 of 122

MISSING COMPONENT SHEET (MCS)

Form Number:WCQA.209.00

Project

Date

Project No. Contact Name

Contact Phone Contact E-mail

The following list is notice of discrepancy between expected inventory and inventory received.

Noted is the description and quantity of items missing with associated pad #

Pad

Number

Component Description Expected

QTY

Received

QTY

QTY

Short

Part Number

Inventoried By

Print Sign Date Company

Accepted By

Print Sign Date Company

Exhibit 8.9

Report No.

PAGE OF


Page 33 of 122

9.0 Bolting

9.1 Scope

9.1.1 This section describes the methods used for bolting installation and

inspection activities.

9.2 Structural Bolting

9.2.1 Structural bolting will be installed in accordance with the applicable contract

specification, design drawing, ASTM (American Society for Testing and

Materials) or AISC (American Institute for Steel Construction) standards.

9.2.2 The Field Quality Control Manager/Specialists will be responsible for

random inspections of structural bolting to assure that proper installation

(material, washers, thread engagement, etc…) and tensioning has been

performed.

9.2.3 The scope of these inspections will be expanded if discrepant bolting is

observed.

9.2.4 The Field Quality Control Manager will document and maintain records of

these inspections when required.

9.3 Base Tensioning

9.3.1 The anchor bolt post-tensioning requirements will be specified by the

structural engineer.

9.3.2 The anchor bolt post-tensioning process will begin once the grout cylinder or

cube breaks have been performed and demonstrating the installed grout has

reached the rated minimum compressive strength.

9.3.3 Base tensioning to the specified values will require the use of a calibrated

liquid-filled pressure gage.

9.3.4 During the tensioning process, Exhibit 9.1 (Joint Control Connection Form)

will be utilized to verify the correct tightening procedure and to track all tools

and tooling information.

9.3.5 At the beginning of each day of base tensioning, the equipment used to

perform the tensioning will be tested on a Skidmore to insure that the

equipment performs at the established value designated by the structural

engineer. Exhibit 9.2 (KIP Verification Form) will be used to document each

test and tooling information.

9.3.6 If the results of the KIP Verification test find the equipment not to be within

the tolerance limit of plus or minus 5 (five) percent of the specified value, the


Page 34 of 122

tower that the equipment was last used on will be rechecked to verify that the

work performed is within compliance.

9.3.7 Prior to base tensioning, the nuts and threads will be marked with white spray

paint. This will serve as a quick visual test to insure that all the anchor bolts

have been tensioned. A gap of unpainted thread will appear and indicate that

the bolts have been properly tensioned.

9.3.8 Using the established value, the tensioning crew will perform production of

anchor bolts according to the Anchor Bolt Post-Tensioning Procedure (WCI

document WCQA.316.01).

9.3.9 Non-conforming conditions will be processed in accordance with Section 16

of this plan.

9.4 Flange Bolts

9.4.1 Flange bolting will be installed in accordance with the applicable contract

specification, design drawing, or applicable code and standards.

9.4.2 All flange bolts will be tightened with an electric torque gun to insure the

highest level of accuracy +/- 3%.

9.4.3 Prior to installation, the wind turbine manufacture will confirm and verify

that the grade of bolt and washer meets the specified requirements for each

application. The installer will verify that the washer and bolt material meets

the specified requirements and is free of contaminants. (Note: Assure proper

bolt lubrication if required)

9.4.4 Bolts, washers and nuts will be installed to a loose fit initially and then

tightened to a snug fit with an electric impact gun.

9.4.5 Prior to final tightening, a visual check will be performed to insure that the

washers have been installed properly with the bevel side facing the bolt head

and nut.

9.4.6 During the tightening process Exhibit 9.1 (Joint Control Connection Form)


and tooling information. Exhibit 9.1.1 (Joint Control Connection Form Blade

to Hub) will be utilized to verify the correct tightening procedure and to track

all tools and tooling information specifically for the blade to hub assembly

process.

9.4.7 Tightening will be performed in a diametric double cross (+) pattern (See

Exhibit 9.3). The first set of five bolts will be tightened at one time.

Working clockwise, the second set of five bolts will then be tightened 180

degrees from the first five set of bolts. The third set of five bolts will then be

tightened 90 degrees from the second set of five bolts. The forth set of five

bolts will then be tightened 180 degrees from the third set of five bolts. One


Page 35 of 122

cross pattern of the double cross pattern is now complete. The second cross

pattern will start 45 degrees clockwise from the fourth set of five bolts. This

first cross pattern will then be repeated using the same methodology as

described in the first cross tightening pattern. When the second cross pattern

is completed, the balance of the bolts will then be tightened working in a

clockwise position after the eighth set of 5 bolts have been tightened.

9.4.8 After each bolt has been tightened, an easily identifiable match mark will be

painted on each bolt. The mark will extend from the center of the bolt across

the face of the nut onto the washer, then down on to the tower flange.

9.4.9 When final tightening has been completed, a ten percent torque check will be

performed that same day that the flange achieved the final torque value. In

this test, a calibrated torque wrench and multiplier will be used to check 10%

of the flange bolts. The torque wrench and multiplier will be set to the same

torque setting as what the bolts were tightened to. If the match-mark moves

less than 20° (one-third [1/3] from nut flat to flat) the bolt is to considered to

have passed the ten percent test. A red match mark will be then be painted on

the bolt in the same manner described earlier to indicate that the bolt has

passed the 10% test.

9.4.10 If a single bolt moves greater than 20° (one-third [1/3] from nut flat to flat)

during the 10% test, the flange will be considered to be improperly tightened

and the connection will have to be re-tightened 100%. Each bolt will again

be match marked. A 10% torque check will then be performed. This process

will be repeated until the bolted connection passes.

9.4.11 The Field Quality Control Manager will be responsible for random

inspections of flange bolting to assure that proper installation, tensioning and

match-marking has been performed.


observed.



9.4.14 Bolt tightening to specified torque values will require the use of a calibrated

torque wrench.

9.4.15 The Field Quality Control Manager will maintain copies of the calibration

records on file.

9.4.16 Hand torque wrenches will be checked daily. Exhibit 9.4 (Hand Wrench

Daily Calibration Verification Log) or a similar form will be used to verify

that the torque wrench performs within tolerance. Tolerance will be defined

as a value that is plus or minus (+/-) 4% of the target value.


Page 36 of 122

9.4.17 Due to human inconstancies when administering the torque test, each wrench

may be tested twice before the wrench is considered to be out of tolerance

where it will be subject to the guidelines outlined in the Calibration Program.

See section 14.2 for additional details.


of this plan.

9.5 Nacelle Torque

9.5.1 The nacelle will be tightened in the same pattern as described earlier in the

tower connections.

9.5.2 Ten percent testing will follow the same methodologies as the flange ten

percent check.

9.6 Rotor Torque

9.6.1 Because two-thirds (2/3) of the rotor bolts are blocked at any given time

either by equipment or by tool clearance issues, the Rotor will be tightened in

one-third (1/3) sections. See Exhibit 9.5 for further details.

9.6.2 Prior to rotor installation, the wind turbine manufacture will confirm and

verify that the grade of bolt and washer meets the specified requirements for

each application.

9.6.3 All accessible bolts, washers and nuts will be installed to a loose fit initially

and then tightened to a snug fit with an electric impact gun.

9.6.4 All accessible rotor bolts will be tightened with an electric torque gun to

insure the highest level of accuracy. If not possible due to clearance issues or

physical improbabilities, rotor bolts can be tightened by hydraulics or other

means.

9.6.5 Prior to final tightening, a visual check will be performed to insure that the

washers have been installed properly with the bevel side faces the bolt head

and nut.

9.6.6 During the tightening process Exhibit 9.1 (Joint Control Connection Form)


and tooling information.

9.6.7 Rotor tightening to the specified values supplied by the wind turbine

manufacture will require the use of calibrated tools.

9.6.8 Tightening of the rotor bolts will be performed in three sections. The

sequences of the sections are variable due to access limitations. The first

section of bolts will be tightened at the correct value. Once finished with the


Page 37 of 122

section, the bolts will be checked for bolt relaxation. This process will be

repeated again for the remaining two sections. .

9.6.9 After each bolt has been tightened, an easily identifiable match mark will be

painted on each bolt. The mark will extend from the center of the bolt across

the face of the nut onto the washer, then down on to the flange.

9.6.10 When final tightening has been completed for the three rotor sections, a ten

percent torque check will be performed. In this test a calibrated torque

wrench and multiplier will be used to check 10% of the rotor bolts. The

torque wrench and multiplier will be set to the same torque setting as what

the bolts were tightened to. If the match-mark moves less than 20° (one-third

[1/3] from nut flat to flat) the bolt is to considered to have passed the ten

percent test. A red match mark will be then be painted on the bolt in the

same manner described earlier to indicate that the bolt has been 10% tested.

9.6.11 If a single bolt moves greater than 20° (one-third [1/3] from nut flat to flat)

during the 10% test, the flange will be considered to be improperly tightened

and the connection will have to be re-tightened 100%. Each bolt will again

be match-marked. A 10% torque check will then be performed. This process

will be repeated until the bolted connection passes.

9.6.12 The Field Quality Control Manager will be responsible for random

inspections of rotor bolting to assure that proper installation and tensioning

has been performed.


observed.



9.6.15 Bolt tightening to specified torque values will require the use of a calibrated

torque wrench.

9.6.16 The Field Quality Control Manager will maintain copies of the calibration

records on file.

9.6.17 Hand torque wrenches will be checked daily. Exhibit 9.4 (Hand Wrench

Daily Calibration Verification Log) or a similar form will be used to verify

that the hand torque wrench performs within tolerance. Tolerance will be

defined as a value that is plus or minus (+/-) 4% of the target value.

9.6.18 Due to human inconstancies when administering the torque test, each wrench

may be tested twice before the wrench is considered to be out of tolerance

where it will be subject to the guidelines outlined in the Calibration Program.

See section 14.2 for additional details.


Page 38 of 122

9.6.19 Electric torque wrenches will be checked daily. Exhibit 9.4.1 (E-rad Daily

Calibration Verification Log) or a similar form will be used to verify that the

electric torque wrench performs within tolerance. Tolerance will be defined

as a value that is plus or minus (+/-) 4% of the target value. Out of tolerance

conditions will be subject to the guidelines outlined in the Calibration

Program.


of this plan.

9.7 Wind Turbine Bolting (General)

9.7.1 All bolt connections which are part of the Wind Turbine Generator

Equipment including the Yaw Platforms, ladder sections, and electrical trays,

etc. are to be installed in accordance with the WTG Suppliers Installation

Manual requirements.

9.7.2 Anchor bolts will be tightened in accordance to the foundation structural

engineer’s requirements.

9.7.3 A torque/post tensioning checklist the same as or similar to Exhibit 9.1 will

be completed during the installation phase of the WTG.

9.7.4 All torque wrenches will be entered in the Material and Test Log in section

14. In addition, multipliers used will also be tracked. Torque wrenches will

be tested daily Exhibit 9.5 (Hand Wrench Daily Calibration Verification

Log).

9.7.5 Hydraulic wrenches will be checked daily for accuracy prior to each use.

Exhibit 9.4.2 (Hydraulic Daily Calibration Verification Log will be used to

verify that the hydraulic wrench and pump performs within tolerance. The

Torque head and hydraulic pump will be tested as one complete unit and

identified as so. Tolerance will be defined as a value that is plus or minus

(+/-) 8% of the target value.

9.8 Exhibits

Exhibit 9.1 – Joint Control Connection Form (General)

Exhibit 9.1.1 – Joint Control Connection Form (Blade to Hub)

Exhibit 9.2 – KIP Verification Form

Exhibit 9.3 – Bolt Flange Tightening Sequence

Exhibit 9.4 – Hand Wrench Daily Calibration Verification Log

Exhibit 9.4.1 – E-rad Daily Calibration Verification Log

Exhibit 9.4.2—Hydraulic Daily Calibration Verification Log

Exhibit 9.5 - Rotor Bolt Tightening Sequence


Page 39 of 122

JOINT CONTROL CONNECTION FORM


Project Name: Project Number:

Section Connected: Date:

Placement Location (WTG #): Temperature:

Component Verification

YES NO N/A 1.1 Contact points correct? (no gaps)

1.2 Any damage to the threads, bolts, washers, or nuts?

1.3 Bolt make and manufacture:

1.4 Nut make and manufacture:

1.5 Washer make and manufacture:

2.0 Tightening Procedure YES NO N/A

2.1 Washers installed properly (bevel facing toward bolt head and nut)?

2.2 Nuts installed properly (wording facing up)?

2.3 Tightening operation in compliance with approved procedure?

2.5 Tower wall protected?

2.6 List Torque value:

2.7 Bolts marked with paint pen after tightening?

2.8 Bolts numbered?

2.9 10% check performed?

2.10 If yes to 2.9, Name of person performing test:

2.11 Did 10% check pass according to specified procedure?

2.12 If NO, how many bolts failed:

Average nut movement:

2.13 If applicable, 100% re-torque performed?

2.14 Bolts marked with a different color (red) after 10% test?

3.0 Tooling Information

3.1 Tool used: Tool Serial Number:

3.2 Head used: Head Serial Number:

3.3 Pump used: Pump Serial Number:

3.4 Pump Pressure:

3.5 Multiplier type: Multiplier Serial Number:

3.6 Torque wrench: Torque Wrench Serial Number:

Comments:

Inspected by:

Company/Title: Date:

Exhibit 9.1


Page 40 of 122


Page 41 of 122

Exhibit 9.2


Page 42 of 122

Bolt Flange Tightening Sequence

Exhibit 9.3

5 Bolts

5 Bolts

5 B

olts 5

B

olts

5 B

olts

5 Bolts

5 Bolts

5 Bolts


Page 43 of 122

HAND WRENCH DAILY CALIBRATION VERIFICATION LOG Wrench Serial Number Wrench Size Wrench Number Wrench Manufacture/Model


Day: S M T W T F S Date:

Pull # Wrench Setting Result Difference

+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT

PASS FAIL RETEST AVERAGE AVERAGE

TEST CONDUCTED BY: __________________________________



+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT





+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT





+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT





+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT



Exhibit 9.4


Page 44 of 122

E-RAD DAILY CALIBRATION VERIFICATION LOG Tool Serial Number Tool Size White Tool Number Tool Manufacture/Model



Pull # Tool Setting Result Difference

+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT





+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT





+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT





+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT





+/- 4%


+/- 4%

TEST RESULT



Exhibit 9.4.1


Page 45 of 122

HYDRAULIC WRENCH DAILY CALIBRATION VERIFICATION LOG Wrench Serial Number Wrench Size White Tool Number Wrench Manufacture/Model



Test # Wrench Setting Result Difference

+/- 8%


+/- 8%

TEST RESULT


TEST CONDUCTED BY: ___________________ Pump # _________ Head # _________



+/- 8%


+/- 8%

TEST RESULT


TEST CONDUCTED BY: ___________________ Pump # __________ Head # _________



+/- 8%


+/- 8%

TEST RESULT





+/- 8%


+/- 8%

TEST RESULT





+/- 8%


+/- 8%

TEST RESULT



Exhibit 9.4.2


Page 46 of 122

ROTOR BOLT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE

Because two thirds of the rotor bolts are blocked at any given time either by equipment or due

to tool clearance issues, the Rotor will be tightened in 1/3 segments. The green triangle is the

starting point where all the bolts will be tightened from a clockwise position. Two passes will

be made to account for bolt relaxation before moving on to the next section. The red and blue

triangles will vary in sequence according to wind direction. The tightening processes for these

sections will be performed in the same manner as the first section. A ten percent test will be

administered after all sections have been tightened.

Exhibit 9.5


Page 47 of 122

10.0 Civil

10.1 Scope

10.1.1 The purpose of this section is to define the program of inspection necessary

to achieve the specified degree of quality for the installation of roads and

crane pads, the placing of reinforcing steel, the placing, finishing and curing

of concrete and grout.

10.1.2 Testing laboratories performing the tests shall be certified in accordance with

the specifications and applicable code.

10.1.3 All concrete and grout testing practices and methodologies shall follow ACI

and ASTM standards, or CSA (the Canadian equivalent), when concrete

cylinders or grout cubes are used.

10.1.4 The number of concrete cylinders for testing will be determined by each

individual job site’s specific requirements. For example: a typical site

generally requires a concrete test break at 7, 14 and 28 days. However,

depending upon the construction schedule additional concrete test breaks may

be required for backfill, grout placement and tower erection and may require

additional breaks at 1, 3, 7, 14 and 28 days.

10.2 Roads, Entryways, Site Clearing

10.2.1 Throughout the construction process, Exhibit 10.0 (Field Tile Repair Report)

will be used to track and document all damaged field tiles during trenching

and construction operations.

10.2.2 Roads and entries will be installed in accordance the specifications and local

department of transportation requirements where applicable. The inspection

form similar to Exhibit 10.1 (Road Installation Survey) will be used for

inspection of road entries.

10.2.3 Crane pads and truck turnarounds will be constructed in accordance with

specifications and inspected prior to use. The inspection form in Exhibit 10.2

(Crane Pad/Truck Turnaround) will be used to perform pre-use inspections.

10.2.4 A testing laboratory certified in accordance with the specifications will

perform compaction tests to ensure that the sub grade and base meets the

requirements of the specifications.

10.2.5 All specific WTG locations shall be verified by survey and cleared as

required by the specifications.

10.2.6 Exploratory trenches for the location and verification of existing underground

utilities will meet OSHA requirements where required. The inspection form

similar to Exhibit 10.3 (Exploratory Trench Inspection) will be used for


Page 48 of 122

inspection of road entries or equipment crossings for verification of existing

utilities when required.

10.2.7 Throughout the course of construction, the affected jobsite and supporting

sites shall be inspected at least once per month or when the amount of rainfall

is greater than one half inch (0.5) in any twenty-four hour period. The

inspection form similar to Exhibit 10.4 (Erosion Control Inspection Report)

will be used for the erosion control inspection.

10.3 Concrete Pre-placement

10.3.1 Prior to concrete placement, Exhibit 10.13 Concrete Pre-Pour Comprehensive

Strength Verification Report will be completed to verify that the approved

concrete foundation mix design(s) meets or exceeds the requirements and

specifications as determined by the structural engineer.

10.3.2 Prior to concrete placement, a Pre-Placement Inspection Checklist will be

prepared for mud slabs Exhibit 10.5 (Concrete Mud Slab Pre-Placement

Inspection), foundations Exhibit 10.6 (Concrete Foundation Pre-Placement

Inspection) Exhibit 10.7 (Concrete Foundation Corrugated Metal Pipe Pre-

Placement Inspection{if applicable}); Exhibit 10.9 (Concrete Pedestal Form

Placement Inspection); Exhibit 10.10 (Concrete Embedded Ring Placement

Inspection); & Exhibit 10.11 (Anchor Bolt Projection Verification Inspection

Report) will be completed, which documents verification of proper

excavation, forms, sub-bases, reinforcing steel, anchor bolt alignment and all

other related material is in compliance with the applicable codes, standards,

drawings and specifications.

10.3.3 The concrete mix design shall be reviewed and approved by the Structural

Design Engineer prior to any placements. White Construction, Inc. will have

written mix design approval prior to initial placement of concrete.

10.3.4 Prior to any concrete placement, the Batch Plant will be visited, inspected

and approved to the capacity and ability to meet the mix design requirements

prior to placement. During the batching of concrete, the Field Quality

Control Manager will periodically inspect the batch plant operation to verify

that materials are stored, handled, measured, batched, mixed and transported

properly. Exhibit 10.19 (Batch Plant Inspection) form will be completed to

document the initial inspection and periodical inspections.

10.3.5 Batching to placement time is to be verified to be within code limits.

10.3.6 All mill certificates for reinforcement steel placement will be collected by the

contractor or subcontractor (if applicable) and be presented to the site Quality

Control Manager, who will then file the mill certificates into the final

turnover package.


Page 49 of 122

10.3.7 Prior to concrete placement, a concrete pre-construction conference will be

held to determine and allocate responsibilities of the entire construction team.

10.4 Concrete Placement

10.4.1 A testing laboratory certified in accordance with the specifications will

perform the required tests to ensure the concrete meets the requirements of

the specifications and applicable codes. Use of certified field-testing

technicians and laboratory personnel will be required on all tests and

inspections. The reporting of these tests will be performed in a timely

manner. The testing laboratory will supply these results to the site Quality

Control Manager, who will then circulate the results to the concrete supplier,

the project manager, and if required to the Client.

10.4.2 The testing laboratory will be held responsible for deficiencies in its testing

procedures.

10.4.3 The testing laboratory will meet ASTM C 1077 criteria for laboratories

testing concrete and concrete aggregates and be inspected by the Cement and

Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL) or an equivalent program. The

testing agency will furnish qualified personnel, appropriate facilities,

instruments, and testing devices as necessary.

10.4.4 The testing laboratory will function under a quality program commensurate

with the work to be performed and the services to be provided. The

laboratory’s quality control program will be equivalent or exceed White

Construction, Inc.’s/H.B. White Inc’s quality plan. A copy of the testing

laboratory’s certifications will be kept on file.

10.4.5 Field testing personnel must have a current ACI Grade I Field Testing

Technician certification or equivalent. Any field testing technician violating

the ASTM C 31 (Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Field) standard for concrete preparation will be replaced

immediately and will be barred from the site for the duration of the project.

10.4.6 White Construction, Inc will reserve the right to remove any employee from

the site as they see fit.

10.4.7 All test results that do not meet project requirements will be flagged and

forwarded to the Site Quality manager for immediate correction.

10.4.8 Laboratory personnel must have the ACI Grade I and II Laboratory Testing

Technician and/or ACI Strength Testing Certification, or equivalent.

10.4.9 In general, the ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in

accordance with ―Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete‖ (ASTM C94 or

CSA A23.1-04/A23.2-04 [Canadian equivalent]).


Page 50 of 122

10.4.10 All concrete test cylinders shall be temporary stored in a pre determined

vibration free storage area prior to removal from the site for testing. All

concrete test cylinders shall be temporarily stored in accordance to ASTM C

31 or CSA A23.1-04/A23.2-04 (Canadian equivalent).

10.4.11 Any concrete compression tests, which does not meet the requirements of

specifications, shall be entered into a nonconformance and reviewed for

disposition by the Project Manager.

10.4.12 Technicians and inspectors shall be certified to the requirement of the Project

specifications and the governing code.

10.4.13 All concrete placements will be controlled with a Concrete Foundation

Control Form (Exhibit 10.8) by site QC just prior to and during the placement

of concrete.

10.4.14 The field testing and sampling of concrete and the amount of samples to be

taken will be determined on site and shall meet the requirements of the

project specifications, ASTM C 31, CSA A23.1-04/A23.2-04 (Canadian

equivalent) and applicable code.

10.4.15 The number of concrete field cylinders taken will be determined by each

individual job site’s specific requirements.

10.4.16 Truck delivery tickets shall be inspected for the correct Batch Mix Design

Number; the time the truck left the batch plant and the air and water content

of the mix. Any truck ticked without the Dispatched time from the mix plant,

showing a dispatch time greater than allowed or listing the wrong batch

number will be rejected, not allowed to pour and turned away from the site.

10.4.17 Any water added on site will be recorded on the concrete ticket. The amount

of water and location of where the load is placed will be noted on the ticket.

10.4.18 Truck delivery tickets shall be collected and kept as part of the project

documentation package.

10.4.19 The Field Quality Control Manager is responsible for the collection of

documents and the inspections.

10.4.20 Upon the completion of the foundation, Exhibit 10.12 (Concrete Post Pour

Inspection Report) will be used to verify post-pour measurements. This form

will also be used to report and track defects and or abnormalities in

accordance with Section 16 (Non Conformance Reporting) if applicable.

10.4.21 Record of concrete test results will be logged in Exhibit 10.14 (Concrete Test

Result Log) or an equivalent format issued by the testing laboratory.

10.4.22 After positive test breaks validate that the foundation has met the

comprehensive strength requirements, Exhibit 10.15 (Backfill Foundation


Page 51 of 122

Inspection Report) shall be completed. Lifts will be installed according to

project specifications. Compaction tests will be performed according to

project specifications.

10.4.23 When a foundation is completed and all inspections and tests are found

acceptable, a ―Form of Foundation Completion Certificate‖ (Exhibit 10.16)

will be completed unless the contractual agreement states that a specific job

descriptive form will be utilized.

10.4.24 After the wind turbine site has been successfully restored, a ―Form of

Reclamation Completion Certificate‖ (Exhibit 10.17) will be completed

unless the contractual agreement states that a specific job descriptive form

will be utilized. Exhibit 10.18 (Record of Property Inspection) may be

utilized as an addendum to Exhibit 10.17 to record the acceptance by the

specified property owner that all restoration work has been performed and

accepted by the effected owner(s).

10.5 Exhibits

Exhibit 10.0 – Field Tile Repair Report

Exhibit 10.1 – Road Installation Survey

Exhibit 10.2 – Crane Pad/Truck Turnaround

Exhibit 10.3 – Exploratory Trench Inspection

Exhibit 10.4 – Erosion Control Inspection Report

Exhibit 10.5 – Concrete Mud Slab Pre Placement Inspection

Exhibit 10.6 – Concrete Foundation Pre Placement Inspection

Exhibit 10.7 – Concrete Foundation Corrugated Metal Pipe Pre-Placement Insp.

Exhibit 10.8 – Concrete Foundation/Pedestal Placement Control Form

Exhibit 10.9 – Concrete Pedestal Placement Inspection

Exhibit 10.10 – Concrete Embedded Ring Placement Inspection

Exhibit 10.11 – Anchor Bolt Projection Verification Inspection Report

Exhibit 10.12 – Concrete Post Pour Inspection Report

Exhibit 10.13 – Concrete Pre-Pour Comprehensive Strength Verification Report

Exhibit 10.14 – Concrete Test Result Log

Exhibit 10.15 – Backfill Foundation Inspection Report

Exhibit 10.16 – Form of Foundation Completion Certificate

Exhibit 10.17 – Form of Reclamation Completion Certificate

Exhibit 10.18 – Record of Property Inspection Certificate

Exhibit 10.19—Batch Plant Inspection


Page 52 of 122

FIELD TILE REPAIR REPORT


Project Number: Report Number:

Placement Location: Date: Time:

Contractor:

Temperature (f/c): Weather: Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy

ITEM General Observations YES NO N/A 1 Has White QA/QC Manager been contacted? 2 Date Contacted: 3 Broken tile staked? 4 Depth of tile: Flow Direction: 5 Tile Type: Plastic Clay Concrete Other Tile Size: 6 Tile broken by: Site Work Collection Crane Crush Owner’s Request Other 7 Picture taken before repair? 8 Contact tile repair service 9 Date tile repaired:

10 Repair made by: 11 Confirmed by: 12 Picture taken after repair? 13 GPS Location recorded? 14 For foundations, GPS location recorded at both high and low end of tile?

15

GPS Coordinates: High End Low End Coordinate #1: Coordinate #1: Coordinate #2: Coordinate #2 :

Comments:

Inspected By Company/Title Date

Exhibit 10.0


Page 53 of 122

ROAD INSTALLATION SURVEY

Project: Project No.: Form Number: WCQA.220.04

Inspection Date: Location of Road:

Temperature (F/C) Weather: Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy Ground Conditions: Frozen Wet Dry Other:

(a) I

te

m

Description Comment 1 Road Width

Road Width is approximately _______________ Ft. Wide.

2 Utilities Are underground utilities present? Yes No IF YES, type of utility: Gas Electric Water Cable Other Any underground utilities crossed? Yes No IF YES, Has sufficient protection been provided? YES NO

3 Sub Grade: Topsoil removed to expose native sub-grade? Yes No Sub-grade rolled and compacted? Yes No Was a geo-fabric placed? Yes No

4 Road Base: Aggregate placed according to design specifications? Yes No Passed required proof roll to accommodate design loads? Yes No Road is graded to provide positive drainage? Yes No No Significant ruts, fishers or deformation in the road? Yes No Road grade is in conformance with design specs? Yes No Road crests and sags conform to design specs? Yes No Thickness of Aggregate base ______ inches. Aggregate top______ inches.

5 Third Party Testing: Compaction tests performed? Yes No

6 Road Pavement (where applicable): Approved asphalt mixture used? Yes No Were Soft Spots observed in the road? Yes No All radii on string road built to contract documentation? Yes No Curves and Pitches surveyed and meet specifications? Yes No

7 Road Survey: Has road been surveyed? Yes No Are layout marks clearly defined? Yes No Road built according to plan? Yes No Were pre-construction photos taken? Yes No

Report By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.1


Page 54 of 122

CRANE PAD / TRUCK TURNAROUND

Project Project No. Form Number:WCQA.221.00

Inspection date: Unit Number:

Temperature (F/C) Weather: Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy

(b) I

te

m

Description Comment

1 Crane Pad : Crane pad built as per design? Yes No Approximate dimensions: North to South:____________ East to West: ___________ Crane Pad Constructed of : Stone Dirt Other: ______________________

2 Sub Grade: Top soil removed to expose native sub-grade? Yes No

Sub-grade rolled and proof rolled? Yes No

Has sub-grade compaction been verified? Yes No

Fabric Installed? Yes No

3 Crane Pad Base: Aggregate lifts (if applicable) tested for compaction? Yes No Final compaction test/proof roll completed? Yes No Crane Pad Thickness: _____________ inches. Crane pad base built as per construction design? Yes No

4 Crane Pad Surface Are there ridges in the surface? Yes No Are there valleys or abrupt lows in the surface : Yes No Is the slope kept under________ % Yes No

5 Drainage: Is the area outside crane pad sloped to insure positive drainage? Yes No Is the crane pad sloped properly to insure positive drainage? Yes No Crane Pad area clear of standing water? Yes No

6 Other Observations:

Survey By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.2


Page 55 of 122

EXPLORATORY TRENCH INSPECTION

This form is to be used for Exploratory Trenches for the location and verification of existing underground utilities in road entryways or equipment crossings for the verification of existing utilities. This form may not be substituted or will not supersede the COLLECTION SYSTEM CABLE INSTALLAITON CHECK LIST FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE ELECTRICAL COLLECTION GRID SYSTEM.

Project: Report Number:

Project Number: Area Observed:

Client: Array Number

Contractor: Form Number: WCQA.222.02 Temperature (f/c): : Weather ( ): Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy

Item General Observations YES NO N/A

1 Are the drawings available and is the craft familiar with the work?

2 Is the installation in accordance with the drawings and specifications?

3 Placement area survey been reviewed for accurate location?

4 Trench in Situ Material?

Location

5 GPS coordinates of place of observation: N: ____________ , S: _____________ , E: ___________ , W: ____________

6 Trench depth is consistent at _________________ inches.

7 Bedding materials homogenous to specification. 8 Trench is laid out and is on course per survey. 9 Where applicable—Soil category has been classified as required by OSHA.

10 Where applicable—Correct slopes for category of soil. 11 Where applicable—Trench walls shored up to prevent collapse or sloped appropriately. 12 Where applicable—Water hazards removed after rain prior to entry.

13 Where applicable—Vehicles and equipment movement kept safe distance from trench edge to prevent collapse.

14 Where applicable—Barricades and warning signs installed and are readily visible. List Deficiencies: Comments:

Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.3


Page 56 of 122

EROSION CONTROL INSPECTION REPORT

Inspection Date: Project Number : Project:

Location: NPDES Permit # (if applicable) Form Number: WCQA.223.00

Inspection Type: Monthly Participation >0.5” Other Contractor: Sub-contractor:

Item Overall Conditions

1 Are all of the temporary and permanent controls contained in the pollution prevention (erosion control) plan or as directed by engineer in place? YES NO If no, complete NCR. NCR Number ______________ Comments:

2 Are the temporary and permanent erosion sediment controls which have been installed operating correctly? YES NO If no, NCR should list additional controls or adjustment(s) the contractor is directed to perform. NCR number _________________ Comments:

3 Are the erosion and sediment controls being properly maintained? YES NO If no, NCR shall list additional maintenance contractor is hereby directed to perform? NCR number ____________ Comments:

4 Is there tracking of sediment from locations where vehicles enter and leave the project? YES NO If yes, describe location(s) and the actions the contractor is hereby directed to perform. Comments:

Follow up

5

Have the additional controls, adjustments or maintenance directed as result of the last inspection been implemented within seven calendar days? YES NO N/A If no, the contractor is hereby notified that no further work activity will be permitted to take place until the needed corrective measures have been taken. ___________________________ _________________ Signature of Inspector Date Location, date and type for failure to take corrective action for deficiencies listed above. List specific NCR numbers.

Additional Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.4


Page 57 of 122

CONCRETE MUD SLAB PRE-PLACEMENT INSPECTION


Project Number: Placement Date: Time:

Location: Concrete Qty (Cubic yards:

Contractor:

Temperature (f/c): Weather: Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy Item Pre Placement, Prep YES NO N/A

1 Are the drawings available and is the craft familiar with the work?

2 Is the installation in accordance with the drawings and specifications? 3 Placement area survey been reviewed for accurate location? 4 Has the Batch Plant been inspected? 5 Has the mix design (direct and/or pump) been approved by Engineering? 6 Has preparation been made for inclement weather conditions? 7 Does craft have easy access to work area (ramp, steps, etc.)? 8 Pre-Placement, Sub Base

8.1 Is undercut required for sub base? Reference foundation drawing and Geotechnical report for undercut recommendations.

If undercut is required, is Geotechnical Engineer on site to direct depth of undercut?

8.2 Sub Base undisturbed soil? 8.3 Sub Base level? 8.4 Sub grade materials verified and compacted? 9 Pre-Placement Inspection – Excavation

9.1 Is excavation for foundations properly located and dimensioned? 9.2 Excavation slopped per OSHA requirements to prevent sides from collapsing? 9.3 Is Excavation area dry without standing water? 9.4 Are grade stakes in place and correct? 10 Concrete

10.1 Assure correct Mix Design? 10.2 Concrete Delivery tickets checked for accurate mix design and notation of added water? 10.3 Finish surface acceptable with no standing water and positive drainage?

Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.5


Page 58 of 122

CONCRETE FOUNDATION PRE-PLACEMENT INSPECTION



Location (WTG Unit #): Contractor:

Temperature (f/c): Weather: Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy Item Pre-Placement Inspection, Reinforcing Steel YES NO N/A

1 Size of bars and grade mark acceptable to drawings?

2 Is location / number of bars in accordance with drawing?

3 “ (mm) Is the Clearance between mud mat and # rebar bottom mat.

4 Top perimeter rebar is “(mm) off mud mat. 5 The minimum clearance between foundation rebar and form wall is: 6 Is minimum clearance spacing between rebar & lower toe forms acceptable? 7 Uniform “ (mm) O.C.# and # rebar top mat. 8 Uniform “ (mm) O.C.# and # rebar bottom mat. 9 Is the overall Coverage per the drawings?

10 Splice lap lengths per code and specifications at " (mm) splice lengths? 11 Has rebar been prevented form being bent beyond code and specification limits? 12 Rebar clean of oil, grease, mud and any other contamination?

Foundation Pre-Placement Inspection – Forms 13 Are forms in compliance with the specifications? 14 Are support blocks the right size? 15 Has form oil been applied such that dowels and reinforcing are not covered? 16 Are Lines and grades within construction tolerances? 17 Are forms aligned within tolerances? 18 Are forms stable and adequately supported?

Pre-Placement Inspection – Pedestal 19 Size of bars and grade mark acceptable to drawings? 20 Is the location/number of bars in accordance with drawings? 21 The minimum clearance between all rebar and pedestal form wall is: 22 Is minimum clearance spacing between rebar & pedestal form acceptable? 23 The minimum clearance between all rebar and template is: 24 Top pedestal mat Uniform “ (mm) O.C.# 25 Is the overall coverage on pedestal per drawing?

Pre-Placement Conduit/Grounds 26 Conduit location marks have been painted on forms? 27 Conduit size in accordance with drawings? 28 Conduit has at least “(mm) of clearance off of foundation 29 Conduit installed in accordance to drawings and specifications? 30 Conduit is tight to forms and ends are properly sealed? 31 Correct number of electrical grounds properly secured to rebar?

Pre-Placement Drain 32 According to drawing?

Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.6


Page 59 of 122

CORRUGATED METAL PIPE PRE-PLACEMENT INSPECTION



Placement Location (WTG Unit #):

Contractor: Temperature (f/c): : Weather ( ): Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy

Item Pre Placement, Prep YES NO N/A 1 Are the drawings available and is the craft familiar with the work?

2 Is the installation in accordance with the drawings and specifications? 3 Placement area survey been reviewed for accurate location? 4 Has the Testing Lab been notified of date and time pour starts? 5 Has the Batch Plant been inspected? 6 Has the mix design (direct and/or pump) been approved by Engineering? 7 Has preparation been made for inclement weather conditions? 8 CMP Pre Placement Inspection 8.1 Has inner and outer CMP been examined for defections? (Dents, Crushing, Weak Spots, exc...) 8.2 Do the sizes and Length of the inner and outer CMP comply with the Specifications and

Drawings?

9 Was outer/inner CMP grounding wire installed per the electrical drawings and specifications? 9.1 Was outer/inner CMP verified to be plumb and secure following slurry or sand backfill? 10 Is lower embedment ring and anchor bolts centered between outer and inner CMP? 10.1 Is template installed with template and associated hardware (Ring, bolts secure with nuts,

center bolts)?

10.2 Are four rebar hoop raps installed around each outer anchor bolt at equally spaced vertical intervals at a max of 6‟ spacing?

10.3 The anchor bolts are 6.‟ minimum above CMP top? 11 Was inner CMP Backfilled using soil that excludes rock in excess of 2‟? 11.1 Was care taken to avoid backfill overflow between CMP‟s.? 11.3 Did geotechnical engineer verify that compacted backfill complied with drawings and

specifications?

12 Mine Spoil Cap 12.1 Size of bars and grade mark acceptable to drawings? 12.2 Are the location / number of bars in accordance with drawing? 12.3 Is minimum clearance spacing between rebar & forms acceptable? 12.4 Is the overall Coverage per the drawings? 12.5 Splice lap lengths per code and specifications at “ splice lengths? 12.6 Has rebar been prevented from being bent beyond code and specification limits? 12.7 Rebar clean of oil, grease, mud and any other contamination? Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.7


Page 60 of 122

CONCRETE FOUNDATION PLACEMENT CONTROL FORM

Project: Placement Order: Form: WCQA.229.03


Location (WTG Unit #): Contractor: Concrete Placed (CY):


Concrete Foundation/Pedestal Placement Control Yes No N/A 1 Are the drawings available and is the craft familiar with the work? 2 Is the installation in accordance with the drawings and specifications? 3 Placement area survey been reviewed for accurate location? 4 Has the testing lab been notified of date and time pour starts? 5 Has the batch plant been inspected? 6 Has the mix design (direct and/or pump) been approved by Engineering? 7 Has preparations been made for inclement weather conditions? 8 Testing Lab Present? 9 Back up equipment on hand for pour?

10 Inclement weather gear available if needed? 11 Batch time to placement time listed on truck ticket acceptable and within limits? 12 Mix design verified on truck ticket as per specs? 13 Slump checked per specs and satisfactory? 14 Air content checked per specs and satisfactory? 15 Water added per mix design verified and satisfactory? 16 Freeze protection satisfactory? 17 Vibrators used and long enough to enter concrete? 18 Vibrators not allowed displacing concrete? 19 Rebar kept from moving during pour? 20 Surface Finish acceptable per drawing/specification

21 Post Pour Curing method in accordance with specifications and Manufacturer‟s requirements

Truck Ticket Nos.

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.8


Page 61 of 122

CONCRETE PEDESTAL FORM PLACEMENT INSPECTION


Project Number: WTG No. Date: Time:

Client: Name of WCI Employee Performing Work:

ITEM 1 Circumference bars around pedestal form (mm) OR (IN) from pedestal matt.

ITEM 2 Ground wire routed in proper direction and out of grout pocket? Yes No N/A

Exhibit 10.9

A:

B:

B: B:

B:

A:

A:

A:

N

A= Distance from Template to Form B= Distance from Rebar to form

First measurement to be referenced from North Direction

Rebar

Forms

Template


Page 62 of 122

EMBEDDED PLATE PLACEMENT INSPECTION FORM


Project: Placement Order:


Client: WTG No.

Exhibit 10.10

Embedded Plate

Anchor bolts

1 2

3 4

A:

A:

A:

A:

Pedestal Support Columns

N

A= Distance from Embedded Ring to support post. B= Distance from top of mud matt to embedded ring.

First measurement to be referenced from North Direction

B:

B:

B:

B:


Page 63 of 122

ANCHOR BOLT PROJECTION VERIFICATION INSPECTION REPORT


Project: Placement Order:

Project Number: Placement Location:

Placement Date: Contractor:

Inspection Date: Inspected by:


Item Description YES NO N/A

1 Is the installation in accordance with the drawings and specifications?

2 Anchor bolts correct size and grade?

3 PVC sleeves secure and undamaged?

4 Anchor bolts plum?

5 Does the anchor bolt projection appear to be consistent?

6 All anchor bolts nuts and washers accounted for?

7 Anchor bolt threads damaged?

8 All bottom nuts on embedded template ring secured with zip-tie, tie wire or other?

9 Template ring at “ or mm from the top of mud mat.

10 Pull test performed for bolt movement?

Projection Height Anchor bolts must be checked at 4 reference points (P1 to P4). Projection height will be checked from either top of template (H1) or top of finished concrete (H2).

Measure Point

H1 Inside Row Top of Temp

H1 Outside Row Top of Temp

H2 Inside Row Top of Con

H2 Outside Row Top of Con

Notes:

P1

P2

P3

P4

Comments:

Signature

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.11

P1

P2

P3

P4

! ATTENTION!

TEMPLATE RING SHOULD BE FIELD INSPECTED TO VERIFY SPACING AND DIMENSIONS OF ANCHOR BOLT

MEASUREMENTS AND PLACEMENT PRIOR TO USE!

H1: Top of Template H2: Top of Concrete


Page 64 of 122

POST POUR INSPECTION REPORT


Project Number: Placement Number:

Placement Date: Placement Location:

Inspection Date: Contractor:



1 Post pour curing method is within specifications?

2 Surface finish acceptable per drawing and specifications?

3 Outer anchor bolt projection “ or mm

4 Inner anchor bolt projection “ or mm

5 Anchor bolts plum?

6 Anchor bolts nuts and washers accounted for?

7 Inner anchor bolt spacing at “ or mm

8 Outer anchor bolt spacing at “ or mm

9 Anchor bolt threads damaged?

10 Conduit damaged?

10.5 CAD welds inspected and secure?

11 Forms stripped and removed?

12 Four supporting from legs cut and grouted?

13 Defects/abnormalities present?

14 Defects/abnormalities identified and repaired?

15 List defects or abnormalities

16 Resolution taken for defects and abnormalities

17 Note NCR number (if applicable): Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.12


Page 65 of 122

CONCRETE PRE-POUR COMPREHENSIVE STRENGTH VERIFICATION REPORT


Project: Test Specification

Project Number: Concrete Type:

Cast Date: Design PSI (MPA):

Cylinder

Number

Date

Received in

Lab

Date Tested Age (Days) Compressive

Strength

+/- Target

PSI

AVERAGE

AVERAGE

AVERAGE

Test Conducted by: Signature Date

(print name)

Remarks:

Exhibit 10.13


Page 66 of 122

CONCRETE TEST RESULT LOG



Client: Design PSI:

Placement

Number

Area/Turbine

Placed

Date

Placed

7 Day

results

14 Day

Results

28 Day

Results

Comments

Exhibit 10.14


Page 67 of 122

BACKFILL FOUNDATION INSPECTION


Project Number: Placement Location:

Placement Date: Contractor:

Inspection Date:



1 Foundation constructed per design?

2 Excavated area free of trash and debris?

3 Has testing lab been notified?

4 Excavated area dry without standing water?

5 Minimum PCF requirement met?

6 Moisture content within tolerance?

7 Grade lifts per engineer‟s specifications?

TOWER DRAIN

8 Drain opened? FARM FIELD TILES

9 Farm field tile(s) present?

10 If field tiles are present, have tiles been repaired?

11 Date tile(s) repaired: _________________________________

12 Field tile report complete? Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.15


Page 68 of 122


FORM OF FOUNDATION COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

This Foundation Completion Certificate (―the certificate‖) is provided in accordance with the Construction Services

agreement by and between:

__________________________________ (―Owner‖)

__________________________________ (―Contractor‖)

__________________________________ (the ―Agreement‖)

Capitalized terms used in this certificate and not otherwise defined herein have the meanings specified in the Agreement.

In accordance with Section 10.0 of the White Construction, Inc. Field Quality Control Plan for the Installation of Land

Based Wind Turbines, the Contractor hereby that, with respect to the foundations related to the Wind Turbine Generators

(WTG’s) listed below, all of the requirements to achieve Foundation Completion as defined in Section 10.4.23 (with the

exception of Owner’s acceptance hereof) have been achieved.

WTG FOUNDATION NUMER(s) _____________

Attached hereto is a report containing the results of said foundation testing and inspection provided in accordance with

Section 10.0 of the White Construction Inc. Field Quality Control Plan for the Installation of Land Based Wind Turbines.

Executed this _____ day of _______________, 200___.


By: ______________________

Name: ___________________

Title: ____________________

Acceptance

In accordance with Section 10.0, Owner on this ________ day of _______________, 200__, hereby indicated its

acceptance of the achievement of Foundation Completion with respect to the WTG Foundation(s) listed above.

Owner’s Contracting Officer

By: _________________________

Name: ______________________

Title: _______________________

Exhibit 10.16


Page 69 of 122

Form Number WCQA.243.00

FORM OF RECLAMATION COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

This Reclamation Completion Certificate (―the certificate‖) is provided in accordance with the Construction Services


__________________________________ (―Owner‖)

__________________________________ (―Contractor‖)

__________________________________ (the ―Agreement‖)


WTG TURBINE NUMER(s) _____________

In accordance with Section 10.0 of the White Construction, Inc. Field Quality Control Plan for the Installation of Land

Based Wind Turbines, the Contractor hereby that, with respect to the reclamation related to the Wind Turbine Generators

(WTG’s) listed below, all of the requirements to achieve Reclamation Completion as defined in Section 10.4.23 (with the

exception of Owner’s acceptance hereof) have been achieved.



By: ______________________

Name: ___________________

Title: ____________________

Acceptance

In accordance with Section 10.0, Owner on this ________ day of _______________, 200__, hereby indicated its

acceptance of the achievement of Reclamation Completion with respect to the WTG Project listed above.

Owner’s Contracting Officer

By: _________________________

Name: ______________________

Title: _______________________

Exhibit 10.17


Page 70 of 122

Exhibit 10.18


Page 71 of 122

BATCH PLANT INSPECTION


Project Number: Inspection Date: Time:

Concrete Supplier: Concrete Class (Type):

Batch Plant Operator: Design Strength (PSI): Batch Plant Location (Address):

Temperature (f/c): Weather: Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy Item Quality Control Program Pass Fail N/A

1 Does the plant have a current NRMCA certificate? Certificate Number:

2 Does the plant have a written QC Policy Statement and QA/QC written manual? 3 Is a Quality Inspector (QI) assigned to each work shift and has signed an inspection checklist? 4 Is all testing equipment in good working condition and is in good repair? 5 Are production Quality Control records being maintained on a regular base? 6 Does the plant have a written “new employee” training or orientation policy? 7 Is all current calibrated equipment up to date? 8 Material Storage and Handling

8.1 Does the plant have bulk aggregates stored separately and clearly marked to avoid contamination?

8.2 Are all materials used to produce concrete certified from an approved supplier? 8.3 Do cement silos have a lock out procedure or acceptable method to avoid contamination? 8.4 Does the plant have the ability to meet production demands year round? 9 Equipment Condition

9.1 Does supplier have a preventative maintenance program? 9.2 Does supplier keep good maintenance records of work performed on batch plant? 9.3 Does plant equipment have current certificates e.g. scales, pulse meters and batch system?

current?

9.4 Does supplier have an acceptable back-up plan in the event of a plant failure? 10 Transit Mix Trucks

10.1 Drum in good condition? 10.2 Mixing blades in good condition? 10.3 Revolution Counter in good condition? 10.4 Water meter in good working condition?

Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 10.19


Page 72 of 122

11.0 Wind Turbine Installation 11.1 Scope

11.1.1 This section describes the methods used for the installation of the Wind

Turbine form the base (bottom) tower up to completion. This section does

not address start up and commissioning.

11.1.2 Before any erection may begin, the wind turbine manufacture will supply

White Construction, Inc. with two (2) approved and complete installation

manuals that will govern the erection, mechanical and electrical completion

process at least three months prior to the first component’s arrival on site.

11.2 Electrical Installation of the WTG shall be in accordance with approved Wind

Turbine Generator System installation manufacture’s procedures and drawings

received within the appropriate time limit.

11.3 Mechanical Installation of the WTG shall be in accordance with approved

Wind Turbine Generator System manufacture’s procedures and drawings received

within the appropriate time limit.

11.4 Erection Only Requirements: In the event that White Construction, Inc or H.B.

White Canada Corp. fulfills an erection only contract, Exhibit 11.1 (Crane Pad Pre-

Lift Inspection Report) will be completed where the installation of the crane pad has

been performed by others. This form will be completed by the erection

superintendent and submitted to the Site Quality Control Manager for record keeping

purposes prior to any main erection lift.

11.5 Operation and Maintenance (O &M): In the event that White Construction, Inc. or

H.B. White Canada Corp performs operation and Maintenance of a completed wind

turbine, Exhibit 11.1 (Crane Pad Pre-Lift Inspection Report) will be completed

where the installation of the crane pad has been performed by others. This form will

be completed by the erection superintendent and submitted to the Site Quality

Control Manager for record keeping purposes prior to any main erection lift.

11.6 General

11.6.1 All supportive apparatus, such as lifting lugs, lifting slings, lifting chokers,

and skids that are provided by the manufacturer or subcontractor and will be

used in lifting and transportation of mechanical equipment will meet OSHA

or equivalent requirements and industry standards.

11.6.2 An Equipment Installation Checklist supplied by the turbine manufacture will

be utilized during equipment installation to document the progression of the

installation of each piece of engineered equipment.

11.6.3 During the placement of the tower base, Exhibit 11.6 (Base Setting

Completion Form) will be used to document the verification the erection

process is in compliance to the turbine manufacture’s specifications.


Page 73 of 122

11.6.4 During mechanical equipment installation, the Wind Turbine Manufactures’

completion and/or acceptance forms will be used to document the alignment

of equipment as it is applicable to the project requirements. These forms,

when completed, will be included in the final turnover package.

11.6.5 Equipment installation activities acceptance will be in accordance with

technical specifications, location drawings, and manufacturer’s

recommendations.

11.6.6 White Construction, Inc. will maintain a copy of retained documentation and

maintain a copy of the records and/or reports required by the contract or wind

turbine manufacture concerning the installation of the equipment.

11.6.7 The turbine manufacture’s maximum wind speed charts will govern when

conditions are favorable for tower component erection.

11.6.8 Non conformance concerning the mechanical equipment installation activity

will be documented and supported by a Non-conformance Report as

described in this plan.

11.5 Grout Pre-placement

11.5.1 Prior to and during the placement, Exhibit 11.4 (Epoxy Grouting Inspection

Checklist) at the end of this section will be completed to verify that imbeds,

forms and intended grouting material is in compliance with the applicable

codes, standards, drawings and specifications.

11.5.2 Grout placement will be coordinated with the Field Quality Control Manager

and the outside testing lab to ensure that the appropriate provisions are in

place for taking sample cubes or cylinders.

11.5.3 Prior to the placement of any grout, a test sample will be performed on site to

insure that the grout will meet its designed strength and any time constraints

stipulated by the construction schedule. This test will be witnessed by a

manager of the testing agency that will collect and test the grout cubes as

well as the WCI Field Quality Control Manager. The Grout Pre-placement

Comprehensive Strength Verification Report (Exhibit 10.5 at the end of this

section) will then be completed to document this test.

11.5.4 A predetermined vibration free location shall be designated for the storage of

sample cubes. All grout cubes or cylinders will be prepared in accordance to

ASTM C 942, ASTM C 470/C 470M, ASTM C 579, or CSA equivalent.

11.6 Grout Placement

11.6.1 Prior to any grout placement, Exhibit 11.2 (Grout Pre-pour Comprehensive

Strength Verification Report) will be completed to insure that the type of


Page 74 of 122

grout used in the construction application meets or exceeds the project

specifications.

11.6.2 Grout placement will be in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and the design drawings. At the time of placement the

Epoxy Grouting Inspection Checklist (Exhibit 11.4) will be completed and

filed by the Field Quality Control Manager or his/her designee.

11.6.3 Where required by the specification and applicable code, Sample cylinders or

cubes will be taken by the testing lab and the results reported to the Field

Quality Control Manager in a timely manner.

11.7 Grout Testing

11.7.1 The testing lab will report results to the Field Quality Control Manager, who

will maintain a Grout Test Result Log (see Exhibit 11.3 at the end of this

section). Use of competent, certified field-testing technicians and laboratory

personnel will be required on all tests and inspections.

11.7.2 The testing laboratory will be held responsible for deficiencies in its testing

procedures. 11.7.3 The testing laboratory will meet ASTM C 1077 criteria for laboratories

testing concrete and concrete aggregates and be inspected by the Cement and

Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL) or an equivalent program.

11.7.4 The testing laboratory will function under a quality program commensurate

with the work to be performed and the materials provided. The laboratory’s

quality control program will be equivalent or exceed White Construction,

Inc.’s/H.B. White Inc.’s quality plan. A copy of the testing laboratory’s

certifications will be kept on file.

11.7.5 Field testing personnel must have a current ACI Grade I Field Testing

Technician certification or equivalent. Any field testing technician violating

the ASTM C 942 or ASTM C 579 standards for grout cube or cylinder

preparation will be replaced immediately and will be barred from the site for

the duration of the project.

11.7.6 White Construction, Inc will reserve the right to remove any employee from

the site as they see fit.

11.7.7 Laboratory personnel must have the ACI Grade I and II Laboratory Testing

Technician and/or ACI Strength Testing Certification, or equivalent.

11.7.8 Non-conforming conditions observed during grout placement will be reported

in accordance with Section 16 of this plan.

11.7.9 According to grout manufacture’s recommendations, special care may be

required to cure the grout during adverse weather conditions. If necessary,


Page 75 of 122

Exhibit 11.5 (Grout Temperature Log) will be completed to track the grout

temperature during the curing cycle of the placed grout.

11.8 Exhibits

Exhibit 11.1 – Crane Pad Pre-Lift Inspection Report

Exhibit 11.2 – Grout Pre-Placement Comprehensive Strength Verification Report

Exhibit 11.3 – Grout Test Result Log

Exhibit 11.4 – Epoxy Grout Inspection Checklist

Exhibit 11.5—Grout Temperature Log

Exhibit 11.6—Base Setting Completion Form


Page 76 of 122

CRANE PAD PRE-LIFT INSPECTION Form Number WCQA.246.00

Exhibit 11.1

This form is to be used for O & M work where the construction and installation of the crane pad has been performed by others. This form will be completed and submitted prior to any lift. This form may not be substituted or will not supersede the EQUIPMENT LIFT PERMIT; LIFT ANALYSIS SHEET; HEAVY LIFT & HOIST PROCEDURE; MASTER LIFT PERMIT. Project: Project Number:

Inspection Date: Unit Number:

Temperature (f/c): : Weather (circle): Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy

Item Description Comments

1.0 Has the area near crane pad sloaped to insure positive drainage? YES NO

2.0 Is the crane pad slopped properly to insure positive drainage? YES NO

3.0 Crane Pad constructed of: AGGREGATE EARTHERN OTHER

3.0 Is the crane pad free of standing water? YES NO If no, is the standing water in the lift footprint? YES If yes proceed to Item 3.1 NO If no proceed to Item 4.0

3.1

Has a third party geotechnical engineer been contacted to address the standing water problem? YES . NO

3.2 Has corporate office approved lift? YES If yes, name of person approving lift:_____________________________ NO If no, stop lift preparations immediately.

4.0

Has lifting footprint area been proof rolled and witnessed by White personnel? YES (26,000 LBS/per axel required) NO Equipment used in proof roll:____________________________ Truck weight of proof roll:___________________ Number of axels: ___________

5.0 Did the crane pad pass the proof roll? YES Continue to 6.0 NO Notify WCI Corporate office. DO NOT MAKE PICK!

6.0 Is crane pad surface smooth? YES NO

Additional Observations:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

If yes attach geotechnical engineer‟s report on how to safely perform the lift and contact White Construction Corporate office.

IF NO IMMEDIATELY CONTACT APPROPIATE PERSONNEL AT WHITE CONSTRUCTION CORPORATE OFFICE! 1-800-355-9401

Passing proof roll is defined as ruts less than 1.0” in depth and pad exhibits no

signs of pumping or soft spots in lifting footprint.


Page 77 of 122

GROUT PRE-PLACEMENT COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH VERIFICATION REPORT


Project: Test Specification

Project Number: Grout Type:

Cast Date: Design PSI (MPA):

Cylinder

Number

Date

Received in

Lab

Date Tested Age (Days) Compressive

Strength

+/- Target

PSI

1

1

1

AVERAGE

3

3

3

AVERAGE

7

7

7

AVERAGE

Test Conducted by: Signature Date

(print name)

Exhibit 11.2

Remarks:


Page 78 of 122

GROUT TEST RESULT LOG


Project: Project Number: Client: Design PSI:

Placement

Number Area/Turbine

Placed Date

Placed 7 Day

results 14 Day Results

28 Day Results

Comments

Exhibit 11.3


Page 79 of 122

EPOXY GROUT INSPECTION CHECKLIST

Project: Project Number: Form Number: WCQA.249.03

Client: Item to be Grouted: Placement Order:

WTG No. Date Placed:

Drawing Number: Specification Number:

Contractor: Weather: Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy Type of Grout: ( ) all that apply Non-Shrink Flow-able Dry Pack Other

Approved Grout Used Yes No Test Cubes Required Yes Yes

Surface Preparation OK Yes No Cubes Taken Yes No

Surface Clean Yes No Grout Placed Per Manufacture’s

Metal Surface Clean Yes No Specifications/Instructions Yes No

Surface Dry Yes No Surface Finish Acceptable Yes No

Shimming & Supporting Yes No Curing Method Acceptable Yes No

Placement area Roughened Yes No Ground wire outside grout form Yes No

Has conduit or other voids been

sealed to prevent grout from entering

voids or conduit?

Yes No

Have all the anchor bolts been

protected by foam pipe insulation

or other means from grout?

Yes No

Curing of Grout was in accordance with Manufacturer’s Recommendations? Y / N .

Hours Temperature was Measured and is in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation for materials, mixing, placing and

curing.

Outside Ambient (f) Mixer

Inside Ambient (f) Tower Flange

Grout Bags Mixed Foundation

Mixed Grout Grout Placement Temp:

Ground Heater Used: Yes No If Yes, Pre-heat Temperature: Post-Placement Temperature:

QA Acceptance: Date

List batch numbers imprinted on grout bags (use back of form if necessary)

Comments:

Exhibit 11.4


Page 80 of 122

GROUT TEMPERATURE LOG


Tower

# Date Time

Ambient

Temp

Grout

Temp

Flange

Temp

Concrete

Temp

Heater

Temp

Comments

Recording Technician Date Signature

Exhibit 11.5


Page 81 of 122

BASE SETTING COMPLETION FORM


Project Number: Placement Order:

Placement Date: Placement Location:

Contractor:



1 Is foundation clean?

2 Has door location been properly marked?

3 Door Location is facing:

4 Has foundation been bush hammered?

5 Correct number of shim packs?

6 Have shim packs been painted/and or marked for non-tamper reference?

7 Have shim packs been disturbed?

8 Has the minimum grout placement of ½” been achieved?

9 Has the maximum grout placement of 2.5” been exceeded?

10 Are grounding cables present?

11 Are grounding cables undamaged?

12 Fiber Optic cable protected if installed?

13 Are all nuts and washers accounted for?

14 Are anchor bolts threads clean and defect free?

15 Are anchor bolt PVC sleeves sealed to prevent moisture from entering?

16 Has pipe insulation been properly placed around each anchor bolt?

17

After Erection, does base section set LEVEL?

Person who verified tower levelness:

Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 11.6


Page 82 of 122

12.0 BOP Electrical Installation

12.1 Scope –Electrical

12.1.1 This section describes the methods used for electrical equipment installation

and related inspection/checkout activities. Wind facilities are individual

wind turbine generators (WTG)s connected together to form an integrated

power generation facility. The WTG operate in parallel. Each WTG is

connected to a Step up Transformer (GSU) be it on the outside of the WTG

or located internally in the WTG. Several WTGs are connected through

underground collection circuits and then directed to site specific farm

substations. Build Specifications will direct all installation procedures site

specific. Only personnel qualified to work on High Voltage equipment shall

be permitted to perform work on systems equipment rated as high voltage.

12.1.2 Conduits will be properly supported, along adequate connections and

maintenance of the bending criteria in accordance with the applicable

technical specification.

12.1.3 Conduit ends will be protected prior to and after installation to prevent the

entry of foreign objects.

12.1.4 Conduit requiring cutting/threading will be modified by equipment

specifically designed for this purpose and reamed to remove burrs and sharp

edges.

12.1.5 Conduit elbows will either be factory or field bent. Any metal conduit

bending in the field will be performed without heating. Conduit bending in

the field will be accomplished utilizing equipment specifically design for that

purpose.

12.2 Cable and Fiber Optic

12.2.1 Installation will be in accordance with the applicable technical specification.

12.2.2 Cable and cable reels will be checked for damage prior to installation.

Material will be inspected by the Field Quality Control Manager or his

designee to insure that no damage has occurred during storage and handling.

12.2.3 Prior to beginning any new work items, the Field Quality Control Manager,

or his/her designee, will meet with field installation crews to review drawings

and note any unusual requirements.


Page 83 of 122

12.2.4 During the cable installation process, Exhibit 12.7 (Collection System Cable

Installation Checklist) will be completed to verify that the various cables and

all other related material is in compliance with the applicable codes,

standards, drawings, and specifications. Exhibit 12.7.1 (Cable Installation

Log) will be used to track progress of the Cable Management System (CMS).

12.2.5 During the cable installation and collection system installation process,

Exhibit 10.0 (Field Tile Repair Report) will be used to track and document all

damaged field tiles during trenching operations.

12.2.6 Cable pulling tension calculations will be verified prior to installation by

turbine manufacture. Where required, calibrated tension gages will be

utilized to monitor large pulls and are to be supplied by the turbine

manufacture.

12.2.7 After installation cables will be secured and the ends sealed.

12.2.8 Non-Conforming conditions observed during cable installation will be

reported in accordance with Section 16 of this plan.

12.3 Cad welding

12.3.1 Cad welding will be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

12.3.2 Cad welds will be randomly inspected utilizing the hammer test method.

12.3.3 Suspect cad welds or any hammer test failures will be replaced in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

12.3.4 Cable terminations will be in accordance with the applicable technical

specification.

12.3.5 Non-Conforming conditions observed during cable installation will be

reported in accordance with Section 16 of this plan.

12.4 Cable terminations


Page 84 of 122

12.4.1 Cable terminations will be documented on a cable-landing chart.

12.4.2 Pre-operational examinations and tests of electrical equipment and cables will

be performed in accordance with applicable technical specification.

12.4.3 Installation, inspection and testing of electrical components will be

documented on the appropriate form.

12.4.4 Engineering shall approve all installations not made per drawings prior to

performance of work and a ―red-lined‖ as-built set of drawings will be kept

updated by Electrical Field Supervisor.

12.4.5 Electrical forms are at the end of this section.

12.4.6 When applicable, The Electrical test information for non Wind Turbine

Supplier furnished Equipment is to be recorded by a third party inspection

agency.. This documentation will serve as a guide and is intended to provide

general information to White Construction, Inc. personnel regarding the

testing of electrical installation and the examining and functional testing of

electrical equipment prior to start up.

12.4.7 Electrical check lists, inspection reports, test reports and parameters are listed

in the Appendix at the end of this section.

12.4.8 The wind turbine manufacture’s supplied equipment installation checklist

will be utilized during equipment installation to document the progression of

the installation of each piece of engineered equipment.

12.5 Crimping Tools

12.5.1 Crimping tools will be calibrated at an interval that has demonstrated to be

acceptable for maintaining crimping pressure within the tolerances for which

the crimps have been designed.

12.5.2 Periodic inspections are required to ensure that tooling operates within the

manufacturer’s specifications.

12.5.3 A daily inspection of the pump pressure and crimp value will be performed

according to the pump and crimper manufacturer’s instructions. This will be

recorded in the Pump & Crimper Verification Log (Exhibit 12.8).


Page 85 of 122

12.5.4 Crimp tool setups will be approved by the tool manufacture of the connector

that meets applicable IEC/UL/CSA electrical codes and standards.

12.5.5 There will be no intermixing of vendor products and tooling as this can

potentially void UL certification in US pole. Any deviation will be approved

by engineering and the client in writing.

12.6 Exhibits

Exhibit 12.1 – Wire/Cable Installation Checklist

Exhibit 12.2 – Transformer Completion Certificate

Exhibit 12.3 – Meggar Sheet

Exhibit 12.4 – Collection System Cable Installation Checklist

Exhibit 12.5 – Cable Installation Log

Exhibit 12.6 – Pump & Crimper Verification Log

Exhibit 12.7—Phase Voltage and Rotation Test Report

Exhibit 12.8 – Junction Box Inspection

Exhibit 12.9—WTG Ground Inspection


Page 86 of 122

WIRE / CABLE INSTALLATION CHECKLIST


Project Project No Report No.

Client WTG No.

Yes No N/A

Cable Originate and Terminate at Correct Locations?

Cables Correctly Identified?

Cables Exit and Enter Raceway Properly?

Do Cable Bends Exceed Minimum Bend Radius?

Cable Separations per Specifications?

Cable Protected from Physical Damage or undue Stress

Cable Design (Conductor Size, Voltage, Shielded or Non-

Shielded). Is Compatible with Design?

Wire Training and Supports Correct?

Wire Lugs Installed Correctly?

Connections Tight/Properly Torqued?

Polarity of all Circuits Verified?

Wire Jumpers Installed, if Required?

Terminal Points Checked for Ground Contact?

Cable Landing.

Cable ID Source Landed to Cable ID Source Landed to

Inspected By; Date:

Company

Exhibit 12.1


Page 87 of 122

TRANSFORMER COMPLETION CERTIFICATE



Transformer Serial Number:

Location:


ITEM General Observations YES NO N/A 1 MV & LV Conduits installed per design? 2 Transformer Vault installed per design? 3 Transformer installed ? 4 Transformer testing complete? 5 Grounding Complete? 6 MV Cable terminations complete? 7 Transformer Bolted Down? 8 Transformer Cleaned? 9 Conduits Sealed?

10 Cable Tags Installed? 11 Nameplate Installed? 12 All MV/LV Connections Torqued? 13 All Ground Connections Torqued? 14 Isolation Switch "OPEN"? 15 Transf. Ready For Energization? 16 Transformer Test Results on File?

Comments:

Terminated By: Company/Title Date

Inspected By: Company/Title Date

Exhibit 12.2


Page 88 of 122

MEGGAR SHEET


Project Project No Report No.:

Client Equipment ID WTG No.:

System Name:

Equipment Name:

Equipment

Number:

Serial Number

Service Factor:

Full Load Amps:

A-Ground

B-Ground

C-Ground

A-B

B-C

C-A

Inspected By Company Date

Exhibit 12.3


Page 89 of 122

COLLECTION SYSTEM CABLE INSTALLATION


Project: Project Number: Report Number: Client: Area Observed: WTG Number Contractor: Temperature (f/c): : Weather (circle): Clear Rain Snow Cloudy Partly Cloudy Item General Observations YES NO N/A

1 Is vegetation removed down to stubble? 2 Are the drawings available and is the craft familiar with the work? 3 Is the installation in accordance with the drawings and specifications? 4 Placement area survey been reviewed for accurate location? 5 Trench in Situ Material?

NOTE: A COPY OF THE CABLE MANUFACTURE’S WRITTEN RECOMMENDATIONS MUST

BE RETRAINED ON SITE THROUGHOUT CABLE INSTALLATION OPERATION.

6 Has minimum depth of 48” for cable trench excavation achieved prior to cable placement unless otherwise specified?

7 Trench depth is consistent at _________________ inches. 8 Is cable at appropriate depth and placement at road crossing? 9 Number of cables in trench: Cable Size: 10 Is Ground conductor laid out at base of cable trench? 11 Has minimum bottom padding cover of 6” achieved prior to placement of 34.5kV cable?

12 Is ambient temperature above minimum acceptable cable installation temperature as recommended by cable manufacture?

13 Has pulling tension of 34.5kV cables exceeded manufacture‟s recommendations? 14 Has pulling tension of Fibre Optic/Communication cable exceeded manufacture‟s recommendations?

15 Is spacing between cable in accordance with the minimum acceptable segregation/spacing as specified by drawings?

16 Cable spacing is at ____________inches (mm) and is in accordance with drawings?

17 Are each of the 34.5KV cables properly color coded? (single core cable BOY, with 1 band for 1st circuit, 2 bands for 2nd circuit, etc.)

18 Fibre Optic/Communication cable properly color coded? 19 Ground Conductor cable properly color coded?

20 Is phasing of 34.5kV cables into transformer in accordance with drawings prior to pulling cables into WTG base?

21 Has adequate cable been left protruding from the foundation for Termination Tails at each end of the cable runs prior to final cutting?

22 Ground conductor joints carried out utilizing 2 „C‟ Crimps prior to backfilling?

23 Any visible signs of external damage to outer sheathing in 34.5kV cables and Fibre Optic/communications cable?

24 Are all 34.5kV cables laid in Trefoil and strapped together at approximately 5 ft intervals? 25 Are splice lengths correct? 26 Junction box correct? 27 Has minimum depth of 36” achieved from top of 34.5kV cable trefoil configuration? 28

Top pad covering of both the 34.5kV cable and Fibre Optic/Communication cables has a minimum of 12” above and 4” to the side prior to backfilling?

29 Has cable marker tape been installed at a 12” depth below ground level? 30

Is cable marker tape located directly above all cables? 31 Trench reinstatement satisfactory to main contractor, client, and Landowner?

32 Does trench require compaction testing?

Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 12.4


Page 90 of 122

Exhibit 12.5


Page 91 of 122

PUMP & CRIMPER VERIFICATION LOG


Crimper Serial Number Size Tool Number Manufacture

Date: Test # Pump Setting Crimp Result Difference

Test Result

Crimp Value: PASS

Pump Number: FAIL

Test Conducted By: RETEST


Test Result

Crimp Value: PASS

Pump Number: FAIL



Test Result

Crimp Value: PASS

Pump Number: FAIL



Test Result

Crimp Value: PASS

Pump Number: FAIL



Test Result

Crimp Value: PASS

Pump Number: FAIL



Test Result

Crimp Value: PASS

Pump Number: FAIL


Exhibit 12.6


Page 92 of 122

PHASE VOLTAGE AND ROTATION TEST REPORT


Project Number: Location:

Date: Contractor:


Item Phase to Phase Voltage Readings

1 A to B:

2 A to C:

3 B to C:

Phase to Ground Readings

4 A to Ground:

5 B to Ground:

6 C to Ground:

Rotation

7 Clockwise:

10 Counter Clockwise:

Comments:

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Inspected By

Company/Title:

Date

Exhibit 12.7


Page 93 of 122

Junction Box Inspection



Junction Box Number:

Location: Client:


ITEM General Observations YES NO N/A 1 Excavation Complete? 2 Crushed rock base installed? 3 Junction Box Base installed ? 4 Conduits and/or bushings installed? 5 Backfill complete? 6 Ground ring installed? 7 Cad Wells Inspected? 8 Junction Box installed? 9 Conduits Sealed?

10 MV Terminations complete? 11 Junction Box grounding complete? 12 FCI‟s installed? 13 Concrete barriers installed? 14 Nametags installed? 15 Cable tags installed? 16 Ground Resistance test complete? 17 Ground Resistance test on file?

Comments:


Exhibit 12.8


Page 94 of 122

WTG Grounding Inspection



WTG Number:

Client:


ITEM General Observations YES NO N/A 1 Inner 250 kcmil ground ring installed? 2 Outer 250 kcmil ground ring installed? 3 Inner and Outter ring ties Installed ? 4 8-3/4” 10‟-0” Ground Rods installed? 5 Rebar Grounded in correct number of places? Number: 6 Correct Number of inside tower grounds installed? Number: 7 WTG entry door ground installed? 8 Transformer ground ring installed? 9 All cad wells inspected?

10 Grounding pigtails proper length? 11 Grounding conduits installed per design? 12 Ground resistance test complete? 13 Ground Resistance Test on file?

Comments:


Exhibit 12.9


Page 95 of 122

13.0 Paint and Coatings

13.1 Scope

13.1.1 This section describes the methods used for the touch up of paint and coating

applications where applicable.

13.1.2 Touch up paint and coatings will be applied in accordance with the applicable

specification and the paint/coating manufacturer’s instruction for touch up.

13.1.3 The application and curing/drying times will be in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations and the applicable requirements.

13.1.4 Where more than touch up is required, it will be addressed by the Project

Construction Manager and the project manager representing the turbine

manufacture as what will be an acceptable process to proceed.

13.1.5 Paint damages will be defined first and foremost according to the contractual

obligations of the specific job site. All damages defined by said agreement

will be tracked and documented upon receiving of the wind turbine

components. Exhibits 13.1 (Interior Paint Tracking Control Sheet) and 13.2

(Exterior Paint tracking Control Sheet) may be used in part or in whole to

track such damages.


Page 96 of 122

INTERIOR PAINT DAMAGE TRACKING CONTROL SHEET

Form Number: WCQA.262.00 Turbine

Location Section

Exposed

Metal Significant

Scratches/Chips Location of Damage Priority

High or Low

High priority is defined as any damage to the main tower or blades that will require several

days for extensive repairs. Damage may need special attention so that the progress of the main

erection crane and crew or not detained.

Low priority is defined as any superficial damages that can be repaired while the tower is

rigged on the spot and will not delay the erection process.

Exhibit 13.1


Page 97 of 122

EXTERIOR PAINT DAMAGE TRACKING CONTROL SHEET

Form Number: WCQA.263.00 Turbine

Location Section

Exposed

Metal Significant

Scratches/Chips Location of Damage Priority

High or Low

High priority is defined as any damage to the main tower or blades that will require several

days for extensive repairs. Damage may need special attention so that the progress of the main

erection crane and crew or not detained.

Low priority is defined as any superficial damages that can be repaired while the tower is

rigged on the spot and will not delay the erection process.

Exhibit 13.2


Page 98 of 122

14.0 Control of Measuring and Test Equipment

14.1 Scope

14.1.1 This section describes the calibration and control program for tools, gauges

and other inspection, measuring and testing equipment and devices used in

activities affecting quality to assure proper range, type and accuracy to verify

conformance to established requirements.

14.1.2 This section does not intend to imply the need for special calibration and

control on rulers, tape measures, levels and other devices when commercial

practices provide adequate accuracy for the application.

14.1.3 The Site Quality Manager and the Calibration Manager is responsible for the

calibration program, including maintenance of a list of all measuring and test

equipment requiring periodic calibration, calibration frequency and accuracy

requirements for each item.

14.1.4 Original calibration certificates will be kept in a controlled file at WCI

corporate headquarters. Copies of calibration certificates will be kept at the

jobsite for reference.

14.2 Calibration Program

14.2.1 The Calibration Manager will initiate and maintain a calibration log for

applicable equipment at the site, which is included in the calibration program.

Equipment falling under the calibration program will be uniquely identified

and listed on the calibration log. The frequency of calibration and date of

calibration will be shown on the log (Exhibit 14.1 at the end of this section).

14.2.2 The Calibration Manager is assigned the responsibility to assure that

calibration records are maintained and current and a calibration tag is affixed

to equipment listed on the calibration log. The calibration tag will include:

the date calibrated, the calibrator and date re-calibration is due. When it is

impractical to use a tag, an alternative method may be used.

14.2.3 The Calibration Manager will determine the required corrective action when

a tool, gage or measurement instrument is found out of calibration. Items

measured by the tool, gage or instrument in question since the last valid

calibration, shall be considered unacceptable and treated as a

nonconformance, until the Field Quality Control Manager has determined

that the applicable requirements have been met. Torque wrenches or tooling

suspected being out of Tolerance will be listed on the ―Out Of Tolerance

Evaluation Of Tooling‖ in Exhibit 14.2 and inspected or evaluated for site

use. If the evaluation deems that the tool is out of tolerance, the tool will be

removed, sent to a Calibration Laboratory for recalibration and issuance back


Page 99 of 122

to the site. All work performed with the out of tolerance tool will be

inspected for compliance with a calibrated tool.

14.2.4 Calibration shall be performed by a facility capable of providing certified

reports of the calibration results using suitable calibration methods whose

accuracy is traceable to known standards (such as N.I.S.T., A2LAor

equivalent).

14.2.5 Torque wrenches used on site will be verified for calibration compliance

before each daily use with an electronic torque tester or an acceptable tool or

method.

14.2.6 Anchor bolt Tensioning equipment will be verified for calibration compliance

before each daily use on a Skidmore machine or equivalent tool or method.

14.2.7 Electric torque wrenches will be verified for calibration compliance before

each daily use by an electric transducer or an acceptable tool or method.

14.3 Pressure Gages

14.3.1 Pressure gages will be calibrated by a facility capable of providing certified

reports of the calibration results using suitable calibration methods whose

accuracy is traceable to known standards.

14.4 Calibration Records

14.4.1 All calibration records will be kept current by Calibration Manager or a

designee.

14.5 Calibration of Customer Furnished Equipment

14.5.1 Equipment furnished by the Customer requiring calibration and control will

be calibrated and controlled by the Customer.

14.5.2 Equipment furnished by the Turbine Manufacture or its representatives

requiring calibration and control will be calibrated and controlled by the

Turbine Manufacture.

14.6 Calibration of Sub-Contracted Vendor Calibrations

14.6.1 All sub-contractors and vendors are required to provide records of calibration

for their equipment. The Calibration Manager shall review these records and

ensure they comply with project requirements.


Page 100 of 122

14.7 Crane Anemometer

14.7.1 A calibrated wind anemometer will be placed on each main erection crane.

This wind speed will be considered the official wind speed for the erection

crew working at that specific site. Regular wind speeds will be logged every

hour by the crane operator. If the wind readings exceed the turbine

manufacture’s recommended wind speed for that particular piece the main

erection crane is installing, all operations will be postponed until the wind

speed meets the tower manufacture’s maximum wind speed for safe

component assembly.

14.7.2 All calibration records will be kept current by Calibration Manager or a

designee.

14.8 Exhibits

Exhibit 14.1 – Measuring and Test Equipment Calibration Log

Exhibit 14.2 – Out of Tolerance Evaluation of Tooling


Page 101 of 122

MEASURING AND TEST EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION LOG


Project: Project No.: Start Date

Client: Contractor: End Date:

Instrument S/N Tool

Description Cal. Date Cal. Due Date

Date Removed

From Service

Exhibit 14.1


Page 102 of 122

Calibration Manager: _______________________________________________________________

Signature Date

OUT OF TOLERANCE EVALUATION OF TOOLING



Tool Serial Number: Description of Tool:

Bolt Size used on: Location::

Application Specification: Test Date:


TEST #1 TEST #2 Test

Number Setting Result

Within

Tolerance

Test

Number Setting Result

Within

Tolerance

1

1

2

2

3

3

AVERAGE

AVERAGE

CALIBRATION TEST CONDUCTED BY: ___________________________________________

Exhibit 14.2

FINAL TOOL DISPOSITION

ACCEPT VALUES AS IS

RETEST

SEND TOOL FOR REPAIR

SCRAP TOOL

CALIBRATION RESULTS


Page 103 of 122

15.0 Inspection and Test Control

15.1 Scope

15.1.1 This section describes the methods used to identify and control the status of

inspections and tests used or performed during site activities.

15.2 Inspection test Plan

15.2.1 The Field Quality Control Manager/Specialists will review and approve

Inspection Test Plans (ITP), Joint Inspection Test Plans (JITP), Special

Inspection Test Plans (SIPT) and/or check sheets to assure that the proper

approved Special Process Procedures are referenced and available for the

work to be performed prior to release of the Inspection Test Plans to the field

for use.

15.2.2 Inspection Test Plans (ITP): The ITP is a primarily test plan address

processes, inspections and tests that is common to all wind turbine units

during field installation. An example of an ITP is Exhibit 15.1 at the end of

this section.

15.2.3 Equipment and systems operation checkouts and test instructions will have as

a prerequisite, independent inspection and approval prior to operation to

assure all required pretest activities, checks, inspections and associated

documents have been completed and accepted.

15.2.4 Item identification and inspection status will be shown by means of attached

nameplates, labels, tags, and/or marking on the item or material.

15.2.5 Those items and materials which cannot be properly inspected, tested and

accepted, will be identified and isolated for the work area for disposition. A

―Hold Tag‖ (Exhibit 16.3 or likeness thereof) if required may be attached to

the item and removable only by the individual who attached the tag or his

immediate supervisor.

15.2.6 If a person(s) has demobilized a project and that person(s) signature(s) is

listed on a the Hold tag attached to a piece of equipment, then the Project

Manager shall review the hold tag and applicable documentation and assure

the correct disposition for that item is executed.

15.2.7 Items and materials presented for QC inspection or test, and found to be non-

conforming or discrepant will be reported in accordance with Section 16 of

this plan.


Page 104 of 122

15.2.8 Records, analysis, data reports and certifications required, resulting from

these tests will be filed in the Project Quality Records files.

15.3 Exhibits

Exhibit 15.1 – Inspection & Test Plan (ITP)


Page 105 of 122

INSPECTION TEST PLAN (ITP)


Project:

Turbine No. ITP No.

Client: Contractor WTG

N/A all Non Applicable Items

Seq.

No.

ACTIVITY / PROCESS Reference

Document/Drawing

Acceptable

Initial /

Date

Unacceptable

Initial/Date

Rework

Initial

/Date

NCR

No.

NCR Closed

Initial/Date

Exhibit 15.1


Page 106 of 122

16.0 Non-Conformance Reporting

16.1 Scope

16.1.1 To define the process for the use and disposition on Non-Conformance

Reports (NCR) by site Personnel. (See Exhibit 16.1 at the end of this section)

16.1.2 NCR’s are generated by site personnel to record and serve notice of a

discrepant condition contrary to design standards, drawings, specifications,

instruction manuals, documentation or processes. Once a discrepant

condition is documented, the NCR serves as a vehicle to track and record the

resolution (disposition) of the discrepant condition.

16.1.3 Items which are immediately corrected will not require a Nonconformance

Report, but will be documented on the applicable QC inspection checklist or

daily Surveillance Report.

16.2 Implementation

16.2.1 It is the duty of all company employees finding or causing a Non-

conformance to report the event to their supervisor who will in turn

immediately notify the Field Quality Control Manager who will determine if

a non-conformance is warranted.

16.2.2 The Field Quality Control Manager will investigate and notify the Project

Manager of a reported non-conformance and initiate a Non-Conformance

Report (NCR), assignment of an NCR number, which will be serialized with

the Project Number and a suffix starting at one (1) [i.e. 28278-1], and entered

into the NCR Log, Exhibit 16.2 at the end of this section. The NCR shall

have the description of the nonconformance, and may have a recommended

disposition entered by the Field Quality Control Manager. The Field Quality

Control Manager will appropriately segregate and/or identify the non-

conforming material and apply a ―HOLD TAG‖ (See Exhibit 16.3) or mark

the item with the word ―HOLD‖ if applicable.

16.2.3 The Project Construction Manager then reviews and validates the NCR and

recommended disposition if applicable.

16.2.4 The Project Construction Manager will then refer NCR’s to the design

authority for final disposition.

16.2.5 Once the approved disposition is implemented, the disposition will be

inspected as completed by the Field Quality Control Manager. When the final

disposition has been validated, the NCR is then routed to the Project Manager

for closure. Upon closure, the NCR log will be updated and a copy filed with

the project records. If applicable, the ―HOLD TAG‖ will be removed and the

item/material will be returned to service.


Page 107 of 122

16.2.6 NCR’s that have not implemented the approved disposition will not be

closed. Partial implementation of a disposition may result in closure of the

original NCR and the origination of a new NCR at the discretion of the

Project Manager.

16.2.7 NCR’s that have been generated in error and assigned a number will be

canceled by the Project Manager. The assigned number will remain in the

documents with ―Canceled‖ entered under Brief Description in the NCR Log

and in Section 3 ―Final Disposition‖ of the NCR Report.

16.3 Exhibits

Exhibit 16.1 – Non-Conformance Report (NCR)

Exhibit 16.2 – NCR Log

Exhibit 16.3—Hold Tag


Page 108 of 122

NONCONFORMANCE REPORT

Form Number:F-8300-01

PROJECT NO: NCR NO: DATE:

LOCATION: SUBCONTRACTOR

CLIENT: VENDOR/SUPPLIER

ITEM

LOCATION

REF DRAWING CODE OR SPEC:

NONCONFORMANCE:

CAUSE:

REPORTED BY: DATE:

RECOMMENDED CORRECTIVE ACTION:

REPLACE REWORK ACCEPT AS IS RETURN TO VENDOR

Description of Resolution Action:

DESIGN CHANGE REQUIRED YES NO

Raised By: Approved By: Resolution Verified By:

NAME DATE NAME DATE NAME DATE

DISTRIBUTION : SITE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER WHITE SITE CONSTRUCTION

MANAGER

PROJECT MANAGER WHITE FIELD QA/QC MANAGER

PROJECT ENGINEER WHITE FIELD SUPERINTENDENT

PROJECT QA/QC MANAGER WHITE FIELD ENGINEER

TURBINE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER OWNER

Exhibit 16.1

No depression in bale where blade was staged

for assembly


Page 109 of 122

NON-CONFORMANCE (NCR) LOG Page 1 of ___ Form Number: F8300-02

Project: Project Number: Start Date:


NCR

Number

Issue

Date

Non Conformance

(Brief Description)

STATUS CLOSED

SENT APPROVED INITIAL DATE

Exhibit 16.2


Page 110 of 122

Typical “Hold Tag”, or likeness thereof, that will be used to identify nonconformance

of an item. Color Yellow.

Exhibit 16.3


Page 111 of 122

17.0 Documentation

17.1 Scope

17.1.1 This section describes the system for collecting, filing, storing and

transferring of records generated during construction activities. These

records will be maintained for work on safety related structures, systems and

components in accordance with this section.

17.2 Records

17.2.1 Records are defined as those documents designated to be maintained for the

duration of the project.

17.2.2 The Project Construction Manager will be responsible for identifying the

records and method of filing.

17.3 Gathering of Records

17.3.1 The Project Construction Manager will have the overall responsibility for

gathering the records as required and will advise the Field Quality Control

Manager which records are to be gathered at the site.

17.3.2 The Project Construction Manager will be responsible for assuring that the

required records are transferred to the Client as appropriate.

17.4 Filing of Records

17.4.1 Subject, equipment designation and/or part number will be filed in the

System Records.

17.4.2 Records will be stored in locked metal file cabinets or a space providing

protection from deterioration and damage.

17.4.3 The Project Quality Control Manager will control access to all the records.

17.5 Permanent Record Package

17.5.1 The Project Construction Manager and/or Field Quality Control Manager

will, toward the completion of the project, consolidate the permanent records

into final document packages.

17.5.2 After reviewing the final document packages, the Field Quality Control

Manager will make those records available for review when required. Access

to records may be established in Project Net for the entirety of the Project.


Page 112 of 122

17.6 Transfer of Records

17.6.1 Upon completion of a project, the final document packages will be

transferred to the Client when required by contract in a turnover package.

Exhibit 17.1 (Acknowledgement of Document Turnover Packages) or a

similar form will be used to record the official acceptance of all turnover

packages to the Client or Client’s designee.

17.6.2 The Project Manager is responsible for arranging the transfer of the final

document packages.

17.6.3 The Final document package will be transferred either by white paper hard

copy or by electronic means as approved by the client.

17.6.4 The transfer of document from the contractor to Client will be as stated in

the contract requirements.

17.7 Archival of Records

17.7.1 A copy of all installation records shall be stored either as a hard copy or

electronic file for a time stated in the contract agreement.

17.7.2 Where no document archival requirement is stated in the contract, all

documents shall be retained by White Construction, Inc. for a period of not

less than 3 calendar years.

17.7.3 Unless requested in writing or directed by White Construction, Inc.

Management, all records shall be deemed nonessential and destroyed after the

storage period stated in the contact or the 3-year minimum.

17.8 Exhibits

Exhibit 17.1 – Acknowledgement of Document Turnover Packages


Page 113 of 122


ACKNOWLEDGE OF DOCTUMENT TURNOVER CERTIFICATE(S)

This Document turn over Certificate (―the certificate‖) is provided in accordance with the Construction Services


__________________________________ (―Client‖)

__________________________________ (―Contractor‖)

__________________________________ (the ―Agreement‖)


WTG TURBINE NUMER(s):

In accordance with White Construction, Inc. Field Quality Control Plan for the Installation of Land Based Wind Turbines,

the Contractor hereby that, with respect to turn over of all QA/QC documentation related to the Wind Turbine Generators

(WTG’s) listed above, all of the contractual documentation requirements for the _________Wind Farm Project as defined

have been achieved and met. Possession of all related QA/QC documentation have been received and accepted by the

Client’s Contracting Officer or appointed representative.


White Construction Inc.

By: ______________________

Name: ___________________

Title: ____________________

Acceptance

In accordance to the provisions of White Construction Field Quality Control Plan for the Installation of Land Based

Wind Turbines, Client on this ________ day of _______________, 20__, hereby acknowledges acceptance, possession,

and achievement of all QA/QC documentation with respect to the WTG Project listed above.

Client’s Contracting Officer

By: _________________________

Name: ______________________

Title: _______________________

Exhibit 17.1


Page 114 of 122

18.0 Audits and Surveillances

18.1 Scope

18.1.1 This section describes a system of planned and documented audits to

determine through investigation, the adequacy of and adherence to

established procedures, instructions, specifications, codes and standards, or

other applicable contractual and licensing requirements and the effectiveness

of implementation.

18.2 Audits

18.2.1 Audits of subcontractors, service suppliers or vendors will be made to assure

compliance with quality requirements, when applicable.

18.2.2 Vendors and manufacturers may be audited by the assigned White

Department.

18.2.3 Site subcontractors and service suppliers final work scope and documentation

will be audited for compliance to quality requirements as determined by the

Field Quality Control Manager, the Senior Quality Control Manager, and the

Corporate Quality Control Director. The Field Quality Control Manager in

conjunction with the Corporate Quality Control Director will determine if an

audit is warranted. If so determined, the Field Quality Control Manager or

Senior Quality Control Manager will perform the audit.

18.3 Audit Reports

18.3.1 Results of internal audits shall be sent to the Corporate Quality Control

Director. The Corporate Quality Control Director will distribute a copy of

the QA Audit Report to the Project Manager, Field Quality Control Manager

and the Client when required by contract.

18.3.2 Results of other audits will be sent to the Corporate Quality Control Director

who will determine further distribution.

18.3.3 Audit Reports will be reviewed by the Corporate Quality Control Director to

determine the appropriate follow up or corrective action as required or

recommended.

18.3.4 Audit Reports will be made available to the Client when contractually

required.

18.4 Corrective /Preventive Action

18.4.1 Upon receipt and review of audit reports, the Corporate Quality Control

Director will ensure that appropriate corrective or preventive actions have

been recommended / implemented and measures taken to prevent or


Page 115 of 122

minimize recurrence of the condition. Exhibit 18.1 (Corrective And

Preventative Action Report) will be utilized to document appropriate

corrective actions.

18.4.2 The Corporate Quality Control Director will determine the schedule for

implementation and completion of corrective action and any required re-

audit. This schedule will require that corrective actions be started and

completed as soon as practical and that action will be taken to determine the

cause and to correct significant conditions adverse to quality.

18.4.3 Personnel responsible for corrective action will report to the Corporate

Quality Control Director when that corrective action is completed and the

specific action taken.

18.4.4 All corrective and preventative actions will be tracked in Exhibit 18.2

(Corrective and Preventative Action Tracking Log) to verify the close-out

and effectiveness of corrective and preventative actions.

18.5 Surveillances

18.5.1 Surveillance is an observation of any activity or process related to field

installation. A surveillance report can be used to report unacceptable

conditions, processes or materials where a nonconformance report is not

required, but a level of document enforcement is. However, a QC

Surveillance shall not be issued in lieu of a Nonconformance Report.

18.5.2 The Field Quality Control Manager will perform surveillances during the

course of the construction and installation process and complete a QC

Surveillance Report (Exhibit 18.3). A minimum of one Surveillance of

activities observed will be completed each day. All QC Surveillance Reports

will be entered in the QC Surveillance Report Log in Exhibit 18.4.

18.6 Exhibits

Exhibit 18.1 – Corrective and Preventative Action Report

Exhibit 18.2 – Corrective and Preventative Action Tracking Log

Exhibit 18.3 – QC Surveillance Report

Exhibit 18.4 – QC Surveillance Report Log


Page 116 of 122

Form Number: F8500-01 Page 1

CAR #: Date: CAR Opened By:

Internal Cust. Complaint/Rejection External Audit Internal Audit Supplier

Previous CAR #: NC Product #: Cust. Complaint/Return #: Owner / Requester Information

To (Process Owner):

From (Originator):

Problem/Opportunity Description Problem/Opportunity Observed by Originator:

Signed: Date: Containment Action

(temporary actions taken to contain the problem and fix until permanent correction is in place) Immediate Containment Action Recommendation: Date Containment Action Initiated:

Comments:

Action(s) to Validate Containment Action Effectiveness: Actual (validated) Solution:

Owner Section Estimated Date to Take Action: Actual Completion Date:

This is: Corrective Action Preventive Action Continual Improvement

Policy Issue Process Issue Admin. Issue Procedure Issue Training Issue

Customer Issue Material Issue Design Issue Equipment Issue Other

Root cause:

Action to prevent re-occurrence or occurrence:

Signed: Date: Signed: Date:


Page 117 of 122

Form Number: F8500-01 Page 2

Verification of Effectiveness Effectiveness assessment/follow-up activity:

Signed: Due Date: Actual Date:

Extension 1 Date: Reason/Comment:



Was Action Effective: Yes No If no, new CAR #:

Originator approval: Date:

CAR Closed by: Date: Corrective/Preventive/Improvement Action Impact On Similar Processes/Products

Process/Product Process Owner/Responsibility

Exhibit 18.1


Page 118 of 122

CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE ACTION TRACKING LOG

Page 1 of ___ Form Number: F8500-02

Project: Project Number: Start Date:


CAR

Number

Issue

Date

Area/

Department

Problem

(Brief Description)

Corrective

Action

Completion

Date

Preventive

Action

Completion

Date

Closure

Date

Exhibit 18.2


Page 119 of 122

Surveillance Report Number Form Number: WCQA.269.03

Project: Project Construction Manager:

Location: Surveillance By: Contractor: Date:

Activity Condition Observed:

Was there an Activity/Condition

Deficiency Observed?

YES

( )

NO

( )

IF YES: Describe Unacceptable Process/Condition below

Recommended Resolution:

Describe Below

Resolution Recommended By: Date

Reviewed By Project

Construction Manager

Date

Resolution Completed By Date

Inspected and Verified Date

Exhibit 18.3

QC Surveillance Report

Print Name Company Signature


Page 120 of 122

QC Surveillance Report Log Form Number: WCQA.270.00

Project: Project No.: Start Date:


Exhibit 18.4

Report

Number

Activity / Condition Observed Date

Opened

Date

Closed

Inspected /

Closed By


Page 121 of 122

19.0 Welding and Non-Destructive Inspection

19.1 Scope

19.2 This section describes the requirements for the required qualifications and

certifications for welding and performing Non-Destructive Inspections on White

Construction, Inc. sites.

19.3 Welding

19.4 Welders will be qualified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D11.1 and

will be limited to the parameters of the process, positions and material qualified for

as stated in the welder’s performance qualification test (WPQR).

19.5 If pre-qualified welders are supplied, then the qualification will be current to the

process, position, thickness, size and material to be welded. A documented proof of

work such as a welder’s continuity log/report shall list the welder’s history and be

current within six months of the last welds performed. If the continuity record does

not show valid proof of current certification, a new test will be taken and passed

prior to any welding.

19.6 During the course of the installation, the Project Construction Manager or Field

Quality Control Manager or other field Managers can request a re-qualification test

where a welder has performed welds unaccepted to the project specifications/code.

19.7 Welding Procedures are to be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Pre-qualified welding

procedures are acceptable where allowed by AWS D1.1.

19.8 All welds found unacceptable to the specifications/code will be repaired as directed

by the site Field Quality Control Manger. All welds will pass inspection prior to

turnover.

19.9 Non-Destructive Inspection (NDI)

19.10 Non-Destructive Inspection Personnel will be qualified to a written program as

required by the specifications and governing code.

19.11 Qualification records will be current as stated in the written program and the

governing code/specifications.

19.12 Non-Destructive Inspection will be performed to a written procedure or instructions

of the written the governing code.


Page 122 of 122

19.13 NDI reports at a minimum will contain the following:

1) Name and level of the inspector 6) Set up parameters

2) Contact phone number of company 7) Company Inspection Procedure

3) Date of Inspection 8) Inspection Method

4) Governing code and Section of Inspection 9) Detail of fond indications

5) Equipment Identification 10) PO Number

19.14 Qualification records will be current as stated in the written program and the

governing code/specifications.

20.0 Start Up and Commissioning

20.1 Start Up and Commissioning is under the direction of another program and

instructions. Contact the Turbine Manufacture’s Project Construction Manager for

information and processes.

END OF DOCUMENT


Exhibit AA

Affidavit of Michigan Equipment, Materials and Labor

Exhibit AA Form of Affidavit of Michigan Equipment, Materials, and Labor

2008 PA 295 COMPLIANCE MICHIGAN LABOR AND EQUIPMENT AFFIDAVIT

I, ____________________(Name and Title), of White Construction, Inc., an Indiana corporation, (“Contractor”), do hereby depose and say under oath that the following statements are true, to the best of my information, knowledge and belief:

1. I am an authorized representative of Contractor.

2. This affidavit is being submitted on behalf of Contractor pursuant to Section 3.8 of that certain Balance of Plant Agreement dated as of ___, 20__ (the “Agreement”), between Contractor and Consumers Energy Company, a Michigan corporation (“Owner”) with Contractor’s [progress] [final] invoice dated __________. (All capitalized terms not herein defined have the meaning ascribed thereto in the Agreement.)

3. During the month of ___, 20___ [NOTE: the month immediately preceding the date of this affidavit], _________ man-hours of field labor were employed in the construction of the Project, of which _________ man-hours were by residents of the State of Michigan. Attached hereto as Annex A is a list of all Michigan residents who provided field labor for construction of the Project during the month of ___, 20___. The companies (including names and addresses) that employed such Michigan residents are identified on said Annex A.

4. Through the end of ___, 20___, a total of ______ man-hours of field labor were employed in the construction of the Project, of which ______ man-hours by residents of the State of Michigan. Attached hereto as Annex B is a list of all Michigan residents who provided field labor for construction of the Project through the end of ___, 20__. The companies (including names and addresses) that employed such Michigan residents are identified on said Annex B.

5. During the month of ___, 20___ _____ dollars ($______) of materials and equipment were incorporated into the construction of the Project, _____ dollars ($______) of which constituted equipment and materials manufactured or assembled in the State of Michigan. Attached hereto are true and correct copies of all paid invoices for such materials and equipment manufactured or assembled in the State of Michigan. Such invoices (and as necessary additional documentation attached hereto) identifies the names and addresses of the companies that manufactured or assembled in the state of Michigan such equipment and materials and describes such equipment and material. 6. Through the end of ___, 20___, a total of _____ dollars ($______) of materials and equipment were incorporated into the construction of the Project, _____ dollars ($______) of which constituted equipment and materials manufactured or assembled in the State of Michigan. Witness my hand under the penalties of perjury this ______ day of ____________ 20__. White Construction, Inc. By: ___________________________

Title:___________________________ (Address, telephone number and electronic mail address of affiant.) I, ____________________________, a Notary Public of the County and State aforesaid, hereby certify that ______________________________ personally known to me to be the affiant in the foregoing affidavit, personally appeared before me this day and having been by me duly sworn deposes and says that the facts set forth in the above affidavit are true and correct. Witness my hand and official seal this the _________ day of __________, _________. (SEAL) ______________________________ Notary Public My Commission expires: ____ / ____ / ________.

Annex A To Affidavit of Michigan Equipment, Materials, and Labor Certified Michigan Labor During the Month of _____, 20___

Company (Employer) Name

Employee Name Job Title Employee Address for previous 12 months

Number of in field hours during month

Total:

Annex B To Affidavit of Michigan Equipment, Materials, and Labor Certified Michigan Labor Through _____, 20___

Company (Employer) Name

Employee Name Job Title Employee Address for previous 12 months

Number of in field hours

Total:


Exhibit BB

Environmental Plan

��

MODULE D

OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Hazard communication written program Introduction WHITE CONSTRUCTION, INC. is firmly committed to providing each of its employees a Safe and healthy work environment. We recognize that a number of standard chemicals are common in construction and that a potential exists for hazardous chemicals to occur as byproducts during a construction operation. When employees are aware of the identity and toxic or other hazardous properties of chemicals, they are more likely to use proper handling procedures. Therefore, a written HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM has been established. This program has been prepared to comply with requirements of the federal OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.59 and to insure that information necessary for the Safe use, handling, and storage of hazardous chemicals is provided and made available to employees. All Subcontractors are required to abide by the aforementioned standard and regulations while on project site. Content of Written Program The written Hazard Communication Program contains the details of our hazardous chemical container labeling policy, Material Safety Data Sheets for every hazardous chemical found in each type of operation, and specific information and training outlines that have been established. The written program also contains a list of the hazardous chemicals found in each type of operation, the means we will use to inform employees of the hazards of non-routine tasks, and the way we will inform other contractors of any hazards to which their employees may be exposed. This program will be reviewed annually and updated by Corporate Safety Committee to reflect changes that occur in the workplace. Access to the Written Program This written program is available to employees, other on site employers, and Health and Safety personnel through the job supervisor or the company Safety Director. Copies of the written program, the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard, and Material Safety Data sheets can be obtained by contacting either the Project Supervisor or Site Safety Manager. A copy of the program is also included in the new hire packet.

��

Employee Responsibility The success of our program depends heavily upon the cooperation of each employee. Employees should be alert to the potential hazards of all materials in their work area, consult the Material Safety Data Sheet for the specifics concerning the chemicals they work with, and follow the appropriate work practices that have been established to protect their Health and Safety. The Job Supervisor and the Site Safety Manager or Safety Director will share the responsibility for complying with requirements of the written program. Active employee participation at all levels in our Hazard Communication Program will result in achieving our goal of a Safe and healthy work place. Hazard Identification OSHA's definition of a Hazardous Chemical is any chemical that a recognized authority has labeled as hazardous and any chemical that produces cellular effect of some kind and any potential or possible exposure in normal use of foreseeable emergency. To insure compliance with this definition, an electronic database is maintained and accessible through the Safety Department. By-Products produced during a construction operation such as saw dust, concrete dust, and welding fumes will be noted as potential hazardous chemicals or as recognized chemical hazards. Hazardous chemicals brought onto the work site by the company will be added to the hazardous chemical inventory list. The job site superintendent is responsible for informing the Site Safety Manager or Safety Director of any new products brought on to the job site. The Site Safety Manager or Safety Director will then be responsible to see that a Material Safety Data Sheet is obtained for the product and added to the Chemical Inventory. Container Labeling All chemicals on site will be stored in their original or approved containers with a proper label attached. Any container not properly labeled should be given to the job Supervisor for labeling or proper disposal. Workers may dispense chemicals from original containers into unmarked containers in small quantities intended for immediate use. Any chemical left after work is completed must be returned to the original container or to a properly marked container. No unmarked containers of any size are to be left in the work area unattended. The Company will rely on manufacturer applied labels whenever possible and will insure that these labels are maintained. Containers that are not labeled or on which the manufacturer label has been removed will be relabeled. Each container will be labeled with the identity of the hazardous chemical contained and any appropriate warning.

��

Material Safety Data Sheets A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) containing the information required by the Federal Hazard Communication Standard will be kept for all substances. The MSDS will be the most current one supplied by the chemical manufacturer or distributor. This information will be managed through an electronic database service and will be readily accessible to all WHITE CONSTRUCTION, INC. employees upon request to their Superintendent and/or Site Safety Manager. MSDS’s will be discussed at the employee’s initial orientation. All employees will receive a company HAZCOM Standard sign-off sheet in their sign-up packet. Employee Training All employees working with or potentially exposed to hazardous chemicals will be trained to understand the hazards and work Safely with hazardous chemicals. Site Safety Manager will be responsible for implementing the employee information and training program. Employee training will include:

1. Methods that may be used to detect a release of hazardous chemicals into the workplace.

2. Physical and health hazards associated with chemicals. 3. Protective measures to be taken. 4. Safe work practices, emergency responses and use of personal protective equipment. 5. Information on the Hazard Communication Standard and details of the: labeling and

warning systems, and explanation of the Material Safety Data Sheets, and how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information.

6. Use of translator to communicate White Construction, Inc. Hazard Communication program to illiterate or non-English speaking employees.

All employees will be required to go through the hazard communication-training curriculum that has been designed for their work area. Personal Protective Equipment Required PPE (personal protective equipment) will be available from the job superintendent. Any employee found in violation of PPE requirements will be subject to disciplinary actions up to and including discharge. Emergency Responses Any incident of overexposure or spill of a hazardous chemical or hazardous substance must be reported to the Job Superintendent or Site Safety Manager at once. The foreman or immediate supervisor will be responsible for insuring that proper emergency response actions are taken in leak/spill situations.

��

Hazards of Non-Routine Tasks Supervisors will inform employees of any special tasks that may arise which would involve possible exposure to hazardous chemicals. Review of Safe work procedures and use of required PPE will be conducted prior to the start of such tasks. Where necessary, areas will be posted to indicate the nature of the hazard involved. Informing Other Employers Other on site employers are required to adhere to the provisions of the Hazard Communication Standard. Information on hazardous chemicals known to be present will be exchanged with other employers. Employers will be responsible for providing necessary information to their employees. Other on site employers will have a copy of the White Construction, Inc. Hazard Communication Program made available to them upon employment. Posting The Company has posted information for employees on the Written Hazard Communication Program at the main office and on the job site. The notice lists information that is available upon request and states that copies of this information can be obtained from their supervisor or the company Safety Director.

��

LEAD AWARENESS Scope This section covers guidelines for limiting employee exposure to lead. White Construction is not a licensed Lead Abatement Contractor. SDR Coating Company is used for all abatement and testing purposes. If there is a possibility that employees will be exposed to lead, the Project Superintendent or Site Safety Manager for further instructions and approved work methods. General It has been determined that every construction trade has the opportunity for potential exposure to lead in normal construction tasks. Those at highest risks are industrial blasters/painters and ironworkers. Lead from paint enters the body through ingestion (eating) or inhalation (breathing) but is NOT absorbed through the skin. Health problems resulting in overexposure to lead are almost limitless. Signs that lead poisoning may have occurred include:

� Fatigue

� Nervousness

� Metal taste in mouth

� Weakness

� Constipation

� Irritability

� Problems having healthy children

� Joint & Muscle aches The most common way a construction worker is exposed to lead is from inhaling dust or fumes. Lead dust is generated by any activity that disturbs paint containing lead. The most common activities that disturb lead are abrasive blasting, power tool cleaning, and welding or torch cutting. Both give high exposures, but welding and torch cutting can give a quick high exposure due to the burning of the paint, which emits lead fumes into the air. When disturbing any type of paint, one should assume it contains lead until tests show otherwise. Requirements for lead in construction are outlined in 29 CFR 1926.62. One must note the standard applies when any lead is present; therefore there is no minimum concentration for lead in paint below which the law is not enforceable. If airborne exposure levels exceed prescribed limits, the regulation applies. All painted or coated surfaces are to be considered lead containing until test's objective data deem they are not. If the painted or coated surface requires disturbance/removal to perform construction activities such as tie-ins or demolition work, and it is determined to be lead-containing, the Project Superintendent and Site Safety Supervisor will consult with Corporate Health and Safety Director.

��

HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS Project Work Plans Every hazardous waste site project that is managed by the Company requires a comprehensive work plan. The format and details of the work plans may differ from project to project, but all must include the following components:

� Objectives

� Method(s) of Investigation

� Decontamination Procedures, where applicable

� Statement that a Health & Safety Plan will be prepared for the project

� Appended Standard operating Procedures, where referenced in the work plan text The size and scope of work plans may be extensive; for example, separately bound plans may be required for sampling, quality control, and Health and Safety for hazardous waste site work conducted under federal or state agency supervision. Site-Specific Health & Safety Plans All projects involving work at hazardous waste sites require a SH&SP. The Corporate Director of Health & Safety must provide final approval for all SH&SP's. A SH&SP must be developed for every project which presents potential chemical, physical, and/or biological exposure hazards regardless of the anticipated level of protection necessary for the job's Safe completion. The project manager is responsible for assigning an individual with the appropriate level of Safety training (in general, the completion of the 40-hour HAZWOPER course under 29 CFR 1910.120 or the equivalent) to develop the SH&SP. As appropriate to each situation, copies of the Company standard operating procedures for Health and Safety are appended to each site-specific plan. This plan will include engineering controls, work practices, and PPE required to provide proper protection for employees. Definitions Contamination Reduction Zone--The area where decontamination takes place Exclusion Zone--The contaminated area restricted only to those who are properly protected and authorized to enter Support Zone--The uncontaminated area where the worker should not be exposed to hazardous conditions PPE Overview

� The harmful effects that chemicals have on the body may require the use of personal protective equipment (PPE). The purpose of PPE is to shield and/or isolate the wearer from chemicals that are present in the work area. PPE is used when engineering controls are not currently feasible or have met with some degree of failure.

��

� Workers entering a hazardous waste site must protect themselves against possible hazards. A careful selection and use of PPE should protect the respiratory system, skin, eyes, face, hands, feet, body and hearing.

� The Site-Specific Health & Safety Plan will address proper PPE based on levels of hazardous substance. Initial and periodic air-monitoring will be used to help identify levels of contamination.

� PPE is not capable of protecting against all hazards. Therefore, PPE should be used with other protective methods. The use of PPE itself can create worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical and psychological stress, impaired vision, movement and communication. In general, the greater the level of PPE protection, the greater the associated risks. For any given situation, PPE should be an adequate level of protection. Overprotection can be hazardous and should be avoided.

Decontamination Decontamination is the process of removing/neutralizing contaminants that have collected on the workers and equipment. It is critical to Health and Safety at hazardous waste sites. Decontamination protects workers from hazardous substances that may contaminate and eventually penetrate their protective clothing, respiratory equipment, tools, vehicles and other equipment used onsite. Decontamination Plan A Decontamination Plan should be developed as part of the Site Safety Plan. It should be set up before any workers/equipment enter areas where the potential for hazardous exposure exists. The plan will:

� Determine the number and layout of the stations;

� Determine the equipment needed;

� Determine the appropriate decontamination methods;

� Establish procedures to prevent contamination of clean areas;

� Establish methods and procedures to reduce worker contact with contaminants during the removal of PPE;

� Establish methods and procedures for decontamination of PPE; and

� Establish methods for disposing of clothing and equipment that are not

� completely decontaminated

� In certain instances, shower facilities and change rooms may need to be incorporated into the decontamination process. These facilities will be included in the Contamination Reduction Zone and will have limited access to authorized employees only.

��

OSHA Training Requirements General All new employees who have not received the initial 40-hour or 24-hour HAZWOPER Training Course prior to their employment, and who will likely be required to perform work at hazardous waste sites, must receive this training. Similarly, this training is required for experienced staff members whose responsibilities have changed to include work at hazardous waste sites. The Company's adopted policy concerning the HAZWOPER training requirements for our staff is detailed in the following text:

� The final rule of the governing OSHA standard issued March 6, 1989, specifies that either 40 hours or 24 hours of initial instruction is required for workers at hazardous waste operations, according to the activities they may be required to perform and the potential hazards to which they may be exposed. The final rule contains several substantial changes from the interim final standard pertaining to the required level of training, and the attempts to clarify for personnel the level of training that is required.

� General site workers (such as equipment operators, general laborers, and supervisory personnel) engaged in hazardous substance removal or other activities which expose or potentially expose workers to hazardous substances and health hazards shall receive a minimum of 40 hours of instruction off the site, and a minimum of three days actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor.

� Workers on site only occasionally for a specific limited task (such as, but not limited to truck drivers or land surveyors) and who are unlikely to be exposed over published exposure limits, (e.g. PEL's or TLV'S) shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site, and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor.

� Workers regularly on site who work in areas which have been monitored and fully characterized indicating that exposures are under PEL's and other published exposure limits where respirators are not necessary, and the characterization indicates that there are no health hazards or the possibility of an emergency developing, shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor.

� Workers with 24 hours of training who become general site workers or who are required to wear respirators shall have the additional 16 hours of instruction and two days of training.

� On-site management and supervisors directly responsible for, or who supervise and three days of supervised field experience (the training may be reduced to 24 hours and one day if the only area of their responsibility is employees requiring 24 hours and one day training as specified above) and at least 8 additional hours of specialized training at the time of job assignment.

��

� Employers who can show by documentation or certification that an employee's work experience and/or training has resulted in training equivalent to the 40 hours or 24 hours specified above, shall not be required to provide such training to such employees. Equivalent training includes any academic training or the training that existing employees might have already received from actual hazardous waste site work experience.

� This policy is broadened to include 40 hours of training followed immediately by 8 hours of specialized training for persons who are likely to be designated as Site Safety Supervisor at a hazardous waste site.

� Sites for which workers must have the HAZWOPER training described above include any properties that have been noted in any regulatory agency's files, at any governmental level, as having documented or suspected chemical releases.

40-Hour & 24-Hour Instruction The Company provides 40-hour and 24-hour Health and Safety training courses for its staff. The course materials and course outline are prepared by the company that is hired to perform the training. 8-Hour Refresher Course Eight-hour refresher courses are given by an outside firm that is contracted by the Company to perform employee training. Medical Surveillance Program General All employees who expect to work at hazardous waste sites for 30 or more days in a year, or who may be required to wear respiratory protection in connection with work at a hazardous waste site must obtain a qualified examining physician's determination that they are physically able to perform the work and use the equipment (29 CFR 1910.134). Furthermore, the determination must be renewed periodically (e.g., annually). Annual Physical Examination The Company will provide at no cost to the employee, a program of annual physical examinations for all employees described in the foregoing paragraph. The annual exam consists at minimum of cardiopulmonary function testing and blood and urine baseline monitoring. Chest x-rays are taken at least every four years, and additional testing is given where warranted to provide for the specific needs of individuals. The components of the annual exam are currently under review, but shall include:

Medical History CBC Plus Differential Chest X-ray General Physical Urinalysis Pulmonary Function Test Chemo gram Vision Activity

��

The Corporate Director of Health & Safety receives and maintains the records of each physical examination. The results of the testing are treated in strict confidence. However, the OHSO reviews any qualified or negative results cited in the physical exam report with the employee soon after receiving the report. The physical examination program described above is "routine" in the sense that the examination must be taken annually. Each employee, along with his/her exam anniversary date, is entered into computer filing, and the Safety Department periodically distributes the listing of staff that is due to take the physical examination when necessary. Project Specific Monitoring Certain field investigations may require parameter-specific baseline and follow-up monitoring. The medical testing for such projects will be arranged with an approved Health Care Provider. Fit Testing In connection with annual physical exams, all staff that has been assigned respirators is required to have a qualitative or quantitative fit test at least annually to assure a proper fit.

��

MODULE D

HAZARDOUS COMMUNICATION TEST NAME: DATE: Answer each question with a T (True) or F (False) 1. All chemicals on site will be stored in their original or approved containers with a proper label attached. Any container not properly labeled should be given to the job Supervisor for labeling or proper disposal. 2. A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) containing the information required by the Federal Hazard Communication Standard will be kept for all substances. 3. Any employee working with a hazardous chemical may request a copy of the Material Safety Data Sheet. Requests should be made to the superintendent or Safety Director. 4. Any incident of overexposure or spill of a hazardous chemical or hazardous substance should be reported to the job superintendent once the job is completed or soon after. 5. The success of our program depends heavily upon the cooperation of each employee. Employees should be alert to the potential hazards of all materials in their work area, consult the Material Safety Data Sheet for the specifics concerning the chemicals they work with, and follow the appropriate work practices that have been established to protect their Health and Safety.

��

MODULE D

HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS TEST NAME: DATE: Answer each with a T (True) or F (False) 1. All projects involving work at hazardous waste sites require a SH&SP. 2. As appropriate to each situation, copies of the Company standard operating procedures for Health and Safety are appended to each site-specific plan. This plan will include engineering controls, work practices, and PPE required to provide proper protection for employees. 3. ______ Contamination Reduction Zone -- the contaminated area restricted only to those

who are properly protected and authorized to enter. 4. Workers entering a hazardous waste site must protect themselves against possible hazards. A careful selection and use of PPE should protect the stem, skin, eyes, face, hands, feet, body and hearing. 5. Decontamination is the process of removing/neutralizing contaminants that have collected on the workers and equipment. 6. Workers on site only occasionally for a specific limited task (such as, but not limited to truck drivers or land surveyors) and who are unlikely to be exposed over published exposure limits, (e.g. PEL's or TLV'S) shall receive a minimum of 12 hours of instruction off the site, and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor. 7. Workers with 24 hours of training who become general site workers or who are required to wear respirators shall have the additional 16 hours of instruction and two days of training. 8. In connection with annual physical exams, all staff that has been assigned respirators is required to have a qualitative fit test at least annually to assure a proper fit.

��

MODULE E

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE & LIFE SAVING EQUIPMENT Scope This section covers the basic guidelines to be followed by all employees for the use and maintenance of personal protective equipment. It also covers general requirements for appropriate work clothing. PPE Guidelines

� Either the Project Superintendent or the Site Safety Manager will instruct employees on the proper use of Hard Hats and Safety Glasses. All other specialized PPE will be addressed during a JSA (Job Safety Analysis) for site-specific training. This training will occur as needed and on an annual basis at a minimum.

� The JSA will cover the different tasks the employees will be involved in, the associated hazards, and the proper PPE for those hazards.

� WHITE CONSTRUCTION, INC. is responsible for providing PPE to its employees with the exception of prescription glass wear. Employees are responsible for maintaining their own PPE in a reliable and sanitary condition.

� All defective or damaged PPE will be turned into their Project Superintendent or Site Safety Manager and discarded immediately.

� All supervisors will be responsible for ensuring that all employees follow these guidelines.

Visitors All visitors to the project will receive client (if required) and White Construction, Inc. (WHITE CONSTRUCTION, INC.), visitor Safety orientation. They will be directed to abide by all Safety rules and will be escorted by regular project personnel. Visitors will be issued hard hats and Safety glasses with side shields. Visitors with prescription glasses not meeting ANSI Z87.1 standards will be issued over-the-glasses spectacles. Clothing

� It is the responsibility of each employee to wear appropriate work clothing required by his/her particular job assignment.

� Loose fitting or excessively torn clothing is not permitted. Shirttails will be tucked in if they pose an entanglement problem.

� Shirts will be worn at all times. Long sleeves are recommended. Sleeves must be a minimum of 6 inches in length. Tank tops and muscle shirts are not allowed.

� Neckties or other neckwear are not permitted, except in offices. Neckwear must be removed or tucked in when operating office equipment with moving parts.


Exhibit CC

Key Personnel

Page 1 of 1 FINAL

CONTRACTOR MUST SUBMIT LIST OF KEY PERSONNEL.

Title Name

Project Manager Jake West; P.O. Box 249; Clinton, IN 47842; Office: (800) 355-9401; Mobile: 812-243-4201

Site Manager Project Controls ManagerEngineering Manager Civil Works Manager Electrical Works Manager QA/QC Manager Environmental Manager Health and Safety Manager

EXHIBIT CCCONTRACTOR'S KEY PERSONNEL


Exhibit DD

Meetings, Schedule, and Progress Reports

FINAL

EXHIBIT DD

MEETINGS, SCHEDULES AND PROGRESS REPORTS

DD-1 FINAL

MEETINGS AND PROGRESS REPORTS

1.1

GENERAL

SUMMARY

A. Project Meetings:

. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements:

1. Kickoff Meeting. a. The BOP Contractor shall participate in an engineering kickoff

meeting with the Owner and Owner’s Engineer at a location to be determined. This meeting shall be held within four (4) weeks after LNTP or NTP to kick-off the engineering effort and to discuss project reporting, engineering submittals, communications, submittal format(s) and distribution, schedules, inspections, witness points, and other related interfaces between the Owner, the Owner’s Engineer, and the BOP Contractor.

b. BOP Contractor and Consumers' Property Accounting representatives to go over property additions and cost records requirements, draft review target date and completion target dates.

2. Progress Meetings. 3. Site Meetings. 4. Pre-installation Conferences.

B. CPM Schedule

C. Reports: 1. Progress Reports. 2. Other Progress Reports. 3. Special Reports.

D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. For Submittal Requirements.

1.2

A. Kickoff Meeting and Pre-Construction Conference:

PROJECT MEETINGS

1. Owner’s Project Manager or Owner’s Engineer will administer a meeting no later than 10 days prior to the Commencement Date to review items stated in the following agenda and to establish a working understanding between the parties as to their relationships during performance of the Work.

DD-2 FINAL

2. Pre-construction conference shall be attended by: a. Contractor’s Authorized Representative and BOP EPC

Contractor’s Construction Manager. b. Owner’s Engineer. c. Representative(s) and designees of Owner, including Owner’s

Project Manager(s). d. At Contractor's option, representatives of principal Subcontractors

and suppliers.

3. Typical Meeting Agenda: a. Safety topic. b. Facility safety, environmental, and health. c. Project schedule. d. Communication and records storage. e. Critical work sequencing. f. Designation of responsible personnel. g. Project coordination. h. Procedures for applicable testing. i. Procedures for maintaining record documents. j. Use of Premises:

(1) Office, work, and storage areas. (2) Owner's requirements.

4. Location of Meeting: Will be determined by Owner and Contractor.

5. Reporting: a. Within 5 Business Days after the meeting, Contractor will prepare

and distribute minutes of the meeting to Owner’s Project Manager(s) and Owner’s Engineer.

B. Progress Meetings:

1. Contractor will schedule and conduct a meeting; frequency to be agreed between Owner and the Contractor. Owner, Owner’s Project Manager and/or Owner’s Engineer, financing engineer, and supplier’s Project Manager shall be present at each meeting. Participants in the meeting shall be familiar with the Work unless invited by the Project Manager.

a. Contractor, Subcontractor, and Contractor representatives at the option of the Contractor shall be prepared to discuss the current monthly progress report and any anticipated future changes to the schedule.

b. Typical Meeting Agenda: (1) Safety topic. (2) Progress report.

DD-3 FINAL

(3) Safety. (4) Environmental issues. (5) Quality issues (6) Review of progress since previous meeting. (7) Observations, interface requirements, conflicts. (8) Review of work progress. (9) Problems which impede BOP EPC construction schedule. (10) Fabrication. (11) Delivery schedules. (12) Submittal schedules and status. (13) Hours of work. (14) Hazards and risks. (15) Quality and work standards. (16) Subcontractor or Contractor default. (17) Subcontractor or Contractor disputes. (18) Non-payment of Subcontractors or suppliers. (19) Approved Change Orders, potential Change Orders, or

pending claim, potential claims. (20) Review of payment status. (21) Corrective measures and procedures and recovery plans to

regain schedule if necessary. (22) Proposed revisions to the project schedule. (23) Review of activities for succeeding work period. (24) Review proposed Change Orders for:

(a) Effect on schedule and on completion date. (b) Effect on other contracts of the project.

(25) Upcoming tests and inspections. (26) Other business.

c. Location of Meetings: At the facility site or as determined by Owner and Contractor.

d. Reporting: (1) Within 5 Business Days after each meeting, Contractor will

prepare and distribute minutes of the meeting to Owner’s Project Manager and Owner’s Engineer.

C. Site Meetings:

1. A weekly meeting between the BOP EPC Contractor, Contractor representatives and Owner’s Project Manager and/or Owner’s Engineer will be held at the Job Site which details Work accomplished during the previous one-week interval and scheduled for the following three-week interval, including: a. Safety, Environmental, and Health

DD-4 FINAL

b. The CPM schedule activities with critical paths identified. c. Resources planned to accomplish Work:

2. A daily meeting, as agreed to and between the BOP EPC Contractor, Contractor representatives and Owner’s Project Manager and/or Owner’s Engineer, will be held which includes: a. Safety, Environmental, and Health. b. Construction work to be accomplished that day c. Start-up activities to be accomplished that day d. Daily work force report.

D. Start-up and Commissioning Meetings:

1. The Contractor’s Start-up and Commissioning group shall schedule regular, weekly at a minimum, start-up planning meetings to review the Start-up report and upcoming schedule events. Owner’s Project Manager and Owner’s Engineer and Owner’s O&M Manager shall be advised of all Start-up Meetings and shall have the right to attend.

2. The Contractor’s Start-up and Commissioning group shall submit the next week's start-up schedule, the weekly start-up report, agenda, and items for general discussion to Owner Project Manager and Owner’s Engineer 24 hours before the weekly scheduled meeting time. The Contractor shall review comments on the status reports, the weekly schedule, and the overall start-up schedule.

E. BOP EPC Contractor pre-mobilization meeting: (The Contractor’s representative will participate in this meeting.)

1. BOP EPC Contractor shall conduct a pre-installation conference at the Job Site as required. Owner’s Project Manager and/or Owner’s Engineer may choose to attend these meetings and BOP EPC Contractor shall advise Owner’s Project Manager of meeting dates with 3 Business Days advance notice.

2. Installing BOP EPC Contractor and representatives of others, as required at contractors option, involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations, shall attend the meeting.

3. Review the status of ongoing Work and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including requirements for the following as applicable: a. Safety, Environmental, and Health. b. Space control. c. Jobsite rules. d. Deliveries, storage and handling.

DD-5 FINAL

e. Submittals. f. Manufacturer's recommendations. g. Possible conflicts of Work. h. Time schedule. i. Temporary facilities. j. Inspecting and testing requirements. k. Recording requirements. l. Permits. m. Protection of Work.

4. Record significant discussions and agreements of each conference.

1.3

A. In accordance with the Agreement, Contractor shall submit to Owner’s Project Manager for review and comment a Level 3 (with Level 1 rollup) schedule prepared in accordance with the Agreement and this Section. The CPM Schedule shall include:

CPM SCHEDULE

1. Engineering Activities: a. Engineering scheduling shall be an integral part of the CPM

Schedule logic. b. Engineering Activities shall indicate the date each item listed in

the schedule will need to be completed to support the related procurement, fabrication, and construction activities.

c. Activities shall include: (1) Major phases of deliverables (2) Systems design (3) Structures design (4) Subcontract package preparation (5) Contractor generated Compliance Submittals grouped by

category (6) Other activities as required to adequately describe,

schedule, and control the design process

2. Procurement Activities for Equipment and Materials: a. Procurement scheduling shall be an integral part of the CPM

Schedule logic. b. Procurement Activities shall indicate the date each item listed in

the schedule will be needed at the Facility Site and the time required for delivery after order is placed.

c. Activities shall include: (1) Equipment and materials to be furnished by the

Contractor

DD-6 FINAL

(2) Critical items to be furnished by Subcontractors and Owner’s Suppliers

(3) Critical Compliance Submittals

3. Compliance Submittal Activities: a. Compliance Submittal scheduling shall be an integral part of the

CPM Schedule logic. b. Compliance Submittal Activities shall indicate the date each item

listed in the schedule will be submitted in order to support the related activities. Compliance Submittal Activities may represent a logical grouping of individual Compliance Submittals.

c. In establishing schedule for Compliance Submittals, allow 15 Business Days in Owner’s Project Manager and Owner’s Engineer office for reviewing and returning comments on Submittals.

4. Fabrication and Assembly Activities: a. Construction scheduling shall be an integral part of the CPM

Schedule logic. b. Construction Activities shall indicate the date each item listed in

the schedule will need to be completed and the time required for completion of the construction activity.

5. Start-up and Commissioning Activities: a. Start-up and Commissioning scheduling shall be an integral part

of the CPM Schedule logic. b. Start-up and Commissioning Activities shall indicate the date each

item listed in the schedule will need to be completed to support the Substantial Completion of each Unit.

6. Owner Interface Activities: a. Owner interface scheduling shall be an integral part of the CPM

Schedule logic. b. Owner interface Activities shall indicate the date each item listed

in the schedule will need to be completed.

B. Submit for Owner’s Project Manager and Owner’s Engineer review and comment, on a monthly basis, the Contractor’s schedule float analysis.

C. The CPM Schedule shall show the Work in a horizontal bar chart or other graphic format suitable for displaying scheduled and actual progress. A native format Level 3 Primavera 6 file shall be submitted to Owner only. A hard copy of the monthly float analysis and 90 day look ahead (Level 3) schedule shall be submitted to Owner and Owner’s Engineer in accordance with the Agreement.

DD-7 FINAL

1. The CPM Schedule shall indicate phases of the Work, starting date, Milestones, and dates of Mechanical Completion, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

2. Breakdown Work phases into separate time bar for each significant or major portion of Work or construction activity, with dates Work is expected to begin and be completed.

3. Sequence of listings shall be by Unit facility in the chronological order of the start of each item of Work.

D. CPM Schedule Updating:

1. Schedule logic, activity durations, and Milestones, the CPM Schedule shall be updated and statused against the base target schedule and submitted on a monthly basis with the progress report to include: a. Actual start and completion dates. b. Percentage completion of unfinished activities. c. Incorporation of changes:

(1) Changes in the critical Activities. (2) Changes in activity durations. (3) Changes in the activity relationships.

d. Narrative update identifying problems, proposed solutions, and known delays.

e. Submit summary of changes to the Project Schedule. f. Submit summary listing of changes to Milestone Values.

E. Provide sub-schedules, as agreed between Contractor and Owner, to define in more detail critical portions of schedules, including inspections and tests.

1.4

A. Progress Reports:

REPORTS

1. Submit a report on actual progress by phase (Engineering, Procurement, Fabrication, Delivery, Start-up and Commissioning and overall) on a monthly basis on or before the 10th Day of the month addressing progress achieved during the prior month. a. Prepare and submit Progress Reports by electronic media. b. In general, Monthly Progress Reports shall include the

information listed on the following page (final report format to be developed by Contractor and Approved by Owner).

B. Special Reports:

1. When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs, Contractor shall prepare and submit a special report. List the chain of events,

DD-8 FINAL

persons participating, response by Contractor’s personnel, an evaluation of the results or effects, and similar pertinent information.

2. Submit original report to Owner and copy to Owner’s Project Manager and Owner’s Engineer within five (5) Business Days of identification of the Event.

DD-9 FINAL

Progress Report Sample Table of Contents

1. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1.1 Progress Summary 1.2 Summary of Invoices and Payments 1.3 Cash Flow Status Curve 1.4 Pending/Potential Change Orders 1.5 Critical Path Report

2. SAFETY / ENVIRONMENTAL 2.1 Safety Summary 2.2 Environmental Summary 2.3 Hazardous material summary 2.4 Safety Action Items 2.5 Critical Safety Issues (Problems, Issues, Roadblocks)

3. QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY CONTROL 3.1 QA Comments 3.2 Non-Conformance Reports 3.3 Non-Destructive Examination Status 3.4 Witness Point Summary 3.5 QA Action Items 3.6 QC Action Items 3.7 Critical QA Issues (Problems, Issues, Roadblocks) 3.8 Critical QC Issues (Problems, Issues, Roadblocks)

4. KEY ISSUES AND RESOLUTION PLANS

5. ENGINEERING AND DESIGN 5.1 Engineering Manager Comments/Progress Summary 5.2 Engineering Deliverables Summary 5.3 Engineering Action Items 5.4 Critical Engineering Issues (Problems, Issues, Roadblocks) 5.5 Engineering Manpower Curves

6. PROCUREMENT 6.1 Procurement Manager Comments/Progress Summary 6.2 Procurement Deliverables Summary 6.3 Procurement Action Items 6.4 Critical Procurement Issues (Problems, Issues, Roadblocks) 6.5 Procurement Manpower Curves

7. SUBCONTRACTS 7.1 Contract Manager Comments/Progress Summary

DD-10 FINAL

7.2 Contracts Deliverables Summary 7.3 Contracts Action Items 7.4 Critical Contracts Issues (Problems, Issues, Roadblocks) 7.5 Contracts Manpower Curves

8. CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SUPPORT 8.1 Progress Summary 8.2 Construction Analysis (Work Packages) 8.3 Equipment and Material Received including storage location 8.4 Critical Construction Issues (Problems, Issues, Roadblocks)

9. STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING 9.1 Commissioning Manager Comments/Progress Summary 9.2 Start-up Analysis 9.3 Commissioning Reports 9.4 Commissioning Manpower and Equipment Report 9.5 Commissioning Action Items 9.6 Critical Commissioning Issues (Problems, Issues, Roadblocks) 9.7 Completion Curves 9.8 Consumables Report (Actual and Forecast)

10. SCHEDULE STATUS AND ANALYSIS 10.1 Comments/Progress Summary 10.2 Actual vs. Planed Comparison of Activity Start and Finish Dates 10.3 Changes in Percent Complete by Activity, including a summary of activities completed 10.4 Changes in the Critical Path 10.5 Changes to Schedule Activities (added, deleted, duration, relationships, etc.)

11. ATTACHMENTS 11.1 Change Order Log 11.2 Safety Statistics Including Accident Reports 11.3 Environmental Incident Reports 11.4 Witness Point Report 11.5 Engineering Deliverables Report 11.6 Procurement Deliverables Report 11.7 90 Day Look Ahead Level 3 Schedule 11.8 Critical Path Flowcharts 11.9 Summary Schedule 11.10 Full CPM Schedule 11.11 Major Subcontractor Progress Reports 11.12 Summary of Invoices and Payments 11.13 Visitor Log


Exhibit EE

Deliverables List

EXHIBIT EE - DELIVERABLES LIST Page 1 of 9 November 9, 2010

EXHIBIT EE - DELIVERABLES LIST

PROJECT: Consumers Energy Lake WindsTM Energy ParkJOB #:PROJECT MANAGER: TBDMP&C PROJECT ENGINEER: TBDMP&C CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: TBDPLANT SPOC: TBD

Line SubmittalNumber Description Submittal

Revision Contractor / Vendor Drawing Number ApprovalRequired

For RecordOnly Status

1 TBD Certificate of Insurance 0 Contractor X OPEN2 Project Execution Plan 0 Contractor X OPEN3 Pre-Employment Screening Program 0 Contractor X OPEN4 Level 3 Resource Loaded Schedule Critical Path Method ("CPM") 0 Contractor X OPEN5 New personnel Environment, Health, and Safety orientation reports 0 Contractor X OPEN6 Near miss, minor injury, and MIOSHA recordable injury reports 0 Contractor X OPEN7 Lien Waivers 0 Contractor X OPEN8 Sworn Statement 0 Contractor X OPEN9 Preliminary Project Controls Procedure 0 Contractor X OPEN

10 Resource Histogram 0 Contractor X OPEN11 Submittal Schedule "This Document" 0 Contractor X OPEN12 Project safety plan 0 Contractor X OPEN13 Project hoisting & rigging plan 0 Contractor X OPEN14 Project weld procedure(s) 0 Contractor X OPEN15 Project Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 0 Contractor X OPEN16 Project erosion and sediment control plan 0 Contractor X OPEN17 Project geotechnical engineering reports 0 Contractor X OPEN18 Mass Concrete Placement Plan 0 Contractor X OPEN19 Job Site safety plan(s) 0 Contractor X OPEN20 Landowner Relations Plan 0 Contractor X OPEN21 Pre-construction inspection report - Contractor Responsible Roads 0 Contractor X OPEN22 Video of Project transportation route - pre-initial mobilization 0 Contractor X OPEN23 Video of Project transportation route - post fall construction demobilization 0 Contractor X OPEN24 Video of Project transportation route - pre-spring construction mobilization 0 Contractor X OPEN25 Video of Project transportation route - Project demobilization 0 Contractor X OPEN26 Public road maintenance, restoration and repair notification 0 Contractor X OPEN27 Post-construction inspection report - Contractor Responsible Roads 0 Contractor X OPEN28 Main lay down area preparation drawing and construction plans 0 Contractor X OPEN29 Alternate lay down area preparation drawing and construction plans 0 Contractor X OPEN30 Notification of compliance with Michigan Department of Transportation & Mason County Road

Commission signage requirements0 Contractor X OPEN

31 Notification of field placement of construction vehicle signs 0 Contractor X OPEN32 Contractor Responsible Road survey and Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN33 Contractor Responsible Road QA/QC procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN34 Turbine Job Book 0 Contractor X OPEN35 Turbine laydown/assembly area Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN36 Turbine laydown/assembly area QA/QC procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN37 Mason County Road Commission approved dust abatement/control plan 0 Contractor X OPEN38 Turbine Foundation Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN




SubmittalNumber Description

TBD Certificate of InsuranceProject Execution PlanPre-Employment Screening ProgramLevel 3 Resource Loaded Schedule Critical Path Method ("CPM") New personnel Environment, Health, and Safety orientation reports Near miss, minor injury, and MIOSHA recordable injury reportsLien WaiversSworn StatementPreliminary Project Controls ProcedureResource Histogram Submittal Schedule "This Document"Project safety planProject hoisting & rigging planProject weld procedure(s)Project Storm Water Pollution Prevention PlanProject erosion and sediment control planProject geotechnical engineering reportsMass Concrete Placement PlanJob Site safety plan(s)Landowner Relations PlanPre-construction inspection report - Contractor Responsible RoadsVideo of Project transportation route - pre-initial mobilizationVideo of Project transportation route - post fall construction demobilizationVideo of Project transportation route - pre-spring construction mobilizationVideo of Project transportation route - Project demobilizationPublic road maintenance, restoration and repair notificationPost-construction inspection report - Contractor Responsible RoadsMain lay down area preparation drawing and construction plansAlternate lay down area preparation drawing and construction plansNotification of compliance with Michigan Department of Transportation & Mason County Road Commission signage requirementsNotification of field placement of construction vehicle signsContractor Responsible Road survey and Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsContractor Responsible Road QA/QC proceduresTurbine Job BookTurbine laydown/assembly area Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsTurbine laydown/assembly area QA/QC proceduresMason County Road Commission approved dust abatement/control planTurbine Foundation Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings

Ball In Court Date Required Date Received

Date Distributed

CEC Transmittal #

Comment Due Date

ContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractor

ContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractor

REVIEWVENDOR





TBD Certificate of InsuranceProject Execution PlanPre-Employment Screening ProgramLevel 3 Resource Loaded Schedule Critical Path Method ("CPM") New personnel Environment, Health, and Safety orientation reports Near miss, minor injury, and MIOSHA recordable injury reportsLien WaiversSworn StatementPreliminary Project Controls ProcedureResource Histogram Submittal Schedule "This Document"Project safety planProject hoisting & rigging planProject weld procedure(s)Project Storm Water Pollution Prevention PlanProject erosion and sediment control planProject geotechnical engineering reportsMass Concrete Placement PlanJob Site safety plan(s)Landowner Relations PlanPre-construction inspection report - Contractor Responsible RoadsVideo of Project transportation route - pre-initial mobilizationVideo of Project transportation route - post fall construction demobilizationVideo of Project transportation route - pre-spring construction mobilizationVideo of Project transportation route - Project demobilizationPublic road maintenance, restoration and repair notificationPost-construction inspection report - Contractor Responsible RoadsMain lay down area preparation drawing and construction plansAlternate lay down area preparation drawing and construction plansNotification of compliance with Michigan Department of Transportation & Mason County Road Commission signage requirementsNotification of field placement of construction vehicle signsContractor Responsible Road survey and Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsContractor Responsible Road QA/QC proceduresTurbine Job BookTurbine laydown/assembly area Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsTurbine laydown/assembly area QA/QC proceduresMason County Road Commission approved dust abatement/control planTurbine Foundation Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings

Date Comments Received

Date Comments Transmitted

CEC Transmittal # Comments

PDCC







39 Turbine Foundation rebar fabrication drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN40 Turbine Foundation bolt template fabrication drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN41 Turbine Foundation engineering model inputs and outputs 0 Contractor X OPEN42 Turbine Foundation concrete mix design 0 Contractor X OPEN43 Turbine Job Site electrical grounding system calculations and details 0 Contractor X OPEN44 Third Party Turbine Foundation certification and test reports (Per Exhibit A, Paragraph 1.3.5(h)) 0 Contractor X OPEN

45 Turbine Foundation QA/QC plan 0 Contractor X OPEN46 Crane pad design Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN47 Crane pad QA/QC procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN48 Third party crane pad foundation compaction certification and test reports 0 Contractor X OPEN49 Crane pad removal and restoration completion notification 0 Contractor X OPEN50 Turbine erection crane management plan 0 Contractor X OPEN51 Turbine receipt and inspection reports 0 Contractor X OPEN52 Turbine quality control plan 0 Contractor X OPEN53 Turbine installation QA/QC procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN54 Elevator Permit Application 0 Contractor X OPEN55 State Issued Elevator Permit - Certificate of Operation 0 Contractor X OPEN56 Tower base grout testing report 0 Contractor X OPEN57 Job Site specific hoisting and rigging plan 0 Contractor X OPEN58 Daily rigging inspection reports 0 Contractor X OPEN59 Arc flash hazard analysis report for switchgear in Turbine base. 0 Contractor X OPEN60 Meteorological Tower Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN61 Meteorological Tower foundation Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN62 Meteorological Tower access road plans and Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN63 Meteorological Tower QA/QC procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN64 Collection System Circuit Job Book 0 Contractor X OPEN65 Collection System Circuit route & electrical one-line and three-line Approved for Construction (AFC)

drawings0 Contractor X OPEN

66 Collection System Circuit load flow study 0 Contractor X OPEN67 Collection System Circuit short circuit analysis 0 Contractor X OPEN68 Collection System Circuit harmonics analysis 0 Contractor X OPEN69 Collection System Circuit temporary overvoltage (TOV) and insulation coordination studies 0 Contractor X OPEN70 Collection System Circuit grounding studies 0 Contractor X OPEN71 Collection System Circuit protection and coordination studies 0 Contractor X OPEN72 Collection System Circuit communication and control interaction studies 0 Contractor X OPEN73 Collection System Circuit testing and commissioning plan and procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN74 Collection System Circuit route and electrical one-line and three-line as-built drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN75 Collection System Circuit splice and termination installer certification documentation 0 Contractor X OPEN





Turbine Foundation rebar fabrication drawingsTurbine Foundation bolt template fabrication drawingsTurbine Foundation engineering model inputs and outputsTurbine Foundation concrete mix designTurbine Job Site electrical grounding system calculations and detailsThird Party Turbine Foundation certification and test reports (Per Exhibit A, Paragraph 1.3.5(h))

Turbine Foundation QA/QC planCrane pad design Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsCrane pad QA/QC proceduresThird party crane pad foundation compaction certification and test reportsCrane pad removal and restoration completion notificationTurbine erection crane management planTurbine receipt and inspection reportsTurbine quality control planTurbine installation QA/QC proceduresElevator Permit ApplicationState Issued Elevator Permit - Certificate of OperationTower base grout testing reportJob Site specific hoisting and rigging planDaily rigging inspection reportsArc flash hazard analysis report for switchgear in Turbine base.Meteorological Tower Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsMeteorological Tower foundation Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsMeteorological Tower access road plans and Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsMeteorological Tower QA/QC proceduresCollection System Circuit Job BookCollection System Circuit route & electrical one-line and three-line Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsCollection System Circuit load flow studyCollection System Circuit short circuit analysisCollection System Circuit harmonics analysisCollection System Circuit temporary overvoltage (TOV) and insulation coordination studiesCollection System Circuit grounding studiesCollection System Circuit protection and coordination studiesCollection System Circuit communication and control interaction studiesCollection System Circuit testing and commissioning plan and proceduresCollection System Circuit route and electrical one-line and three-line as-built drawingsCollection System Circuit splice and termination installer certification documentation


Date Distributed

CEC Transmittal #

Comment Due Date

REVIEWVENDOR

ContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractor

ContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractor

ContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractor





Turbine Foundation rebar fabrication drawingsTurbine Foundation bolt template fabrication drawingsTurbine Foundation engineering model inputs and outputsTurbine Foundation concrete mix designTurbine Job Site electrical grounding system calculations and detailsThird Party Turbine Foundation certification and test reports (Per Exhibit A, Paragraph 1.3.5(h))

Turbine Foundation QA/QC planCrane pad design Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsCrane pad QA/QC proceduresThird party crane pad foundation compaction certification and test reportsCrane pad removal and restoration completion notificationTurbine erection crane management planTurbine receipt and inspection reportsTurbine quality control planTurbine installation QA/QC proceduresElevator Permit ApplicationState Issued Elevator Permit - Certificate of OperationTower base grout testing reportJob Site specific hoisting and rigging planDaily rigging inspection reportsArc flash hazard analysis report for switchgear in Turbine base.Meteorological Tower Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsMeteorological Tower foundation Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsMeteorological Tower access road plans and Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsMeteorological Tower QA/QC proceduresCollection System Circuit Job BookCollection System Circuit route & electrical one-line and three-line Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsCollection System Circuit load flow studyCollection System Circuit short circuit analysisCollection System Circuit harmonics analysisCollection System Circuit temporary overvoltage (TOV) and insulation coordination studiesCollection System Circuit grounding studiesCollection System Circuit protection and coordination studiesCollection System Circuit communication and control interaction studiesCollection System Circuit testing and commissioning plan and proceduresCollection System Circuit route and electrical one-line and three-line as-built drawingsCollection System Circuit splice and termination installer certification documentation




PDCC







76 Collection System Circuit splice and termination procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN77 Collection System Circuit splice and termination samples 0 Contractor X OPEN78 Collection System Circuit QA/QC Procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN79 Collection System Circuit grounding grid test report 0 Contractor X OPEN80 Collection System Circuit partial discharge test report 0 Contractor X OPEN81 Collection System Substation Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN82 Collection System Substation electrical grounding system calculations and details 0 Contractor X OPEN83 Collection System Substation foundation concrete specifications and designs 0 Contractor X OPEN84 Collection System Substation structural specifications and designs 0 Contractor X OPEN85 Collection System Substation energization plan and procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN86 Collection System Substation testing and commissioning plan and procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN87 Collection System Pre-energization notification to Owner 0 Contractor X OPEN88 Collection System Substation energization plan 0 Contractor X OPEN89 Collection System Substation O&M Manuals 0 Contractor X OPEN90 Collection System Substation control building major equipment checklist 0 Contractor X OPEN91 Collection System Substation equipment acceptance test reports 0 Contractor X OPEN92 Proposed fiber optic network design drawings for Owner and Turbine Supplier approval 0 Contractor X OPEN93 Fiber optic spilce and distribution panel splicing and distribution panel drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN94 Final fiber optic network Approved for Construction drawings 0 Contractor X OPEN95 Drain tile damage & repair Report (GPS of location, date of damage, date of repair & photograph of

repair)0 Contractor X OPEN

96 Substation SCADA System Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings and documentation 0 Contractor X OPEN97 Substation SCADA System device configuration files 0 Contractor X OPEN98 Substation SCADA System test plan and acceptance testing procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN99 Substation SCADA System QA/QC procedures 0 Contractor X OPEN

100 QA/QC Closeout Documentation 0 Contractor X OPEN101 Logistics Plan 0 Contractor X OPEN





Collection System Circuit splice and termination proceduresCollection System Circuit splice and termination samplesCollection System Circuit QA/QC ProceduresCollection System Circuit grounding grid test reportCollection System Circuit partial discharge test reportCollection System Substation Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsCollection System Substation electrical grounding system calculations and detailsCollection System Substation foundation concrete specifications and designsCollection System Substation structural specifications and designsCollection System Substation energization plan and proceduresCollection System Substation testing and commissioning plan and proceduresCollection System Pre-energization notification to OwnerCollection System Substation energization planCollection System Substation O&M ManualsCollection System Substation control building major equipment checklistCollection System Substation equipment acceptance test reportsProposed fiber optic network design drawings for Owner and Turbine Supplier approvalFiber optic spilce and distribution panel splicing and distribution panel drawingsFinal fiber optic network Approved for Construction drawings Drain tile damage & repair Report (GPS of location, date of damage, date of repair & photograph of repair)Substation SCADA System Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings and documentationSubstation SCADA System device configuration filesSubstation SCADA System test plan and acceptance testing proceduresSubstation SCADA System QA/QC proceduresQA/QC Closeout DocumentationLogistics Plan


Date Distributed

CEC Transmittal #

Comment Due Date

REVIEWVENDOR

ContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractor

ContractorContractorContractorContractorContractorContractor





Collection System Circuit splice and termination proceduresCollection System Circuit splice and termination samplesCollection System Circuit QA/QC ProceduresCollection System Circuit grounding grid test reportCollection System Circuit partial discharge test reportCollection System Substation Approved for Construction (AFC) drawingsCollection System Substation electrical grounding system calculations and detailsCollection System Substation foundation concrete specifications and designsCollection System Substation structural specifications and designsCollection System Substation energization plan and proceduresCollection System Substation testing and commissioning plan and proceduresCollection System Pre-energization notification to OwnerCollection System Substation energization planCollection System Substation O&M ManualsCollection System Substation control building major equipment checklistCollection System Substation equipment acceptance test reportsProposed fiber optic network design drawings for Owner and Turbine Supplier approvalFiber optic spilce and distribution panel splicing and distribution panel drawingsFinal fiber optic network Approved for Construction drawings Drain tile damage & repair Report (GPS of location, date of damage, date of repair & photograph of repair)Substation SCADA System Approved for Construction (AFC) drawings and documentationSubstation SCADA System device configuration filesSubstation SCADA System test plan and acceptance testing proceduresSubstation SCADA System QA/QC proceduresQA/QC Closeout DocumentationLogistics Plan




PDCC


Exhibit FF Request for Information Form

Revision 0 Page 1 of 1

* This RFI DOES NOT authorize any scope of work, cost, or schedule impact. The PCN process must be followed, if required.

Request For Information

Project: Consumers Energy RFI- Project File Index No(s):

Contractor:

Contract Title:

Contract Number:

Contractor RFI Number (if applicable):

Subject:

To:

Originator:

Drawing Reference(s):

Contract Reference(s):

Date Created:

Respond By Date:

Date Closed:

Originator Description: (Provide attachments as required)

Originator Recommendation:

Yes No Cost Impact * $

Schedule Impact *

Response:

Respondent Name (Print) & Signature:

Date:

Yes No (PCN) Project Change Notice Required * PCN Number:

CC: (List as Required)


Exhibit GG

Wind Delay Reporting Form

FINAL

Requested by: White Construction , Inc.

Date:

Pad Location:

to time:

Time

Other Relevant Factors/Information:

Qualifies for: Yes NoFull Day:

Wind exceeded limits from time:

Contractor's Signature:Owner's Signature:

Time Reported to Owner:

Type of Work and Wind Speed Limits:

Sample taken by:Wind Speed

Crane Type and Number:

Exhibit GG - Wind Day Reporting Form


Exhibit HH

Sample Warranty Claim Form

Exhibit HH Page 1 of 1

Exhibit HH

Warranty Claim Form

Claim No. _______ Claim Date _______

Reference is made to the Lake WindsTM Energy Park, Balance of Plant Engineering,

Procurement and Construction Agreement, dated as of [____________], (the “Agreement”),

between Consumers Energy Company (“Owner”), and White Construction, Inc. (“Contractor”).

Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in the Agreement.

In accordance with Article 11 of the Agreement, Owner hereby provides notice of the following

Warranty claim (describe claim):

The above-described event occurred on (insert date) ____________________________.

Please attached any relevant documentation, drawings and photographs, as required to fully document and describe the claim. Owner: Consumers Energy Corporation, By: __________________________

Name: ________________________

Title: _________________________

Date: _________________________


Exhibit II

Permanently Installed Materials Not Claimed as Sales/Use Tax Exempt

EXHIBIT II Permanently Installed Materials not Claimed as Sales/Use Tax Exempt

The following materials, parts, supplies or equipment to be supplied and permanently installed in the Project by the Contractor are not claimed by the Owner to be exempt from Michigan sales and use tax by reason of the Industrial Processing exemption. The Contractor shall pay, and the Contract Price fully includes, all applicable sales and use tax on these materials, parts, supplies or equipment. A. All materials, parts, supplies and equipment to be installed in or for roads (public as well as Owner’s

access roads on private lands) and any parking or similar areas, including but not necessarily limited to: • aggregate surface/road materials (e.g., crushed concrete/limestone). • geo-textile fabric (fabric underlayment placed between aggregate surfacing material and sub-

base). • culverts

B. Collection System Substation – ONLY the following:

• fencing. • security equipment (e.g., cameras, card access and associated wiring). • gravel, rock and related ground finish materials (other than concrete foundations) within the

fenced substation area. • see above regarding access drive and parking areas outside substation fence. • landscaping.

C. Turbines – ONLY the following:

• security equipment (e.g., cameras, card access and associated wiring). D. Operations and Maintenance Building (if Owner elects the option for the Operations and Maintenance

Building) - - all materials, parts, supplies and equipment, including but not necessarily limited to: • steel structural materials. • concrete for foundations, flooring, or vehicle areas. • general building materials (plumbing, electrical, mechanical, etc.). • aggregate surface for equipment storage areas. • see above regarding access drive and parking areas outside building. • landscaping.